Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Contract drawings are generally diagrammatic and do not indicate all offsets, fittings, transitions, access panels and other specialties required.

1. Furnish and install all items as may be required at no additional cost to fit the work to the conditions encountered. 2. Arrange piping, ductwork, equipment and other work generally as shown on the contract drawings, providing proper clearances and access. 3. Where departures are proposed because of field conditions or other causes, prepare and submit detailed shop drawing submittal for approval in accordance with Submittals specified below. 4. Subject to the provisions of Division 01, Architect may make reasonable changes in location of equipment piping and ductwork up to the time of rough-in or fabrication.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Clearly identify all submittals: a. Indicate intended application, location, etc. b. Each submittal shall indicate the associated specification section, and paragraphs. Do not combine product data and shop drawing submittals from different spec sections into a single submittal package, even though they may be the same distributor, vendor or part of a single material order. c. Clearly indicate the exact type, model number, size and special features of the proposed item. d. Include catalog spec sheets to completely describe proposed equipment. e. Factory order forms only showing the required capacities are not acceptable. f. Identify all options furnished to meet specifications. g. The Architect shall not select equipment ratings and/or options. Submittals not properly marked shall be returned without review.

B. Product Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Division 01.

C. Comparable Products Submission:

1. Document each request for a proposed comparable product with supporting data substantiating compliance of proposed product with Basis-of-Design product.

D. Coordination Drawings:

1. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of ¼”=1’0” or larger, detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

a. The proposed locations of piping, valving, ductwork, equipment, and materials. b. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve stem movement. c. Planned duct systems layout, including elbow radii and duct accessories. d. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. e. Clearances for serving and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. f. Equipment connections and support details. g. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Duct fire dampers. k. Access doors. l. Clearances at electrical components in accordance with the National Electrical Code. m. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. n. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. Show all wall mounted access doors for devices in ductwork or piping. o. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets light fixtures, communication systems components, cable trays, sprinklers, access doors and other ceiling mounted items.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) Requirements: All equipment containing electrical components and provided under Division 23 shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) label, as a complete packaged system.

B. Fire Safe Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall conform to UL, National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) or American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards for fire safety with smoke and fire hazard rating not exceeding flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Prior to preparing the bid, visit the site and become familiar with all existing conditions. Make all necessary investigations as to locations of utilities and all other matters, which can affect the work. No additional compensation will be made for failure to determine the conditions under which the work will be performed.

B. Outages

1. All mechanical outages which will interfere with the normal use of the building in

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

any manner shall be done at such times as shall be mutually agreed upon with the Owner. 2. Unless otherwise specified, outages of any services required for the performance of this contract and affecting areas other than the immediate work area shall be scheduled with the Owner at least fourteen days (14) days in advance. All such outages shall be performed on other than normal work hours, Monday through Friday 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. 3. The bid price shall include the cost of all premium time required for outages and other work which interferes with the normal use of the building. 4. The operation of valves or switches required to achieve an outage shall be accomplished by the Owner or the Contractor. Unauthorized operation of valves, power switches, or other control devices shall not be permitted.

1.5 DISCREPANCIES

A. Where discrepancies occur between the drawings and specifications or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the contract price. The Architect shall decide on the item and manner in which the work shall be provided, based on the design intent of the documents.

1.6 ELECTRONIC CAD DOCUMENTS

A. Requests for electronic CAD documents will be accommodated to the contractors and installers upon their completion of Kibart’s electronic document release of liability form and payment for time and expense for document preparation.

1. Kibart’s document preparation fee is as follows: a. Two hundred and fifty dollars ($250.00) for the first five (5) drawings. b. Fifty dollars ($50.00) for each drawing thereafter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents that are undamaged and new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Where products are accompanied by the term as selected, Architect will make selection. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term match sample, sample to be matched is Architect's. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. General Compliance Requirements: Compliance requirements for individual products, as indicated in Contract Documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic descriptions, performance requirements, compliance with reference standards, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by Contract Document requirements, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.

D. Products specified by Reference Standards, Codes and Regulations: Select from among products, which can be shown to comply with referenced documents.

E. Products specified by Naming Products and Manufacturers: Select from among products listed.

F. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product as the Basis-of-Design with Reference to Other Manufacturers: Select either the specified Basis-of-Design product or an approved comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use of a comparable product by one of the named manufacturers.

G. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product and Indicating Option of Selecting Comparable Products by stating or Approved Equivalent or similar language: Select either the specified product or an approved comparable product.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use of a comparable product by one of the named or un-named manufacturers.

H. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and, matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily.

I. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture.

1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase standard range of colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase full range of colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Where Basis-of-Design products are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of a comparable product by one of the named manufacturers:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with the Basis- of-Design product in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, serviceability, visual effect, and

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.

2.3 GROUT

A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink)”, “latest edition”.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Provide manufactured steel door assemblies consisting of:

1. Hinged door. 2. Flush screwdriver camlocks and frame.

B. Doors shall be Milcor Metal Access doors. Provide key locks where indicated.

C. Design shall be provided for the following installations:

1. Masonry or Dry Wall: Style M. 2. Hard Finish Plaster: Style AP. 3. Fire rated dry wall ceilings: Style CFRAD, 1 hour combustible floor ceiling system, 1 hour non-combustible floor ceiling system, 3 hour non-combustible floor ceiling system. 4. Suspended ceilings: Style CT. 5. Security: Style 3211.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

6. Where systems, materials and equipment are intended for overhead installation, and where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

B. Housekeeping and Equipment Pads

1. Construct pads of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement bars

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect observation of concealed Work.

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, ductwork, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

F. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and using experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

3.3 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 23 and as indicated. Remove pipes and ducts back to the active pipe and duct to remain and cap.

B. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.

C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.

D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches beyond the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.

E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.

F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Cutting, Welding, Burning

1. Before commencing any cutting, welding, burning, brazing (pipe sweating), obtain a hot work permit from Environmental Health and Safety. 2. The hot work permit copy shall remain on the job site at the hot work location until such work is completed at which time the permit shall be returned to Environmental Health and Safety. 3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces prior to application of insulation, adhesives, coating, and paint.

B. Provide factory applied finish where specified.

C. Protect all finishes, and restore all finishes to their original condition if damaged as a result of work under Division 23.

D. Remove all construction marking and writing from exposed equipment, ductwork, piping and building surfaces.

E. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section Temporary Facilities.

F. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Remove all mechanical clipping, wiring, nuts, bolts, etc. left on top of ceilings and ceiling

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

tiles.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work, material and equipment from weather and construction operations before and after installation.

B. Properly store and handle all materials and equipment.

C. Cover temporary openings in piping, ductwork and equipment to prevent the entrance of water, dirt, debris, and other foreign matter.

3.7 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. It is the intent to provide a complete and operational system. The work between Division 23 and 26 is complementary and is meant to produce a single and operating system. Contractor shall make its own determination as to the distribution of responsibility among the various trades.

B. All electrical work performed under Division 23 shall be provided in accordance with Division 26.

3.8 PROVISIONS FOR ACCESS

A. Furnish and install adequate access to all HVAC and plumbing components. The following list shall be used as a guide only:

1. Mechanical equipment. 2. Valves. 3. Dampers and operators. 4. Filters. 5. Heating and air conditioning units. 6. Controls. 7. Cleanouts. 8. Traps. 9. Automatic temperature control panels. 10. Coils.

B. Access shall be adequate as determined by the Architect.

C. Refer to contract drawings where panels have been specifically located.

D. Provide additional panels for adequate access as indicated in paragraph A above.

E. Where access is by means of liftout ceiling tiles or panels mark each panel using small color-coded or numbered tabs. Provide an index chart for identification. Place markers in corner of tile.

3.9 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION

A. All penetrations of partitions, walls and floors by ducts, piping or conduit under Division 23 shall be sealed and caulked. Provide U.L. listed fire stopping systems at penetrations

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

through fire rated walls.

3.10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SERVICE PALTFORMS

A. Where mechanical equipment is located on a roof or elevated structure that requires access such that personnel will have to climb over ductwork or higher than 16 feet above grade to access the equipment, a means to access the equipment shall be provided. B. Provide catwalks around the entire perimeter of equipment to match manufacturer required clearance area. Minimum 36” from perimeter of unit C. Provide side edge railings that extend above the catwalk not less than 30” above the catwalk

3.11 PROJECT PUNCH OUT

A. Architect/Engineer will perform punch out reviews and will provide the Contractor with a list of punch list items to be completed before contract close out. Each and every punch list item shall be initialed and dated by the Contractor when the work is complete. The Architect/ Engineer will not perform any punch list verification until all items have been completed, initialed, dated and the list returned to the Architect/Engineer. If any items have been initialed as being completed by the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer determines that the work is not complete, the Architect/Engineer shall be reimbursed by the Contractor at his regular hourly rate for any and all items requiring revisiting of the site by the Architect/Engineer. Reimbursement will be made by deducting the Architect/Engineer fee from the Contractor's final payment.

END OF SECTION

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 -9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 03

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems. B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89. D. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. F. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of all pumps. G. Use plug valves for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug valves only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided. H. Use butterfly valves in heating, chilled and condenser water systems interchangeably with gate and globe valves. I. Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service. J. Use lug or grooved end butterfly valves to isolate equipment. K. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for blow downs at strainers. L. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. M. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near motor driven equipment where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.

B. Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit data on pipe materials and fittings. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Manufacturer’s data and list indicating use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components. 3. Submit product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 4. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served, and features for each piping specialty.

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

5. Submit electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of compliance with ASME Section IX.

F. Certification of compliance with ASTM, ASME and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings, and specialties.

G. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable grooved system manufacturer’s style or series number.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.

B. Design piping system and hangers and supports under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Above Grade: Heating Water, Chilled Water, Condensed Water, Including Glycol Solution Systems (See alternate piping system) 1. Pipe Material: 2 ½” and larger: Steel Pipe, ASTM A53, grade B, Schedule 40, black steel. 2” and smaller: Steel pipe ASTM A53, grade B, Schedule 40, black steel. 2” and smaller (Contractors Option: ASTM B88, Type L. Seamless, Water Tube, hard-drawn temper). 2. Fitting Material: 2 ½” and larger: Steel; ASTM A234, butt welded, Long radius ells, and weldolets. Flanges: ANSI. 2” and smaller: malleable Iron, threaded, ASNI B16.3 Class 150. Threads per ANSI B.1.20.1, and threadolets. 2” and smaller (Contractor’s Option): Copper Tube; ASME B16.22, wrought copper, or copper alloy, solder joint, 150 lb. 3. Joint Material: Welded: Latest revision of Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Code, Filler material per AWS D10.12. Threaded: American Standard for pipe threads, ANSI B2.1. For Pipe Sizes 4” or less: ASTM B32, alloy Sb5 (95% tin and 5% antimony), with 0.2 percent maximum load content. For Pipe Sizes over 4”: Joints shall be silver soldered.

B. Air Conditioning condensate and DWV, Equipment Drains 1. Pipe Material: Copper Drainage Tube; ASTM B306. 2. Fitting Material: Wrought copper and bronze drainage fittings, ANSI B16.29. 3. Joint Material: Soldered; ASTM B32, Alloy Sb5 (95% tin and 5% Antimony), with 0.2 percent maximum lead content.

C. Alternate Piping System – Press Fitting Systems – Heating Water, Chilled Water, Dual Temperature System, Condenser Water and Glycol Systems

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Manufacturers:

a. Copper Press Fitting: 1) Viega, Nibco, Apollo XPress, or comparable acceptable product. 2. Material: 3. Press fittings: a. Press-Seal Fittings: Bronze or copper, shall conform to the material requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, and the performance requirements of IAPMO PS117, and ICC LC 1002. ½-inch thru 4-inch for use with ASTM B88 copper tube type K, L, or M and ½-inch up to include 1-1/4-inch annealed copper tube. Press-seal fittings shall have an EPDM sealing elements and an un-pressed fitting leak identification feature. 2-1/2-inch thru 4-inch shall have a 420 stainless steel grip ring, PBT separator ring, EPDM sealing element and an u-pressed fitting leak identification failure. Sealing elements shall be verified for the intended use. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials (Excluding Steam Systems): Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents:

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8” maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME B16.20, for grooved, ring-joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: 1. Non-Steam Systems: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated. C. Grooved Joint Lubricants: Lubricate gaskets with lubricant supplied by the coupling manufacturer in accordance with published installation instructions. The lubricant shall be approved for the gasket elastomer and system media.

D. Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat; ground joint. Threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Unions in copper piping shall be sweat fittings with bronze seats designed for 200 psig working pressure.

E. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

F. Dielectric Fittings: Lead Free, provide dielectric fittings with appropriate end connections and piping materials. Dielectric fittings shall be as manufactured by Victaulic Style 47, Legend Valve Company Model T-575 or acceptable comparable product.

G. Dielectric Waterway: Copper silicon casting conforming to UNS C87850 with grooved and/or threaded ends. UL classified in accordance with NSF-61 for potable water service and shall meet the low-lead requirements of NSF-372, Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 647.

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

H. Strainers – “Y” Type:

1. Strainers shall be of the basket or "Y" as manufactured by Victaulic Series 732/W732 for water piping systems, Spirax Sarco, Metraflex, Mueller, Conbraco Industries; Apollo, or an acceptable comparable product.

I. Flexible Pipe Connections:

1. Flexible pipe connections shall be equal to those manufactured by the Metraflex Corporation Models BBS, SST, MetraMini and shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psig with a bursting pressure of not less than 300 psig when handling water at a temperature of 250oF. 2. The flexible connection shall be made of a corrosion resistant material, such as bronze or stainless steel with a braided wire cover. Flexible connectors shall be long enough to compensate for the following offset misalignments in piping:

MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PIPE SIZE PERMANENT OFFSET INTERMITTENT OFFSET

2" and smaller 3/8" 1/4" 2 1/2" and larger 3/8” 1/8”

3. Victaulic Style 177, 77 or W77 flexible or Grinnell Style 707 flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in close proximity to the source of vibration. 4. Steam Systems: Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 500 psig

J. Manual Air Vents: (Utilize for radiators, convectors, unit heaters, etc.)

1. Provide manual air vents as manufactured by Bell and Gossett Model: 4V, or comparable product as manufactured by Hoffman, TACO, or Armstrong. 2. Stainless steel construction; 150 psig working pressure, 250°F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and having 1/8" inch MPT connection.

K. Manual Air Vents: (For high points in piping system)

1. Provide ball valve as manufactured by Apollo, Watts or comparable. 2. Ball valves shall be suitable for 240°F operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure. 3. ¾” FPT connections.

L. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Provide automatic air vents as manufactured by Bell and Gossett Model: 87, or comparable products as manufactured by Hoffman, TACO, or Armstrong. 2. Non-ferrous automatic air vent; stainless steel, brass and EPDM internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 240°F operating temperature; mount on ½” nipple or 3/4” MPT connection.

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3. Utilize ¾” minimum connection for air separators.

M. Pump Suction Diffusers:

1. Provide as manufactured by Armstrong, Bell and Gossett, or Hoffman. 2. Cast-iron body, with threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2 1/2 inch and larger; 175 psig working pressure, 300°F maximum operating temperature; and complete with the following features: a. Inlet vanes with length 2 1/2 times pump suction diameter or greater. b. Cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings with total free area equal to or greater than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head. c. Disposable fine start-up mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer. d. Permanent magnet, located in flow stream, removable for cleaning. e. Adjustable foot support, designed to carry weight of suction piping. f. Blowdown tapping in bottom; gage tapping in side. 3. Provide grooved connection as manufactured by Victaulic Series 731 / W731, or Grinnell Model S810. a. Grooved inlet and straight, single, or double reduction flanged outlet, ASTM A395 ductile iron body, Type 304 stainless steel frame and perforated sheet diffuser with 5/32” diameter holes, Type 304 stainless steel 20-mesh startup pre-filter, pipe plug for system drainage, and bosses for support. Rated to the working pressure of the mating flange up to a maximum of 300 psi.

N. Basket Strainers:

1. Provide as manufactured by Crane, Metraflex, or Spirax Sarco. 2. 125 psig working pressure; high tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

O. Vacuum Breakers:

1. Pipe Applied, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001, with floating disc and atmospheric vent. 2. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011, with finish to match hose connection.

P. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

Q. Pipe Alignment Guides:

1. Pipe Alignment Guide (Spider Type): a. Pipe alignment guides shall be style “PGIV” as manufactured by The Metraflex Company, Chicago, IL or comparable acceptable product. b. Primary and intermediate guides shall be of the radial type employing a heavy wall guide cylinder with weld down or bolt down anchor base. A two section guide spider, having 1/8” maximum diametrical clearance with guide cylinder inside diameter, bolted, or welded tight to the carrier pipe with slides through the guide cylinder I.D. Cylinder shall be of sufficient size to clear pipe insulation and long enough to prevent over

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

travel of the spider.

R. Pipe Anchors:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed. b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. 6. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Refer to Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete. 7. Grout: Refer to Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” S. Thermometers, General

1. Scale Range: Temperature ranges indicated in degrees Fahrenheit shall be provided for services listed as follows: a. Heating Water: 30 to 240°F, with 2-degree scale divisions. b. Chilled Water: 0 to 120°F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. 3. Liquid-in-glass Thermometers a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice, Weiss Instruments, Weksler Instrument Corp., or Miljoco. T. Pressure Gages, General

1. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., Weksler Instrument Corp., or Miljoco. a. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage, with bottom connection, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. b. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4 1/2 -inch diameter glass lens. c. Bourdon Tube: Phosphor bronze d. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections. e. Connector: Brass, 1/4" inch NPS. f. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings in PSI g. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. h. Range:

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1) Hydronic system: 0 – 100 psi. i. Fluids Under Pressure: From zero to two times operating pressure. j. Pressure Gage Accessories - Hydronic Systems 1) Snubbers: 1/4" inch brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. 2) Needle Valve: Exceed pressure and temperature rating of installation. k. Performance Requirements: 1) Hydronic Systems: 200 psig at 300°F.

U. Test Plugs:

1. Provide as manufactured by Flow Design, Inc., Peterson Equipment Co., or H.O. Trerice or Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Description: Nickel-plated brass-body test plug in 1/2" inch fitting. 3. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation. 4. Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum. 5. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 1/8” inch outside-diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage. 6. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range: a. Water: 20°F to 200°F, neoprene rubber. b. Water: Minus 30°F to 275°F, ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) rubber. 7. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain. 8. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage and gage adapter with probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case. 9. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems operating conditions.

V. Automatic Flow Control Valves

1. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet combination blow-down and back-flush drain. 2. Calibration: Control within 5 percent of design flow over entire operating pressure. 3. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup, operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring. 4. Accessories: In-line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet. 5. Basis of design: a. NuTech model ABE for 0.75” – 2.00” b. NuTech model AW for 2.5 “ – 14.00” c. Victaulic Series 76

2.3 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled. B. Accessories: Drip-pan elbow.

2.4 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide protective sheathing or wrapping between metal pipes and sleeves to

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

prevent pipes from corroding.

B. Sleeves shall be provided around all pipes through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, structure members or other building parts. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be standard weight galvanized iron pipe two sizes larger than the pipe or insulation so that pipe or insulation shall pass through freely with space for movement for all piping which passes through masonry or concrete walls or floors. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet or galvanized pipe sleeves for all piping passing through frame walls.

C. Sleeves through floors shall be flush with the floor except for sleeves passing through Mechanical Rooms which shall extend ¾” above the floor. Space between the pipe and sleeve shall be caulked. Escutcheon plates shall be constructed to conceal the ends of sleeves.

D. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be sealed.

E. Penetrations through fire rated walls and floors.

1. All penetrations by fire protection water lines through fire rated floors and walls shall be provided and firestopped using UL classified through penetration firestop devices, System A, as manufactured by ProSet Systems Inc. a. The fire rating of the firestop device shall be equivalent to or greater than the fire rating of the floor or wall penetrated. b. All firestop devices shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. All penetrations by hydronic and steam system piping lines through fire rated floors and walls shall be provided and firestopped using UL classified through penetration firestop devices, System A, as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. a. The fire rating of the firestop device shall be equivalent to or greater than the fire rating of the floor or wall penetrated. b. All firestop devices shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL

A. ABOVE GROUND PIPING

1. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. 2. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. 3. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 4. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. 5. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. 6. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 7. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) minimum. Maintain gradients. 8. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. 9. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 10. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly 11. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 12. Connect branch piping to mains from top of main, unless specific otherwise for specific systems. 13. Make changes in directions and branch connections using fitting, pull tees shall not be permitted. 14. Install flanges, flange kits and unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 15. Install dielectric unions where piping of dissimilar metals are joined. 16. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2 1/2" inch and larger connections. 17. Install flexible connectors or grooved system manufacturer’s flexible couplings at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibration producing equipment. 18. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install ¾” inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of strainers. Use same size nipple and valve as blow-off connection of strainer. 19. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Anchors shall attach to the building structure to prevent pipe movement. Anchors shall be installed in such a manner to prevent damage to the building structure. Anchors shall be securely welded to the piping being anchored. Install expansion loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings. 20. Install pipe sleeve seals at all wall penetrations. 21. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, ¾” ball valve, and short ¾” threaded nipple and cap. 22. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal. 23. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 24. In concealed locations where piping, other than cast iron or galvanized steel, is installed through holes or notches in studs, joists, rapiers or similar members less than 1 ½” from the nearest edge of the member, the pipe shall be protected by steel shield plates. The plates shall be made of gage 16 and shall cover the area of the pipe where the member is notched or bored, and shall extend a minimum of 2” above sole plates and below tip plates.

END OF SECTION

PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 03 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for each motor furnished loose. Indicate nameplate data, standard compliance, electrical ratings and characteristics, and physical dimensions, weights, mechanical performance data, and support points.

B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified factory and field testing and inspection.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Testing Agency: Company who is a member of the International Electrical Testing Association and specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR MOTORS

A. General: Requirements below apply to motors covered by this Section except as otherwise indicated.

1. Motors 3/4 hp and Larger: Three-phase motor as specified below.

2. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 hp: Single-phase motor as specified below

3. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

4. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected for the following motor voltage ratings (utilization voltages): a. 120 V Circuit: 115 V - motor rating. b. 208 V Circuit: 200 V - motor rating. c. 240 V Circuit: 230 V - motor rating. d. 480 V Circuit: 460 V - motor rating.

5. Minimum service factor shall be 1.15 and shall apply at frequency and utilization voltage at which motor is connected. Provide motors, which will not operate in service factor range when supply voltage is within 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

6. Capacity: Sufficient to start and operate connected loads at designated speeds in indicated environment, and with indicated operating sequence, without exceeding nameplate ratings. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of rated capacity.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

7. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment, with temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

8. Enclosure: Open driproof, unless otherwise specified. Provide screen over slots, where slots will permit passage of human extremities.

9. Provide adjustable motor slide base for belt driven equipment. Include adjusting bolts and locknuts.

10. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated.

11. Motors that operate with Variable Frequency Drives to meet the MG 1 Part 31 specifications with insulation that can withstand 1600 V peak voltage and a 1 msec rise time and improved baring lubrication for higher temperature operation

B. Minimum nominal full load efficiency for NEMA design B motors shall be as follows:

Open Motors Enclosed Motors 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole HP 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 1 77.0 85.5 82.5 77.0 85.5 82.5 1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 87.5 2 85.5 86.5 87.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 3 85.5 89.5 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.0 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 90.2 91.7 91.0 15 90.2 93.0 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 20 91.0 93.0 92.4 91.0 93.0 91.7 25 91.7 93.6 93.0 91.7 93.6 93.0 30 91.7 94.1 93.6 91.7 93.6 93.0 40 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 50 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0 94.5 94.1 60 93.6 95.0 94.5 93.6 95.0 94.5 75 93.6 95.0 94.5 93.6 95.4 94.5 100 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.1 95.4 95.0 125 94.1 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.0 150 94.1 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.8 95.8 200 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.4 96.2 95.8 250 95.0 95.8 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8

C. Three-phase Motors

1. NEMA MG 1, Design B, energy-efficient squirrel-cage induction motor, with windings to accomplish starting methods and number of speeds as indicated on Drawings.

2. Insulation System: NEMA Class F.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

4. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay with wiring to terminal box.

5. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

6. Sound Power Levels: Conform to NEMA MG 1.

7. Multi-Speed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

8. Variable Speed Motors for Use With Solid-State Drives: Energy efficient, squirrel- cage induction, design B units and ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by drive manufacturer. Motors shall be labeled to indicate that they are provided with inverter duty capability in accordance with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA MG-1, Part 31.

9. All motors shall be provided with manufacturer’s stamped nameplate, to include all pertinent and capacity data.

D. Single-phase Motors

1. General: Conform to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated.

2. Energy Efficient Motors: One of the following types as selected to suit the starting torque and other requirements of the specific motor application. a. Permanent Split Capacitor. b. Split-Phase Start, Capacitor-Run. c. Capacitor-Start, Capacitor-Run.

3. Shaded-Pole Motors: Use only for motors smaller than 1/20 hp.

4. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: Protection shall automatically opens the power supply circuit to the motor, or a control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Provide device that automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range except as otherwise indicated.

5. Bearings: Belt connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings may be used for other single phase motors.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test motors in accordance with National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA MG 1, including winding resistance, no-load speed and current, locked rotor current,

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

insulation high-potential test, and mechanical alignment tests.

2.3 BEARING PROTECTION RING

A. All motors driven by a variable frequency PWM drive shall include a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring to discharge shaft currents to ground.

B. Provide AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring as manufactured by Electro Statis Technology.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned motors.

B. Maintain access to existing motors and other installations remaining active and requiring access.

C. Clean and repair existing motors to remain or are to be reinstalled.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: The following requirements apply to field-installed motors.

1. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and the following: a. Direct Connected Motors: Mount securely in accurate alignment. Connect to driven equipment with coupler of appropriate type and material for the given duty. Coupler shall be selected for high and range of motor application. b. Belt Drive Motors: Use adjustable motor mounting bases. Align pulleys and install belts. Use belts identified by the manufacturer and tension belts in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Division 26.

C. Ground and bond motors in accordance with Division 26.

3.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTORS

A. Install Bearing Protection Ring in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints and adequately protect all systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including flexible connectors, expansion joints, expansion compensators, loops, offsets and swing joints.

B. Product Data:

1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. 2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation.

C. Design Data: Indicate criteria and show calculations. Submit sizing methods and calculations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirement

F. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by manufacturer’s representative.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS:

A. Steel Piping: 1. Inner Hose: Stainless Steel. 2. Exterior Sleeve: Double braided stainless steel. 3. Pressure Rating: 200 psig WOG and 250 degrees F. 4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints. 5. Size: Use pipe-sized units. 6. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Copper Piping: 1. Inner Hose: Bronze 2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze. 3. Pressure Rating: 200 psig WOG and 250 degrees F 4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints 5. Size: Use pipe sized units 6. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line

2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Stainless Steel Bellows Type: 1. Pressure Rating: 200 psig WOG and 250 degrees F. 2. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inch. 3. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch. 4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints. 5. Size: Use pipe sized units. 6. Application: Steel piping 3 inch and smaller.

2.3 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Systems greater than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model No. 650, or an acceptable comparable product.

B. Systems less than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model No. 651, or an acceptable comparable product.

C. Style IV – Pipe Alignment Guide (Spider Type): Primary and intermediate guides shall be of the radial type employing a heavy wall guide cylinder with weld down or bolt down anchor base. A two section guide spider, having 1/8” maximum diametrical clearance with guide cylinder inside diameter, bolted or welded tight to the carrier pipe which slides through the guide cylinder I.D. Cylinder shall be of sufficient size to clear pipe insulation and long enough to prevent over travel of the spider. Pipe alignment guides shall be style “PGIV” as manufactured by The Metraflex Company, or an an acceptable comparable product.

2.4 SWIVEL JOINTS

A. Ductile Iron body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber o-ring seals.

2.5 PIPE ANCHORS

A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. 2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum.

2.6 FLEXIBLE PRE-FABRICATED EXPANSION LOOPS

A. Metraloop® – Flexible Expansion Loop (thermal applications):

1. Provide flexible expansion loops of size and type noted on drawings. Flexible loops shall consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90° elbows, and a 180° return assembled in such a way that the piping does not change direction, but maintains its course along a single axis. Flexible loops shall have a factory supplied, center support nut located at the bottom of the 180°return, and a drain/air release plug. Flexible loops shall impart no thrust loads to system support anchors or building structure. Loops shall be installed in a neutral, pre- compressed or pre-extended condition as required for the application. For steam service, loops must be installed with flexible legs horizontal to prevent condensate buildup. Install and guide per manufacturer’s recommendations. Materials of construction and end fitting type shall be consistent with pipe material and equipment/pipe connection fittings. For natural gas service, connectors shall be A.G.A. certified. Flexible expansion loops shall be “Metraloop®” as manufactured by The Metraflex Company®, Chicago, IL or an acceptable comparable product. 2.7 Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.8 Concrete: Portland-cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 Mpa):

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, sand. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, crushed gravel. D. Water: Potable.

2.9 Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink, nonmetallic:

A. Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydraulic-cement-type grout that is non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. B. Design Mix: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength. C. Water: Potable. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, and ASME B31.9.

B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Refer to Division 23. Provide line size flexible connectors.

C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

D. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides to direct movement only along axis of pipe. Erect piping so strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus.

E. Provide support and anchors for controlling expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. Refer to Division 23 for pipe hanger installation requirements.

F. Provide grooved piping systems with minimum one joint per inch pipe diameter instead of flexible connector supported by vibration isolation. Grooved piping systems need not be anchored.

G. Provide expansion loops as indicated on Drawings.

H. Pipe Expansion Joint Installation: <>

1. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

I. Fabricated-type Pipe Expansion Compensation Installation:

1. Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be produced during anticipated change in temperature. 2. Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. 3. Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.

J. Pipe Alignment Guide Installation:

1. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints. 2. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops. 3. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated. 4. Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate.

K. Pipe Anchor Installation:

1. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 2. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1. 3. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, include embedded fasteners. 4. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe guides according to expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators. 5. Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 6. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

L. Expansion Loops: 1. Fabricate expansion loops as indicted on contract documents, and elsewhere as required for adequate control of thermal expansion of installed piping system(s). Subject loops to cold springing which shall absorb 50% of the total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as required to properly anchor and guide piping in relationship to the expansion loops.

END OF SECTION

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 23

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems.

B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.

D. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

E. Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

F. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of all pumps.

G. Use plug valves for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug valves only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.

H. Use butterfly valves in heating, chilled and condenser water systems interchangeably with gate and globe valves.

I. Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service.

J. Use lug or grooved end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.

K. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.

L. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near motor driven equipment where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.

B. Product Data:

1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES - BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.

C. Memory Stops: Provide memory stops for all “Balancing” valves.

2.2 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE:

A. Hydronic Water

1. Check Valves:

a. Horizontal Swing- ¼” through 2”:

1) Check valves shall be class 150# SWP, 300# CWP, horizontal swing check, body with 5° integral seat and Teflon disk. Body, cap, & Disc shall be of ASTM B62, cast bronze. (Disc holder on ¼” through ¾” shall be brass, ASTM B16) Retaining ring, & Hinge Pin shall be stainless steel. Plug shall be ASTM B16, MSS SP-80, and Type 4 class 150. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: 510T (Threaded) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 164T (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: 1510T (Sweat) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 164S (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Nibco

b. Horizontal Swing- 2 ½” through 24”:

1) Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# CWP, horizontal swing Check. Body, bonnet, & disc shall be of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. Disc shall have bronze face ring. Hanger Pin, stud bolt, & side plug shall be ASTM B16, Brass. Seat Ring shall be ASTM B62, Bronze. Disc nut shall be ASTM A307, Steel. Hanger shall be ASTM A536, Ductile Iron. Flanged ends, Bolted bonnet, MSS SP-71, Type 1. Basis of Design:

Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 910F Milwaukee Model: F-2974-A Other manufacturers: Nibco

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. Ball Valves:

a. ¼” through 2":

1) Ball valves shall be 600# CWP, with blow-out proof stem. ASTM B584 cast bronze two piece body & tailpiece. Standard port with ASTM B276 Type 316 stainless steel tunnel drilled ball and stem, RPTFE 15% glass filled seats & 25% glass filled thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16 brass, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, MSS SP-110. Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-100S (Threaded) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 70-14x (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-150S (Sweat) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 70-24x (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Nibco

2) Victaulic Series P569, stainless steel ball valve with Vic-Press ends. Full port, pressure rating to 400-psig CWP.

3. Butterfly Valves:

a. 3” through 48":

1) Materials & Construction: a) Butterfly valves shall be, MSS SP 67 Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B Lug Style Body with through tapped lugs. Valves shall be suitable for “Dead End Service,” liner must be field replaceable. Seat will be made of EPDM ASTM D2000, suitable for continuous operation from 30°F through + 250°F, ASTM B148, Alloy 954 Aluminum Bronze or Nylon-11 coated Disc with a Broached Stem to Disc Drive Connection. (14” & larger valves to have a plug & pin, or broached stem to disc connection) Upper & Lower Blowout proof stems of ASTM A582, Type 416 Stainless Steel, Top bearing Thermoplastic polymer alloy containing a solid lubricant with an integral dirt seal to support and neutralize hydraulic & external axial stem loads Buna N “O” Ring stem and Dirt seals, 2”+ extended neck to accommodate insulation. All valves to be “Bubble Tight” up to the maximum rated working pressure in either direction. Each valve to be factory tested for “Bubble Tight” according to ANSI class 6 shut off or zero leakage. Valves shall be rated for Bi-Directional dead end service 2” through 12” 150 PSIG. 2) Maximum Rated Working Pressure: a) For 3” through 12” valves is 200 PSIG b) For 14” through 48” valves is 150 PSIG 3) Actuator / Operator: a) Provide memory stop where used for balancing

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

purposes. b) For all valves 3” through 6” use a 10 position Lever handle with locking Trigger. c) For all valves 8” through 48” use an Enclosed Manual Self-Locking Worm Gear Operator with Handwheel and Position Indicator. Both types of operators are to be equipped with Travel Stops. Basis of Design:

Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 215L Bray Series: 31 or 31H-119 Milwaukee Model: ML-223-E 3” through 5” Milwaukee Model: ML-323-E 6” through 24” Milwaukee Model: ML-323-E 30 through 48” Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – LD141 Other manufacturers: Nibco

4. Hose End Drain Valves ½” and ¾”:

a. Hose end drain valves shall be class 600# CWP, ASTM B584, cast bronze two piece adapter loaded single reduced bore with chrome plated solid ASTM B16, brass tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof brass stem, RPTFE 15% glass filled seats & 25% glass filled thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16, brass, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, ASTM B16, brass tail piece with standard hose end threads, brass bead chain and Zinc die cast cap, MSS SP-110, Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-100-H (Threaded) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 70HC-100 (threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-150-H (Sweat) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 70HC-200 (Sweat)

B. Hydronic Service Drains:

1. Piping Hose Bibbs:

a. All valves at low points in piping systems used for drain valve duty shall be provided with brass or bronze valve body with threaded end connections, chromium plated ball, brass stem, RPTFE seats, seals and stuffing box ring, adjustable packing gland, valve handle, and three quarter (3/4) inch hose connection with cap and chain. All valves shall be as manufactured by Apollo, or Milwaukee. Valve model numbers shall be as listed below:

Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 70HC-100 (Threaded) (3/4 x 3/4) Milwaukee - BA100H (3/4 x 3/4) Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model – 70HC-200 (Sweat)

2. Equipment Hose Bibbs:

a. All valves at low points in piping systems used for drain valve duty shall be provided with brass or bronze valve body with threaded end connections, chromium plated ball, brass stem, RPTFE seats, seals and

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

stuffing box ring, adjustable packing gland, valve handle, and three quarter (3/4”) inch hose connection with cap and chain. All valves shall be as manufactured by Apollo, or Milwaukee. Valve model numbers shall be as listed below:

Apollo - 78-104-01 Milwaukee - BA100H

2.3 VALVING SPECIALTIES

A. Safety Relief Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Apollo, Watts Regulator, Spence, or an acceptable comparable product. 2. 125 psig working pressure and 250°F maximum operating temperature; designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. Valve body shall be cast-iron. 4. Valve shall have forged copper alloy disc, fully enclosed cadmium plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off. 5. Factory set valves to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure. 6. For steam systems, provide drip pan elbow at base of elbow.

B. Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Spence, or an acceptable comparable product. 2. Hydronic Systems: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250°F maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.

C. Flow and Balancing Measuring System :

1. Sizes ½” through 4": a. Provide a complete flow balancing valve system as manufactured by Nutech Model “MB”, Flow Design Inc., Preso or Bell & Gossett. b. Flow meter shall be “venturi” type as defined by ASHRAE, with machined brass section. Devices shall have a precision machined throat and have a stated catalog accuracy of 3% full scale. The induced differential reading (flow signal) shall be greater than two feet water column at the design flow with the valve in the wide open position. The permanent pressure loss at design flow, shall not exceed two feet of water in the wide open position. The venturi flow meter shall have pressure and temperature ports with caps. c. Combination balancing and shut-off valves shall be throttling type ball valves with a memory stop. The ball valves shall have a bronze body,

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

blowout proof ball, virgin teflon seats, brass stem and packing nut and a steel handle. Valves shall be available in thread or sweat connections through 2" in size, pressure rated to 400 PSI at 250°F. d. Combination balancing and shut-off valves 2 1/2” through 4" shall be of the same basis of design with the exception of a iron body construction, flanged connections, pressure rated to 250 PSI at 250°F non shock service. e. Ball valves shall be as specified hereinbefore. f. Combination balancing and shut-off valves shall be butterfly valve type as specified hereinbefore with memory stop. g. Provide a portable readout meter kit by the manufacturer of the balancing devices. The meter shall be permanently mounted in a durable case complete with two 10' color coded hoses with shut-off valves at the end that connects to the balance valve so that water does not drain out between readings. Meter shall have a 6" diameter face and 1.75% full rated accuracy. Meter for the venturi type devices shall be provided with a removable transparent face indicating flow directly in GPM for each size device furnished. Meter shall have a three valve manifold for over-range protection.

D. Multi-Purpose Valves:

1. Valves shall be Bell & Gossett Model 3DV in sizes 1 – 2” and Model 3DS for sizes 2 ½” – 14” or comparable product as manufactured by TACO or Armstrong. With spring loaded check valve feature, isolation/shut off valve feature, and a calibrated balancing valve with nameplate and memory stop/button.

2. Tri-Service Valve Assembly: Combination shut-off, throttling and non-slam check valve. Vic® - 300 MasterSeal™ butterfly valve with memory stop feature assembled with Series 716 or Style 779 Venturi Check, Series 779 check valve with venturi like taps for flow measurement. Working pressures to 300 psi. a. 14” through 24” Sizes: Victaulic AGS-Vic300 butterfly valve with gear operator and memory stop feature assembled with Series W715 Check Valve. Working pressures to 232 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Valves shall be placed in such manner as to be easily accessible for smooth and easy handwheel operation and packing maintenance.

B. Install valves in piping where shown and where listed herein:

1. To balance flows in piping systems. 2. To isolate all items of equipment. 3. To isolate motorized flow control valves. 4. To isolate branch lines and risers at mains. 5. To drain low points in piping systems. 6. To drain pipe risers. 7. To drain equipment.

C. Where piping or equipment may be subsequently remove, provide valves with bodies having integral flanges or full lugs drilled and tapped to hold valve in place so that

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

downstream piping or equipment can be disconnected and replaced with blank-off plate while valve is still in service.

D. Valves for equipment and controls shall be installed full size of pipe before reducing size to make equipment connection.

E. Where there is not interference, gate and globe shut-off valves shall be installed with handwheel up on horizontal runs of pipe to prevent accumulation of foreign matter in working parts of valves. In no case shall the stem be installed below the pipe centerline.

F. Butterfly valves shall be installed with handle position in the horizontal position: i.e., butterfly pivot point parallel with the floor.

G. On valves, strainers, etc., installed in copper piping, provide unions, or threaded adapters where piping connects to valves, strainers, etc.

H. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

I. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

J. Install valves in a position to allow full handle movement.

K. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb. 3. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

L. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and everywhere else required to permit drainage of the entire system.

M. Install pump discharge valves with stem in upward position.

N. Install safety relief valves on boilers, pressure vessels, etc. and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge without valves as shown on drawings or to nearest floor drain if not shown on drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1 for installation requirements.

O. Provide balancing valves as shown on drawings and as required to permit complete balancing of all systems.

P. Provide sufficient clearance of all valve installations to permit proper valve operation.

Q. Provide valve stem extensions so operation of valve does not compress or interfere with insulation.

END OF SECTION

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 -7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General Requirements

1. Incorporate in construction pipe hangers and supports to manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular product components, parts, and assemblies. 2. Comply with maximum load ratings with considering for allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MS SP-58. 3. Provide support, guides and anchors that do not transmit unacceptable heat and vibration to building structure. 4. Installation of pipe hangers and supports shall be based upon the overall design concept of the piping system. The support system shall provide for and control the free movement of piping including its movement in relation to the connected equipment. 5. Provide for vertical adjustments after installation of supported material and during commissioning, where feasible, to ensure pipe is at design elevation and slope.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.

B. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

C. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Submit sizing methods sealed by a registered professional engineer.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

G. Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.

H. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, “Carbon Structural Steel,” steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use,” steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non-shrink),” non-shrink, nonmetallic.

1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Provide factory-fabricated products as manufactured by B-Line, Tyco – (Anvil Hangers), Pipe Shields, Inc., or Erico CADDY. Basis of Design shall be B-Line.

1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.

C. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

intersection.

D. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

E. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 3 of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.

F. Horizontal Non-Insulated Copper Piping Hangers:

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3104 CTC. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3104 CT.

G. Insulated Horizontal Piping Hangers: Reheat Water, Glycol Solution, Heating Hot Water, steam and condensate return, refrigerant piping:

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151.

H. Vertical Piping Riser Clamps:

1. Copper Pipe: Figure No. B3373CT. 2. Steel Pipe: Figure No. B3136 and B3137.

I. Beam Clamps and Attachments:

1. For bolt-on locations to structure, Figure Nos. B3291, B3036, or B3050. 2. Welded beam attachments, Figure No. B3083.

J. Brackets:

1. For equipment and piping adjacent to walls or steel columns, Figure Nos. B3066, B3063 and B3067 depending on weight to be supported.

K. Pipe Rests:

1. For pipes close to floor where no expansion provision is required, Figure No. B3088T base stand with B3093 adjustable pipe saddle support.

L. Hanger Rods: 1. Hanger rod, Figure No. B3205. 2. Continuous threaded rod, Figure No. ATR. 3. Eye rods, Figure No. B3210 or B3211, depending on load supported.

M. Trapeze Hangers - Direct Mounting Hangers:

1. Grinnell, Figure No. 46.

N. Protection Saddles:

1. Cast iron pipe, insulated, Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. For high temperature steel pipe, insulated, No. B3160, B3161, B3162, B3163, B3164, or B3165.

O. Pipe Roll Stands:

1. For support of pipe where axial movement is encountered: Figure No. B3117SL where no vertical adjustment is required; and Figure No. B3118SL where vertical adjustment is required.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Erico/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 EQUIPMENT CURBS

A. General 1. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer.

2.5 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Lead Flashing:

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.

D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.

E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

E. Sealant: Acrylic

2.7 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

2.8 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.

2.9 FIRESTOPPING

A. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.10 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.

B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board.

C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.

E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.

2.11 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Sealants for acoustical purposes shall be one of following non-setting sealants:

Acoustical sealant...... D.A.P. BR – 96...... Pecra Acoustical sealant ...... Tremco Acoustical sealant ...... U.S.G.

2.12 NON-PENETRATING ROOFTOP PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Provide with bases that rest upon walk pads. Bases shall have rounded edges to prevent damage to the roof, carbon black additive in polycarbonate for UV stabilization, and edges to prevent damage to the roof, carbon black additive in polycarbonate for UV stabilization, and stainless steel all threads for adjustability.

B. Mechanical piping shall be supported by rollers.

C. Condensate lines shall be supported by strut, similar to Miro Industries Model 2.5 CS-5”.

D. and water piping shall be supported in clevis hangers. Similar to the Miro Model 6-H series.

E. Mechanical Rooftop Mounted Equipment Supports: Provide bases supporting; hot-dip galvanized grating to spread weight across roof membrane.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Light Duty: Base Material Polycarbonate Resin; total load up to 2lb. per square inch, 7-1/2 by 10 inch base (similar to Miro Industries Model Mechanical Support- LD). 2. Heavy Duty: Base Material Stainless Steel or hot-dip galvanized total load up to 2lb. per square inch, 12 by 16 inch base (similar to Miro Industries Model Mechanical Support-HD).

F. Accessories: 1. Support Pads: Pads shall be 15-3/4 by 19-3/4 inch square, 1/8 inch thick, flexible PVC with carbon black additive for UV stabilization 2. Deck Plates: Provide square metal deck plates with curved up edges, to spread load and protect roof membrane, sizes and quantities manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Rollers: a. Provide pipe rollers in sizes and quantities as recommended by prefabricated non-penetrating roof system manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through- bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 “Pipe Hangers, and Supports C Selection and Application”, and SP-89, “Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices”. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Piping shall be supported independently from equipment connections. Supports shall not interfere with removal of equipment.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.

C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers, and Supports C Selection and Application” and as specified in Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers, and Supports C Selection and Application”. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

F. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Does not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

G. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36, “Carbon Structural Steel,” 2001, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel.”

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

L. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

M. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

N. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

O. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.

P. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

Q. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

R. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

S. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

T. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation.

U. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

V. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

W. Insulated Piping: Provide continuous insulation and vapor barrier through hangers and supports. Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Riser Clamps: Attach riser clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Insulate clamps on piping with insulation and vapor barrier. 2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions in inches (mm) not less than the following:

NPS (Inches) LENGTH (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) 1/4 to 3 1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 and 6 18 0.060 8 to 14 24 0.075 16 to 24 24 0.105

4. Pipes 4 Inches and Larger: Include treated wood inserts.

5. Insert Material: Length to equal to the length of the protective shield.

6. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports and rod sizes:

a. Steel and Copper Pipe:

Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod Size – In. Max. Span – Ft. Max. Span – Ft. Dia. – In. Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 1 7 6 3/8 1 1/4 7 7 3/8 1 1/2 9 8 3/8 2 10 8 3/8 2 1/2 11 9 1/2 3 12 10 1/2 3 1/2 13 11 1/2

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

4 14 12 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 5 16 13 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 6 17 14 3/4 (5/8 for copper) 8 19 16 3/4 (3/4 for copper) 10 22 18 3/4 (3/4 for copper) 12 23 19 3/4 (3/4 for copper)

b. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.

X. Equipment Supports:

1. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. 2. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and concrete bases. Make a smooth bearing surface. 3. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6” beyond supported equipment. 4. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. 5. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 6. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 -10 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration and seismic control for mechanical systems piping ductwork, and equipment. It is the intent of the seismic portion of this specification to keep all mechanical and electrical building system components in place during a seismic event.

B. All HVAC components mounted outside of the building envelope (on-grade, on roof, on exterior walls, etc.) shall be mounted and supported to resist wind loads as required by the International Building Code (IBC), edition in effect by local authority having jurisdiction. Wind forces shall be calculated by a qualified licensed Professional Engineer to withstand the calculated wind forces per the specified project conditions.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping and ductwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. 2. Submit manufacturer catalog information indicating materials, dimensional data, pressure losses, and acoustical performance for standard sound attenuation products.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate static and dynamic load of both inertia bases and vibration isolators. 2. Indicate assembly, materials, thickness, dimensional data, pressure losses, acoustical performance, layout, and connection details for fabricated sound attenuation products. 3. Shop drawings for each type of isolator, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions indicating that maximum room sound levels are not exceeded.

E. Manufacturer Instructions:

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. 2. Indicate installation requirements maintaining integrity of sound isolation.

F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

G. Manufacturer Reports: Certify that sound isolation installation is complete and complies with instructions.

H. Qualifications Statements:

1. Review by duly authorized manufacturer’s representative with at least six (6) years’ experience on projects of similar scope.

I. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

J. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications:

1. Shop drawings of items. 2. Complete description of products to be supplied including product data, dimensions materials of construction and specifications. 3. Installation instructions for each product. 4. Tabulation showing for each vibration isolator supporting equipment: a. Equipment identification tag no. b. Isolator type. c. Actual load. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified minimum static deflection. f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under actual load to spring diameter. 5. Layout of piping to be isolated including vertical risers showing: a. Support points. b. Weight at support points. c. Isolator type. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified static deflection. f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under load to spring diameter. 6. Steel rails, steel base frames, and concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, vibration isolator mounting attachment method and location of equipment attachment bolts. 7. Special details at large scale and other necessary information to convey understanding of work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work according to AMCA 300, ANSI S1.13, AHRI 575 standards and ASHRAE 68 recommendations.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel,” “latest edition”.

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

D. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities:

1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-insulated equipment. 3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance.

E. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners.

F. Coordinate size, location, and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads.

G. Provide vibration isolators of appropriate sizes and proper loading to meet specified deflection requirements.

H. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet requirements, even if not expressly specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

I. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications.

J. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration, rebalance, realign or do other remedial work to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding manufacturer's specifications for unit in question.

K. Speed And Balance Requirements For Rotating Equipment:

1. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in excess of 80% of their critical speed. 2. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than levels indicated elsewhere. Measure vibration on equipment or steel frame equipment base when equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation mounts. If equipment has inertia base, allowable vibration level is reduced by ratio of equipment weight alone to equipment weight plus inertia base weight.

Equipment Speed Vibration Displacement (rpm) (mils, peak-to-peak) Under 600 4 600 to 1000 3

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1000 to 2000 2 over 2000 1

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INTENT

A. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this Section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers include: Kinetics Noise Control, Mason Industries or a comparable acceptable manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, “Carbon Structural Steel,” “latest edition”, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2000, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use,” steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink),” nonshrink, nonmetallic.

1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES

A. General

1. Metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out-of-doors shall be hot-dip galvanized, cadmium- plated or Neoprene-coated after fabrication. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM 144 “Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard.” 2. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. Optionally, labor- saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories shall not degrade vibration isolation system.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Unit FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene) (Type 3)

1. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pad between the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Model FDS as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or comparable acceptable product.

C. Unit FSN-R (or FSNTL) (Floor Spring and Neoprene – Restrained) (or Travel Limited) (Type 4)

1. Restrained spring mountings shall have an FSN mounting within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Restraining Bolts shall have a neoprene bushing between the bolt and the housing. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings shall be Model FLS, FLSS, or FHS as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or type SLR (including all variants) or SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or comparable acceptable product.

D. Unit FN-M (Floor Neoprene-Mount) (Type 1)

1. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.12" to 0.50” and all directional seismic capability if applicable. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing specifications. Mountings shall be Model RD or RQ as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or comparable acceptable product.

E. Unit FN-P (Floor Neoprene-Pad) (Type 1)

1. Isolation pads shall be neoprene elastomer in-shear pads, used in conjunction with steel shims where required, having static deflections as tabulated. Pads shall have a durometer as required for suitable loading and service life. Pads shall be designed for a maximum deflection of approximately 20% of their unloaded thickness. All pads shall be elastomer in-shear and shall be molded using 2000 psi minimum tensile strength oil resistant neoprene compounds with no color additives, LDS rubber or bridge-bearing neoprene. Pad shall be Model Super W as manufactured by Mason Industries or comparable acceptable product.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

F. Unit HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene) (Type 3)

1. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4" thick neoprene or pre-compressed elastomer coated fiberglass elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in specification 2.4.b.1 seated in an optional steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the optional cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Model SRH or SFH as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or comparable acceptable product.

2.4 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Unit BSR (Base - Steel Rail) (Type B)

1. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases. Rectangular bases are preferred for all equipment. Centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases may be T or L shaped where space is limited. Pump bases for split case pump shall include supports for suction and discharge elbows. All perimeter members shall be steel beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base. Base depth need not exceed 14” provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the equipment manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of a minimum of 1.5". Bases shall be Model SFB-W, SFB-C, or KFB-A as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or any various types as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or comparable acceptable product.

B. Unit BIB (Base - Inertia Base) (Type C)

1. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases by be T or L shaped where space is limited. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction and discharge elbows. Bases for end suction pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction diffusers. Depth of bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6". The base depth need not exceed 12" unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1/2" bars welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2” above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolts sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a minimum 1.5" clearance below the base. Wood form bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Model CIB-L or CIB-T as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or type KSL or BMK as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

comparable acceptable product.

C. Unit RCI (Type D)

1. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air and watertight curb and rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand seismic and wind forces. a. Complete curb and isolation assembly shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project certifying capacity to resist wind loads. b. Provide sloped and/or extended height curb assemblies as necessary to coordinate with roof slope and buildup. 2. Sheet Metal Restraint/Spring Isolation Curbs: Upper frame shall consist of extruded aluminum top rail, shall provide continuous support for equipment, and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic and wind forces. Lower support assembly to be constructed out of formed heavy gauge sheet metal, shall have means for attaching to building structure, contain a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly. Isolation curb shall be Model KSCR as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or Model CMAB by Mason Industries, CPC-4+VIR by Curbs Plus or comparable acceptable product. 3. Structural Steel Restraint/Spring Isolation Curbs: Upper frame shall consist of a structural steel C channel to provide continuous support for the equipment and provide a place of attachment to the equipment. The lower frame shall be constructed from structural steel and shall provide adequate support to resist seismic and wind loads. The springs shall be adjustable, restrained with ¼-inch- (6-mm) thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. Structural steel isolation curb shall be model ESR as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or comparable acceptable product. a. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic/wind restraint. 1) Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and a adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt. 2) Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3) Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4) Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5) Overload Capacity: Support 150 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. b. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a non-slip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1) Resilient Material: Oil and water-resistant hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least ¼ inch thick. d. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counter flashed over roof materials. e. Extend height of curb as necessary to allow for spring isolator access after roof buildup is installed.

2.5 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL

A. Unit RPS-A (Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seal)

1. Split wall seals shall consist of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4” thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Seals shall project a minimum of 1” past each face of the wall. Other resilient media may be substituted as required to handle higher temperatures, as approved by Sleeve/Seal manufacturer. Seals shall be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries or a comparable acceptable product.

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible duct connections shall be fabricated from Neoprene, loaded vinyl or canvas. Clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of three inches and connection shall have 1.5" minimum of slack material.

2.7 FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

A. Unit FEC-A (Flexible Electrical Connection Type A):

1. Flexible electrical coupling shall be prefabricated units incorporating flexible watertight outer jacket, grounding strap, plastic inner sleeve to maintain smooth wire way and end hubs with standard tapered electrical threads to fit standard threaded, rigid metal conduit. 2. Unit FEC-A shall be as specified in section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

B. Unit FEC-B (Flexible Electrical Connection Type B):

1. Flexible electrical couplings shall be field-fabricated using minimum 2 ft length of flexible conduit or cable installed in grossly slack "U" shape. 2. Unite FEC-B shall be as specified in section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for flexible metal conduit.

2.8 THRUST RESTRAINTS

A. Thrust Restraint

1. Thrust restraints shall consist of spring element in series with Neoprene pad. 2. Thrust restraint shall be designed to have same deflection as specified for isolators supporting equipment generating thrust.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3. Spring element shall be contained within steel frame and be designed to be factory-preset for thrust and be field-adjustable to allow for maximum of 1/4" movement during starting or stopping of equipment. 4. Furnish assembly complete with rods and angle brackets for attachment to both equipment generating thrust and adjacent fixed structural anchor. 5. Thrust restraint shall be Model HSR as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or Mason Industries Type WB, or comparable acceptable product. 6. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches of static pressure and on hanger-supported, horizontally mounted axial fans. This is required at lesser of 2” of water or more total static (per ASHRAE) or when thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight.

2.9 GROMMETS

A. Grommets shall be one piece molded bridge-bearing neoprene washer/bushing type. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat washer force to avoid all contact between bolt and base plate. Grommets shall be model HG as manufactured by Mason Industries or comparable acceptable product.

B. Neoprene shall be between 40 and 50 durometer.

C. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent fastening bolts from directly contacting isolator base plate.

2.10 EXPANSION JOINTS / FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Rubber expansion joints shall be double sphere peroxide cured EPDM throughout (cover, liner, and cord fractioning) with Kevlar tire cord fabric reinforcement. Joints shall have raised face rubber flanges that encase solid steel retention rings. Cable/flexible reinforcement is not acceptable. Split flanges shall interlock and include a pivot fulcrum to increase clamp load at the sealing face. Sizes 1-1/2” through 24” shall have a reinforcing ring molded in between the spheres. Safety factor shall be a minimum of 3 to 1. All joints must be factory tested to 150% of maximum pressure for 4 minutes prior to shipping.

B. Sizes ¾” through 2” shall be single sphere, with bolt-on flanges and shall be model SFU as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

C. Sizes 1-1/2” through 24” shall be model SFDEJ as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Reducing versions of the specified models are required when available.

2.11 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Sealants for acoustical purposes shall be one of following non-setting sealants:

1. Acoustical sealant ...... D.A.P. 2. BR-96 ...... Pecora 3. Acoustical sealant ...... Tremco 4. Acoustical sealant ...... U.S.G.

2.12 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Up to 30 Ft. Floor Span Greater Than 30’ Floor Span

Refrigeration Horsepower/ RPM Base Isolator Minimum Base Isolator Minimum Machines and Other Type Type Deflection, Type Type DeflectionI Chillers IN. N. Air Cooled, Scroll All All N/A 4 1.50 N/A 4 2.50 Air Cooled, Screw All All N/A 4 2.50 N/A 4 2.50

Greater Than 30’ Floor Slab on Grade Up to 30 Ft. Floor Span Span

Fans (Not Within Horsepow RPM Base Isolato Minimum Base Isolato Minimum Base Isolato Minimum Equipment) er/ Type* r Deflection Type* r Deflection Type* r Deflection Other Type IN. Type IN. Type IN. Axial/Utility Sets Up All All N/A 1 0.25 N/A 3/42 1.50 N/A 3/42 1.50 to 22-in. Diam. Axial/Utility Sets Up Up to All B/C1 3/42 2.50 C 3/42 3.50 C 3/42 3.50 to 24-in. Diam. 300 Axial/Utility Sets Up Up to All B/C1 3/42 1.50 C 3/42 2.50 C 3/42 2.50 to 24-in. Diam. 500 Axial/Utility Sets Up 501 & All B/C1 3/42 0.75 B/C1 3/42 1.50 B/C1 3/42 1.50 to 24-in. Diam. Up Inline Centrifugal, All All N/A 3 0.75 N/A 3 1.50 N/A 3 1.50 Cabinet, Ceiling

*If fan is suspended, no base is required. Attach isolators directly to equipment.

1Utilize Type B for < 2 in. SP. Utilize Type C for > 2.1 in. SP.

2Utilize Type 3 for indoor installations. Utilize Type 4 for outdoor installations.

Greater Than 30’ Floor Slab on Grade Up to 30 Ft. Floor Span Span

Miscellaneous Horsepower/ RPM Base Isolator Minimum Base Isolato Minimum Base Isolator Minimum Equipment Other Type Type Deflection, Type r Deflection, Type Type Deflection IN. Type IN. IN. Heat Pumps, Fan Coil Units, Condensing Units, All All N/A 3/42 0.75 N/A 3/42 0.75 N/A 3/42 1.50 other miscellaneous Motor Driven Equipment

2Utilize Type 3 for indoor installations. Utilize Type 4 for outdoor installations.

Greater Than 30’ Floor Slab on Grade Up to 30 Ft. Floor Span Span

Packaged AHUs, Horsepower/ RPM Base Isolator Minimum Base Isolato Minimum Base Isolator Minimum RTUs, ERVs, HRUs, Other Type Type Deflection, Type r Deflection, Type Type Deflection HVUs, Etc. IN. Type IN. IN.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 10 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

No Curb, Indoors All All N/A 3 0.75 N/A 3 1.50 N/A 3 * No Curb, Outdoors All All N/A 4 0.75 N/A 4 1.50 N/A 4 * Curb Mounted All` All D 3 0.75 D 3 1.50 D 3 *

The following note applies to all equipment types listed in Tables before and hereinafter:

*Additional floor deflection caused by the equipment must be first determined prior to examining minimum isolation deflection. If additional floor deflection is 0.25” or less, deflection equal 10 times the deflection is to be chosen. If additional floor deflection is greater than 0.25”, floor stiffening must be added and/or the unit must be moved to a stiffer area of the floor.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 11 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Greater Than 30’ Floor Slab on Grade Up to 30 Ft. Floor Span Span

Pumps Horsepower/ RPM Base Isolator Minimum Base Isolato Minimum Base Isolator Minimum Component Other Type Type Deflection, Type r Deflection, Type Type Deflection Importance IN. Type IN. IN. Factor Close-Coupled < 7.5 All N/A 1 0.25 C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 Close-Coupled > 10 All C 3 0.75 C 3 1.50 C 3 1.50 Inline 5 to 25 All N/A 3 0.75 N/A 3 1.50 N/A 3 1.50 Inline > 30 All N/A 3 1.50 N/A 3 1.50 N/A 3 2.50 End/Dbl. Suction, < 40 All C 3 0.75 C 3 1.50 C 3 1.50 Split Case

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Provide access to existing piping and ductwork and other installations remaining active and requiring access.

B. Extend existing piping and ductwork installations using materials and methods as specified

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install isolation for motor-driven equipment.

B. Make equipment level.

C. Install spring hangers without binding.

D. Isolators:

1. Closed Spring Isolators: Adjust such that side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. 2. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height; when full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches of static pressure and on hanger-supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

F. Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently as follows:

1. Up to 4-Inch diameter: First three points of support. 2. 5- to 8-Inch diameter: First four points of support. 3. 10-Inch diameter and Larger: First six points of support.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 12 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

4. Support all piping in equipment rooms and minimum 50 fifty feet from vibration isolated equipment and PRV stations. The first 3 hangers from the equipment shall have same deflection as the equipment isolators. The remaining hangers shall have 0.75 inch deflection.

END OF SECTION

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 13 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

C. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. Furnish copies for Maintenance Manuals

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering identification materials which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide HVAC identification materials of one of the following:

1. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. 2. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS:

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selections is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each product category.

B. Provide pipe markers with the following background colors and designations:

SERVICE STENCIL DESIGNATION LETTER BACKGROUND JACKET COLOR COLOR Chilled Water Supply Chilled Water Supply White Safety Green Blue Chilled Water Return Chilled Water Return White Safety Green Blue Hot Water Heating Supply Heating Water Supply White Safety Green Red Hot Water Heating Return Heating Water Return White Safety Green Red Refrigerated Suction Refrigerant Suction Black Safety Orange Black Refrigerated Liquid Refrigerant Liquid Black Safety Orange Black

2.3 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS (Nameplates):

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/8", except as otherwise indicated.

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

D. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: 1. Name and plan number. 2. Equipment service. 3. Design capacity. 4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm, etc.

E. Size: Provide approximate 2 1/2" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4 1/2" x 6" for equipment.

2.4 VALVE TAGS:

A. Metal Tags: 1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches square with finished edges.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame

2.5 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters. 3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters. 4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

C. Identification Paint and Background Color; Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems and HVAC equipment comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. For ductwork, use green paint. For hazardous exhaust, use colors per ANSI A13.1.

2.6 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS:

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, UV- resistant color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI/ASME A13.1

B. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 1/2".

C. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1 1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". 2. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands.

D. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Operating pressure of steam systems shall be indicated. 1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic.

2.7 CEILING TACKS

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.

B. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC equipment: Yellow. 2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red. 3. Plumbing valves: Green. 4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.

2.8 PLASTICIZED TAGS:

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre- printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 1/4" x 5 5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre- printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).

2.9 DUCT MARKERS:

A. Identify air: supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ducts with duct markers or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of air flow. 1. Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 25 feet. 2. Provide identification labels at access panels to locate concealed duct accessories.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 2. Confined Spaces: Provide labels and signs on all duct and equipment doors, plenums, etc. to indicate service and provide operator warnings as required by OSHA, NFPA, and authority having jurisdiction.

B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

D. Piping System Identification:

1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

"Materials" in this section. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows on all piping in occupied spaces, above ceilings, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for equipment and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points, which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 10' in congested areas.

E. Valve Identification:

1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, and shut-off valves at HVAC equipment. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

F. Equipment Identification:

1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of HVAC equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units. b. Flow meters. c. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor- driven units. d. Heat exchangers, expansion tanks, and similar equipment. e. Tanks and pressure vessels. 2. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2'-0", 1/2" high for distances up to 6'-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering. 3. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.

H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

I. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

J. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

K. Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

L. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Coordinate work of this section with all trades.

B. Work covered in this Section shall be performed after completion of work specified in all Divisions as they related to this work.

C. Review of design drawings and specifications, and comment on potential problem areas.

D. Site inspections of ongoing plumbing installation with written report from each visit.

E. Air leak testing of ductwork system. See Division 23 Section: “HVAC Air Distribution.”

F. Section Includes:

1. Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems. 2. Testing adjusting, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems. 3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 4. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. 5. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.

G. Coordinate with all trades to provide all incidental items not indicated on drawings or in specifications that belong to work described or are required for complete systems balancing, at no additional cost to Owner.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Agency Data:

1. Submit proof that proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified within 30 days of award of contract.

B. Engineer and Technicians Data:

1. Submit proof that Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise procedures, and technicians proposed to perform procedures meet qualifications specified within 30 days of award of contract.

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit synopsis of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project within 90 days of award of contract.

1. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty, NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification, or TABB International Quality Assurance program guarantee.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

D. Document Review:

1. Submit certification in writing that all design drawings and specifications have been reviewed, and comment on potential problems within 90 days of award of contract.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 01 and Division 23 Section: “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of Test and Balance Engineer. Reports shall be certified proof that systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how systems have been installed; are true representation of how systems are operating at completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are accurate record of final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow procedures and format specified below:

1. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with project identification and a title descriptive of contents. Divide contents of binder into divisions listed below, separated by divider tabs: a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems c. Hydronic Systems d. Automatic Temperature Controls e. Sound and Vibration Systems 2. Report Contents: Provide following minimum information, forms and data: a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Include certification sheet containing seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with proof of calibration. b. Remainder of the report shall contain appropriate forms containing as minimum, information indicated on standard report forms prepared by AABC and NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

G. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

H. NIST Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all testing and balancing instruments and equipment used for this project has been calibrated in accordance with NIST Standards, within period of twelve months prior to starting project.

1. For pharmaceutical GMP facilities, certified cleanrooms, etc. calibration period shall be within six (6) months.

I. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

J. Furnish reports complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

K. Final submittal shall include but not be limited to following:

1. List of equipment used to perform test and procedures. 2. Equipment performance data and equipment curves with actual points of performance indicated on curves as compiled during balancing. 3. Air Devices including VAV Boxes (supply, return and exhaust) and all air outlets. 4. Duct traverse readings during balancing. 5. Room sound pressure levels. 6. Hydronic, domestic hot water, and steam system components flow rates, pressures and temperatures. 7. On balance report documents record date and time of reading. 8. Field verification of fume hood face velocities based on SEFA test procedure.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements.

B. Agency Qualifications:

1. Employ services of independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting qualifications specified below, to be single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems to produce design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of fluid quantities of mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting results. 2. Certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in State in which services are to be performed, certified by NEBB or AABC as Test and Balance Engineer.

C. Work shall be accomplished in accordance with specifications. Procedures specified shall be followed and, if not specifically described herein, in general, shall be in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council's National Standards or National Environmental Balancing Bureau's Procedural Standards.

D. Design Review:

1. Review all design drawings and specifications. Review shall include: a. Duct pressure classification. b. Control device location and balancing devices location in duct systems and piping systems. c. Indicate additional balancing devices required for proper balancing. d. Specifications on all devices required for balancing. e. Note any potential noise problems. 2. Within 90 days of award of contract, meet with the Architect, Mechanical Contractor, and Building Automation System Contractor to review procedures and agenda and comments on design documents as to potential problem areas.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

E. Shop Drawing Review:

1. Review “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” shop drawing submittals noting any potential balancing problems. Note comments on submittal, sign, stamp and return to General Contractor. All “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” submittals must be reviewed by balancing agency prior to review by Architect.

F. During construction, balancing agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems, temperature controls, and other component parts of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Inspections shall be performed periodically as work progresses. Minimum of two inspections are required as follows: (1) when 60 percent of ductwork is installed; (2) when 90 percent of equipment is installed. Balancing agency shall submit brief written report of each inspection to Owner and Architect.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum five years’ experience certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Preliminary Work:

1. Inspect project site prior to starting adjustments to verify completion of trades, including general construction, piping system, ductwork system, building automation systems, and electrical systems, as they relate to balancing work. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verification shall include but not be limited to following:

a. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.

b. Ductwork System: 1) Duct joints sealed. 2) Witness leakage tests required under sheet metal section. 3) Dampers and control devices installed. 4) Duct systems are clean of debris. 5) Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

c. Piping System 1) Already cleaned and flushed by mechanical contractor 2) Chemical treatment operating, or applicable to system. 3) System filled and vented of air under Division 23. 4) Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position. 5) Service and balancing valves are open.

d. Proper direction of rotation for motor-driven equipment and for proper speed on multi-speed motors.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1) Fans are rotating correctly. 2) Pumps are rotating correctly.

e. Balancing devices are installed and accessible.

f. Control device connections. 1) HVAC control systems are installed complete and operable.

g. Note problems in general construction of the building that might effect systems performance such as sealing of windows, building joints, exhaust shafts, etc.

h. Problems discovered during this inspection shall be reported to General Contractor and Owner.

i. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

j. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.

k. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.

l. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

m. Air outlets are installed and connected.

2. Contractor shall certify in writing that each piping system has been prepared as per this Section, indicating dates procedures were done and which contractor did work. Submit in writing to Architect before beginning balancing work.

3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus or minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made.

D. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3.4 SYSTEM BALANCE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Balance heating, ventilating, and air conditioning to obtain air and water quantities indicated and required for proper operation of system.

B. Field work performed under this Section shall be provided under direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer.

C. Furnish services for complete adjustment of water systems, steam systems and air handling and exhaust systems, water, steam and air distribution and controls.

D. During all tests, it shall be demonstrated that systems shall be free from leaks and all parts of system will operate correctly. If not, report deficiencies to Contractor and Owner. Balancing Firm shall make final adjustments to equipment as may be required for proper operation, maintaining correct temperatures in all parts of the building. Controls shall be adjusted by “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” technicians in conjunction with Balancing Firm. Coordinate setpoints and adjustments with “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.”

E. Balancing of hydronic systems and parts installed under this Contract to obtain water quantities and temperature drops in all parts of system shown on plans, in specifications on approved shop drawings or as required by Architect.

F. Balancing of heating and air conditioning, special exhaust and ventilating systems to achieve air quantities specified at each air inlet, outlet, or damper shown on plans at proper conditions of static pressure and temperature differential.

G. Study and report on excessive noise conditions, which may develop during system balancing. Report shall be sent to Architect.

3.5 CALIBRATION

A. During testing and balancing, inspect temperature sensors, pressure sensors, digital indicators, and thermometers, etc. provided under Division 23. Report discrepancies to the Contractor for replacement or recalibration.

3.6 RE-BALANCE

A. After Architect's review of test and balance report submittal, make adjustment in any balancing point as required by Architect, to correct discrepancies between balance report and design, at no additional cost.

3.7 FINAL BALANCE

A. Visit site within one year after building occupancy if necessary to adjust and rebalance, any system required by Owner, to resolve any and all complaints. After final balance, revise previous submittal and resubmit to architect for record purpose. Rebalance and resubmittals shall be done at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’ experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 execution schedule for requirements regarding where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury or mercury compounds.

C. Insulation products shall contain no formaldehyde-based binders or shall be third-party certified for conformance with GREENGUARD Gold or Indoor Advantage Gold. (GREENGUARD Children and Schools is now called GREENGUSARD Gold)

D. When product to be in contact with austenitic stainless steel is tested according to ASTM C795 (which includes ASTM C692 and ASTM C871), the PH of the leach water from the specific material supplied shall be greater than 7.0 but not greater than 11.7 at 77°F. An acceptable proportion of sodium plus silicate ions to the chloride ions as found by leaching from the insulation is shown in the “plot point” of figure 6 in ASTM C795.

E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

F. Insulation materials applied to carbon steel shall be Mass Load Corrosion Rate (MLCR) tested per ASTM 1617.

G. Foam insulation materials shall not utilize CFC or HCFC blowing agents n the manufacturing process.

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

H. Cellular Glass:

1. Products: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; FOAMGLASS® ONE™ Insulation. b. Specialty Products & Insulation Company (SPI), Lancaster, PA.

I. Flexible Elastomeric:

1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.: Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. Nomaco; K-Flex Pipe

J. Glass Mineral Wool Blanket Insulation: 1. Products: a. Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Wrap with Ecose® Technology b. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. c. Johns Manville; Microlite Duct Wrap or Microlite EQ. d. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap Type 150.

K. Glass Mineral Wool Board Insulation:

1. Products: a. Knauf Insulation; Earthwool Insulation Board with Ecose® Technology for temperatures up to 450° F. b. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas, Type 814. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series for operating temperatures up to 450°F.

L. Glass Mineral Wool, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: a. Johns Manville: Micro-Lok HP Ultra b. Knauf Insulation: Earthwool 1000 Pipe Insulation with Ecose® Technology. c. Knauf Insulation: Earthwool Redi-Klad 1000 pipe insulation with Ecose® Technology. (for chilled water or outdoor applications) d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation SSLII with ASJ Max

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Cellular-Glass and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.

1. Products: a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-84. b. Pittsburg Corning, PC 99 2k Adhesive.

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II Class I.

1. Products: a. Armacell LCC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive, Armaflex 520 BLV Low-VOC Adhesive…. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60.

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-70. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-70. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Sealants shall be provided per manufacturer’s installation recommendations.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; 30 mil thickness; roll stock Ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: white 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps and mechanical joints minimum 30 mil thickness. 5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. 6. Provide preformed Fiberglass 1 lb. density 2” thick insulation inserts to comply with ASHRAE 90.1 and ASTM C547 requirements.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, and Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Thickness: 1) Up to 24 inch diameter, width, or height: 0.016 inch minimum. 2) 25 inch to 59 inch diameter, width, or height: 0.024 inch minimum. 3) 60 inch and larger diameter, width, or height: 0.032 inch minimum. c. Finish: Smooth finish. d. Color: White e. Moisture Retarder: 3-mil- thick Polysurlyn (co-extrusion of polyethylene and Dupont Surlyn®, heat laminated to the metal jacketing). f. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and longradius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.

D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a cross laminated polyethylene film covered with stucco- embossed aluminum-foil facing.

1. Products: a. Polygaurd; Alumaguard 60. b. MFM Building Products Corp., Flex Clad 400.

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. Venture Clad Jacketing. d. HiCube Coating Jacketing

E. Pipe Sound Lagging: Loaded vinyl with fibrous glass scrim reinforced aluminum foil facing over 2-inch thick quilted fiberglass decoupler. Loaded vinyl shall be 2 psf minimum surface weight. Glass fiber pipe wrap shall be semi-rigid, preformed type, 2- inch minimum thickness, 1-1/2 pcf density.

1. Manufacturers: a. Kinetics. b. Sound Seal. 2. Sound Transmission Class (STC) Rating: 26.

F. Refrigerant Piping Insulation Covering for Outdoor Installations.

1. An insulation protective cover shall be provided and installed to be flexible, U/V and weather resistant. The PVC plastic pipe insulation cover as manufactured by AIREX E FLEXGUARD or comparable acceptable product, and shall feature an integrated, outdoor-rated durability, industrial-grade, full-enclosure fastening system that is double secured by molecular bonding, allowing custom, cut-to- length installations. The cut-to-length installations shall comprise of a non- unraveling PVC cover material that does not compromise long-term-effectiveness or require specialized tools and cutting equipment. The engineered fastening system shall allow the cover to be removable and reusable for maintenance without the use of adhesives as an attachment in any shape or form, including either in the protector’s construction, installation, or attachment to pipe insulation, as this will negatively affect insulation permeance performance and promote insulation material degradation which causes added energy usage by equipment. WRAPPING TAPE OR ADHESIVE TAPE SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED AS PER ENERGY CODES. Insulation Protector shall be tested and meet the following testing: ASTM E 96 (Vapor Transmission of Materials), ASTM G 153 (Carbon Arc Light Exposure – Accelerated Weathering), ASTM D 412 (Tensile Strength after UV Exposure and Water Immersion), ASTM 570 (Water Absorption of Plastics), ASTM E 84/UL 723 (Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, ASTM G 21 (Fungal Growth). UV/Protector Pipe Insulation Material shall meet Class II vapor retarder per ASTM E 96 (vapor/moisture permeability test) “1 perm or less”. THE USE OF U/V PAINT OR NON-PERMEABLE MATERIALS OR ADHESIVES ARE NOT PERMITTED FOR THIS APPLICATION. 2.8 DUCT SOUND LINING (Refer to Division 23 Section: “HVAC Air Distribution.”)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation products and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation requirements.

B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at anchors and other projections with vapor- barrier mastic. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

C. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal equipment.

D. Cut and install insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its original nominal thickness.

3.2 BUILDING PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

3.3 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Acceptable insulation materials, thickness and vapor retarder requirements are identified for each application and size range. If more than one material is listed for an application and size range, selection from the materials listed is Contractor’s option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Fire-suppression piping. 2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 3. Below-grade piping. 4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 5. Exhaust ductwork 6. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 7. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Vibration-control devices. 10. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

C. All supply and outside air ductwork with internal sound lining shall be externally insulated.

D. Where metal ducts are specified to have internal duct liner, the thickness of the external insulation may be reduced by one inch, except minimum duct external insulation thickness shall be 1 inch.

3.4 HVAC PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE: 1. Unconditioned spaced include locations where summer temperature and humidity conditions are similar to outdoor conditions (such as mechanical rooms ventilated with unconditioned outdoor air, parking garages, pedestrian tunnels, etc.). Pipes in these spaces to be insulated similar to outdoor requirements. 2. Where rigid pipe insulation (cellular glass, etc.) is scheduled, provide mineral fiber through and 6 inches beyond pipe sleeves, to allow for pipe expansion.

A. Chilled Water Supply and return Piping 40-65 Degrees F 1. Indoor Service: 1 ¼” diameter and smaller a. Insulation Material: Mineral Fiber b. Insulation Thickness: 1” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 2. Indoor Service: 1 ½” diameter and larger a. Insulation Material: Mineral Fiber b. Insulation Thickness: 1 ½” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 3. Indoor Service: Flexible Piping a. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

b. Insulation Thickness: 2” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 4. Outdoor Service: 1 ¼” diameter and smaller a. Insulation Material: Mineral Fiber b. Insulation Thickness: 2” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 5. Unconditioned Indoor Space (Refer to Note 1)

B. Indoor Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Piping (Refer to Note 1) 1. All Sizes, Generally: a. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric b. Insulation Thickness: 1” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 2. All Sizes, Unconditioned Space (Refer to Note 1) a. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric b. Insulation Thickness: 1” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes

C. Outdoor Aboveground Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Piping 1. All Sizes a. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric b. Insulation Thickness: 1” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes

D. Low Temp Heating Hot Water Supply And Return (100 to 140 Degrees F) 1. Indoor Service: 1 ¼” diameter and smaller a. Insulation Material: Mineral Fiber b. Insulation Thickness: 1” c. Vapor Retarder Required: No 2. Indoor Service: 1 ½” diameter and larger a. Insulation Material: Mineral Fiber b. Insulation Thickness: 1 ½” c. Vapor Retarder Required: No

3.5 HVAC DUCTWORK INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

1. Unconditioned spaced include locations where summer temperature and humidity conditions are similar to outdoor conditions (such as mechanical rooms ventilated with unconditioned outdoor air, parking garages, pedestrian tunnels, etc.) 2. Top of ductwork located outdoors shall be provided with polyurethane board insulation of equal thickness to sides and bottoms. Taper insulation to shed water, minimum ¼” per foot slope, with insulation thickness at low edges equal to scheduled insulation thickness. 3. All diffuser cones, air valves, damper boxes, HVAC equipment, coils, coil headers, casings, plenums, air measuring devices, chilled beams, etc. shall be insulated.

A. Indoor Supply-Air Ducts, Plenums and Accessories: (Refer to Note 1 and Note 3) 1. Concealed: a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Blanket b. Insulation Thickness: 1 ½” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 2. Exposed: a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Board b. Insulation Thickness: 1 ½”

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 3. Attic Spaces and Unconditioned Spaces (Refer to Note 1): a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Board b. Insulation Thickness: 2” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 4. Supply Ducts for Heating Only Duty: a. Insulation Material: None b. Insulation Thickness: N/A c. Vapor Retarder Required: N/A

B. Indoor Return-Air Ducts, Relief-Air Ducts, And Plenums 1. In locations other than attics and unconditioned spaces a. Insulation Material: None b. Insulation Thickness: N/A c. Vapor Retarder Required: N/A 2. Attic Spaces and Unconditioned Spaces (Refer to Note 1) a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Board b. Insulation Thickness: 1” c. Vapor Retarded Required: Yes 3. Between Relief-Air Damper and Outdoors (Louver, louvered penthouse, etc.) a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Board b. Insulation Thickness: 2” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes

C. Outside-Air Ducts and Plenums 1. Indoor Service: Concealed a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Blanket b. Insulation Thickness: 1 ½” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 2. Indoor Service: Exposed a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Board b. Insulation Thickness: 2” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 3. Indoor Service: Attic Spaces a. Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber Board b. Insulation Thickness: 2” c. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes

3.19 FIELD APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Indoor, exposed insulated piping within 12 feet of floor, for service temperatures 200 degrees F and below. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: PVC

B. Indoor, exposed insulated piping greater than 12 feet above floor, generally. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: None

C. Indoor, cold service piping (cold water etc) greater than 12 feet above the floor, within spaces subject to outdoor temperature and humidity conditions (such as mechanical and electrical rooms ventilated with unconditioned outdoor air, parking garages, etc). 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: PVC

D. Indoor concealed piping.

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Field Applied Jacket Type: None

E. Outdoor exposed piping. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: Aluminum

F. Indoor, All Locations, Fittings and valves in piping systems at service temperatures 200 degrees F and below. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: Factory Fabricated PVC Covers

G. Indoor, exposed insulated ductwork greater than12 feet of floor. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: None

H. Indoor, concealed insulated ductwork. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: None

I. Indoor, exposed insulated ductwork. 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: Aluminum

J. Ductwork in high noise areas (as indicated on the drawings). 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: Duct Sound Lagging (Refer to Note 2)

K. Piping in sound sensitive areas (as indicated on the drawings) 1. Field Applied Jacket Type: Pipe Sound Lagging (Refer to Note 2)

Jacket Application Schedule Notes:

1. Including factory insulated equipment without factory applied jacket. 2. If ductwork or piping indicated to have sound lagging also requires an additional field jacket, install sound lagging between insulation and additional field jacket.

END OF SECTION

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 10 ACPS BMS Master Spec

SECTION 23 09 23

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

B. Scope: Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and operating Building Management System (BMS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate on a peer-to-peer bus over a single open protocol bus. 1. The intent of this specification is to provide a system that is consistent with BMS systems throughout the owner’s facilities running the Niagara N4™ Framework. 2. System architecture shall fully support a multi-vendor environment and be able to integrate third party systems via existing vendor protocols including, as a minimum, BACnet, and Modbus. 3. System architecture shall provide secure Web access using MS Internet Explorer from any computer on the owner’s LAN. 4. All control devices furnished with this Section shall be programmable directly from the Niagara-N4™ Workbench upon completion of this project. The use of configurable or programmable controllers that require additional software tools for post-installation maintenance shall not be acceptable. 5. Any control vendor that must provide additional BMS server software shall be unacceptable. Only systems that utilize the WEBs Niagara N4™ Framework shall satisfy the requirements of this section. 6. The BMS server shall host all graphic files for the control system. All graphics and navigation schemes for this project shall match those that are on the existing campus Niagara-N4 framework server 7. A laptop computer including engineering/programming software to modify Operating System Server BMS programs and graphics shall be included

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

C. Contractor shall furnish, install and commission a complete direct digital control (DDC) and building automation system (BMS,) including Operator interface graphic software (GUI) and a web-based operator interface as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. 1. This system shall reside on the owner’s existing building automation server where available. 2. The web-based operator interface shall allow access from a standard web browser.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 1 ACPS BMS Master Spec

3. The new DDC/BMS shall utilize electronic sensing; microprocessor based digital control and electronic actuation of dampers and valves to perform control sequences and functions specified. 4. The BMS for this project shall generally consist of monitoring and control of central heating and cooling plants/systems, air handling systems, terminal equipment, and other miscellaneous equipment.

D. The extent of Automatic Temperature Control Systems work is indicated on the drawings, schedules and by requirements of this section. 1. The DDC/BMS system shall provide complete automatic temperature control functions, building management functions and energy management functions that will achieve all functions and results specified. 2. The execution of the work shall be in strict accordance with these specifications, except as any of the specified work conflicts with the local building codes and regulations. Such conflicts or discrepancies shall be immediately brought to the attention of the engineer.

E. Include all engineering, programming, controls and installation materials, installation labor, commissioning and start-up, training, final project documentation and warranty.

F. The direct-digital control system(s) shall be native BACnet. All new workstations, controllers, devices and components shall be listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories. All new workstations, controller, devices and components shall be accessible using a Web browser interface and shall communicate exclusively using the ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet communications protocol without the use of gateways, unless otherwise allowed by this Section of the technical specifications, specifically shown on the design drawings and specifically requested otherwise by ACPS.

G. The work administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall include all labor, materials, special tools, equipment, enclosures, power supplies, software, software licenses, Project specific software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, submittals, testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, Warranty, specified services and items required for complete and fully functional Controls Systems.

H. The control systems shall be designed such that each mechanical system shall operate under stand-alone mode. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall provide controllers for each mechanical system. In the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to operate independently.

I. Alexandria City Public Schools (ACPS) has an integrated Building Management System (BMS) at every existing school site. The existing BMS platform consists of Automated Logic Controls or Siemens based equipment which at minimum provides control and monitoring of the HVAC equipment. The intent of this specification is to move toward an open platform for new work and is to integrate separate brands of control systems in to one standard cloud-based enterprise system.

J. Contact the ACPS Management Office designated service representatives for additional information concerning the BMS equipment interface and ATC requirements.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 2 ACPS BMS Master Spec

K. The Building Automation Contractor shall be responsible to provide an open Tridium system with standard Project Haystack point naming conventions. Full communications to the existing BMS network will be provided by the BMS contractor under the supervision of the BMS integration contractor (Contact Perry Clauser Havtech Solutions @ [email protected]).

L. For all new schools, existing schools and new building additions to existing school facilities, the BMS system shall be a Direct Digital Control (DDC) The BMS will be based on the open Tridium Niagara platform. Systems using locked or proprietary software shall not be acceptable 1. OPEN NIC STATEMENTS - All Niagara software licenses shall have the following NiCS: “accept.station.in=*”; “accept.station.out=*”and “accept.wb.in=*”and “accept.wb.out=*”. All open NIC statements shall follow Niagara Open NIC specifications 2. All JACE hardware products used on this project must be Made in the USA or come through the Tridium Richmond, VA shipping facility. JACE hardware products not meeting these requirements will not be allowed.

M. Full communications with the ACPS facility system will allow the ACPS operators will be able to utilize the BMS through Niagara network N4 station manager software from a new operator workstation, The facilities management system operator will be able to receive alarms, logs, and reports; monitor operating conditions; change control setpoints and operating schedules; and, operate equipment as desired at all new systems. The existing Metasys and Siemens operator workstation locations. shall continue to operate with the existing workstation and will be phased in to communicate over the new Tridium Niagara system over time.

N. Single Source Responsibility - The control system shall be completely installed and placed in operating condition by a firm specializing in this type of work. The firm shall provide a single source responsibility for all system components, engineering services, maintenance and warranty. Qualifying conditions are more fully described in a separate paragraph.

O. The BMS Contractor shall be qualified and thoroughly experienced in providing single source responsibility for the Automatic Temperature Control System. 1. The BMS Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete design, installation and proper operation of the system, including but not limited to: Data and control signal transmission systems, DDC Controllers and interfacing of all system equipment, sensors and controls, memory units and peripheral devices. The BMS Contractor shall also coordinate the installation with the security system (i.e. if Master controller loses power a general alarm will be generated). This alarm signal shall be furnished by the security system. 2. After the installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for the debugging and calibration of the system, including all software, and maintenance of the system until the system functions in accordance with these specifications and successfully completes the final operational acceptance Test described in this Section. The Contractor's responsibilities shall also include all software and software maintenance during the warranty periods. 3. The BMS contractor shall coordinate with the mechanical equipment supplier to successfully create a communication interface with the factory supplied communication protocol. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for the mounting of the manufacturer supplied interface device(s), this includes power wiring, communication wiring, necessary switches and enclosures. 4. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for the mounting of VRF/VRV centralized and BACnet controllers/devices, in panels constructed in compliance with this specification.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 3 ACPS BMS Master Spec

P. All documentation required shall be considered as much as part of this contract as the system installation itself. Its accuracy and applicability shall be considered for conformance to the specifications. Any system revisions and/or additions provided for or required under this contract shall be included in this documentation in the form of updated documents.

1.04 COORDINATION WITH OTHERS

Q. Coordination Meeting 1. The purpose of this meeting shall be to ensure that there will be no unresolved issues regarding the integration of these products into the DDC network. 2. The installer furnishing the DDC network shall meet with the installer(s) furnishing each of the following products to coordinate details of the interface between these products and the DDC network. The Owner or his designated representative shall be present at this meeting. 3. Each installer shall provide the Owner and all other installers with details of the proposed interface including Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for BACnet equipment, hardware and software identifiers for the interface points, network identifiers, wiring requirements, communication speeds, and required network accessories 4. Submittals for these products shall not be approved prior to the completion of this meeting

R. Commissioning 1. BMS System contractor shall convene a pre-submittal meeting with the engineer, commissioning agent and owner within one month of the notice to proceed. a. The purpose of this meeting is 1) To review the sequences of operation and points as submitted by the equipment manufacturers 2) To outline where the proposed system deviates from the specified sequence of operation. 3) To identify the available equipment points and identify modifications which may pose potential problems with the specified sequence. 2. The Owner, and Commissioning Agent, shall work with the Contractor and the Design Engineer to ensure that the systems, equipment, and interfaces are installed, tested, and operate per the design intent and contract documents, that the systems are adequately documented; and that the Owner is adequately trained on system intent, operation, and maintenance. 3. Once the sequences of operation are agreed to by all parties, the contractor shall proceed with the formal controls submittal process. 4. The Commissioning Agent will provide pre-functional and functional tests based on the final approved submittal 5. Commissioning Agent and owner shall perform the commissioning process to establish and document the criteria for systems function, performance, and maintainability and to verify/document compliance with these criteria throughout the construction, equipment start-up, space turnover, and the initial period of operation. 6. Completion - It is the intention of the specifications and drawings to call for furnished work, tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "provide and install complete and ready for use".

S. Products Not Furnished or Installed but Integrated with the Work of This Section: 1. Chiller Control Systems.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 4 ACPS BMS Master Spec

a. The chiller control system(s) shall be provided with all of the necessary interface hardware, software and programming required to support the specified BMS interface. b. The BMS system is to provide individual chiller enable/disable points to each of the chillers as well as the control and monitoring points listed in the input/output summaries and sequences, at a minimum. c. The chiller control panel(s), provided by the chiller manufacturer, will accept setpoint control points and provide start/stop, loading/unloading, staging and sequencing of the individual compressors. d. The chiller manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate and collaborate with the BMS contractor for the following: 1) Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the equipment manufacturer to support the specified BMS interface. 2) Start-up coordination with the BMS contractor to verify everything is working correctly. 3) Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to allow BMS interface as specified. 4) Clearly defined points list for all Chiller monitoring and control points provided through integration. 2. Boiler Control Systems. a. The Boiler control system(s) shall be provided with all of the necessary interface hardware, software and programming required to support the specified BMS interface. b. The BMS system is to provide individual Boiler Enable/Disable points to each of the Boiler Controllers as well as the control and monitoring points listed in the input/output summaries and sequences, at a minimum. c. The Boiler control panel(s), provided by the Boiler manufacturer, will accept setpoint adjustments provide start/stop, loading/unloading, staging and sequencing of the individual Boilers. d. The Boiler manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate and collaborate with the BMS contractor for the following: 1) Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the equipment manufacturer to support the specified BMS interface. 2) Start-up coordination with the BMS contractor to verify everything is working correctly. 3) Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to allow BMS interface as specified. 4) Clearly defined points list for all Chiller monitoring and control points provided through integration. 3. Variable Frequency Drives: a. The variable frequency drive (VFD) supplier shall furnish VFD’s with an interface to the control and monitoring points listed in the input/output summaries. b. The variable frequency drive manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate and collaborate with the BMS contractor for the following: 1) Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the equipment manufacturer to support the specified BMS interface. 2) Start-up coordination with the BMS contractor to verify everything is working correctly. 3) Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to allow BMS interface as specified.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 5 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4) Clearly defined points list for all VFD monitoring and control points provided through integration. 4. Packaged Air Handling Units (PAHU): a. Packaged air handling systems shall be furnished configured to accept control inputs from an external building automation system controller as listed in the input/output summaries. Factory mounted safeties and other controls shall not interfere with this controller. b. Should an interface be specified, the PAHU supplier shall furnish the air handling system with an interface to the control and monitoring points listed in the input/output summaries. c. The air handling system manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate and collaborate with the BMS contractor for the following: 1) Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the equipment manufacturer to support the specified BMS interface. 2) Start-up coordination with the BMS contractor to verify correct operation. 3) Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to allow BMS interface as specified 4) Clearly defined points list for all PAHU monitoring and control points provided through integration. 5. Additional Integrated equipment shall be provided with Network Communication Cards (NCC). The NCCs will utilize open standard protocols as defined herein,and will be provided with all of the necessary interface hardware, and software, required to support the specified BMS interface. a. The Division 23 Contractor shall coordinate with the equipment manufacturer and the BMS Contractor to provide 1) Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the equipment manufacturer to support the specified BMS interface. 2) Start-up coordination to verify correct equipment integration. 3) Clearly defined termination points in the equipment control panel to allow for the BMS interface as specified and submitted 4) Clearly defined points list for all equipment points provided through integration. b. This equipment includes: 1) Pump Control Packages. 2) In-line Meters (gas, water, power). 3) Refrigerant Monitors. 4) Chemical Water Treatment. 5) Smoke Detectors (through alarm relay contacts).

T. Products Supplied but Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Control Valves furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable piping section under the direction of Section 230923 Contractor who shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of the valve 2. Control Dampers and air flow measuring stations furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable air distribution or air handling equipment section under the direction of Section 230923 Contractor who shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of the dampers 3. Water Pressure Taps, Thermal Wells, Flow Switches, Flow Meters, etc. that shall have wet surfaces, shall be installed under the applicable piping section under the direction of the Section 230923 Contractor who shall be fully responsible for the proper installation and application.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 6 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Power Monitoring Equipment furnished under the 230923 section shall be installed under the applicable electrical equipment section under the direction of the Division 26 Contractor. 5. The Division 23 contractor shall provide a conduit sleeve for all roof top equipment (not including PRV/EF). The required conduit size shall be coordinated with the division 230923 contractor.

U. Work Required Under Division 26 Related to This Section: 1. The Division 26 Contractor shall provide (2) two Telecommunications outlet and one Data only outlet. at the location of the main BMS panels Should the BMS suppliers system require more than one outlet for their system this requirement will be the BMS supplier’s responsibility 2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division- 23 sections: a. Power wiring from a dedicated circuit breaker at each 120 Volt panel to a junction box shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. Electrical circuits for use by the BMS Contractor are shown on the electrical drawings. This Contractor is responsible for all power wiring from this junction box to control panels, devices, controllers and components for a complete and operating system. See plans for details. b. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. c. Interlock wiring between electrically interlocked devices, sensors, and between a hand or auto position of motor starters as indicated. d. All other electrical wiring, conduit and additional electrical components required to complete the automatic temperature control system including, but not limited to, interlocking of motor controllers with all other control and building system components, power wiring between junction boxes and control transformers and power wiring of auxiliary power receptacles, shall be provided and installed under this section of the specifications. Wiring shall comply with all requirements of Division 26 of this specification and the National Electrical Code. 3. Smoke Detectors – Shall be furnished and wired to the fire alarm system by the Division 26 contractor. Smoke detectors are to be furnished with one set of normally closed contacts for interface to the equipment starters. They shall be installed under Division 23 and interlocked to their respective starters under this section. Fire alarm modules for unit shutdown shall be provided and installed by the division 26 contractor. It shall interlock with the respective starters under this section.

1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps. B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature. C. BACnet Specific Definitions: 1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a network. 2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 7 ACPS BMS Master Spec

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number. 4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International. 5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device. D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal. E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller. F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system. G. COV: Changes of value. H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated. I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data. J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications. K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic. L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols. M. HLC: Heavy load conditions. N. I/A: Internet Appliance, a hand held communication device operating on the Apple or Android OS. O. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively. P. I/P: Current to pneumatic. Q. LAN: Local area network. R. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. S. Mobile Device: A data-enabled phone or tablet computer capable of connecting to a cellular data network and running a native control application or accessing a web interface. T. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data. U. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication. V. MTBF: Mean time between failures. W. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data. X. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol. Y. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 8 ACPS BMS Master Spec

Z. RAM: Random access memory. AA. RF: Radio frequency. BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer. CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database. DD. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol. EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus. GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol. HH. VAV: Variable air volume. II. WLED: White light emitting diode.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. System Description: 1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies. 2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation. 3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following: a. Loss of power with restart sequence. b. Loss of network communication signal. c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. d. Operator workstation failure. e. Server failure. f. Network failure g. Controller failure. h. Instrument failure. i. Control damper and valve actuator failure. j. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner. k. Description of testing plans and procedures. l. Description of Owner training.

B. Qualification Data: 1. Systems Provider Qualification Data: a. Resume of project manager assigned to Project. b. Resumes of application engineering staff assigned to Project. c. Resumes of installation and programming technicians assigned to Project. d. Resumes of service technicians assigned to Project.

C. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 9 ACPS BMS Master Spec

power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity. 3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets. 4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting performance. 5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for each unique product.

a. Workstations. b. Printers. c. Routers. d. DDC controllers. e. Enclosures. f. Electrical power devices. g. UPS units. h. Accessories. i. Instruments. j. Control dampers and actuators. k. Control valves and actuators.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information. 7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and drawings that submittal is to cover.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. General Requirements:

a. Submit electronic (pdf) of shop drawings for each control system. Submit a completed drawing for each piece of controlled equipment. with all point descriptors, addresses and point names indicated. Shop drawings shall be submitted both on paper and electronic media as an AutoCAD Version 2010 or newer version-drawing file. b. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission. c. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches information in each title block. d. Drawings Size: 11” X 17”

2. Shop Drawings shall

a. Commence with Color-coded small-scale building plans showing different colors for each HVAC zone. b. Include 1) Scaled plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable. 2) Details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3) Plan Drawings indicating the following:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 10 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4) Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping. 5) Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated. 6) Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition. a) Diagrammatic sensor locations. The BMS contractor is responsible for the proper location/placement of all sensors. Interior sensors are to be located using the following criteria: b) Locations near the entrance door to the space are preferred. c) Locations near return air grills are preferred. d) Temperature and Humidity sensors must be located away from: supply air diffusers, mechanical or electrical equipment mounted in the room, shelving, lockers and anything that could adversely effect the sensor function. e) Any sensor that must be relocated from the position identified on the contract drawings must be reviewed with the Owner and Engineer. 7) Each desktop workstation, server, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in project. 8) Network communication cable and raceway routing. 9) System Architecture showing proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building services for review before installation.

3. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:

a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve, if included in Project. b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number. c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

4. Control panel drawings indicating the following:

a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing connections. b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components, cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space. c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel.

5. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 11 ACPS BMS Master Spec

a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or optical fiber cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each. d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each.

6. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters. d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters.

7. Color graphics indicating the following:

a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.

8. The BMS contractor shall submit for review a valve selection chart with data for each of the following items.

a. Valve Application or Location (indicate BMS supplied or OEM) b. Line Size to Coil c. Coil GPM requirements (Coil requirements are to be based on the actual coils submitted by the mechanical contractor) d. Coil Pressure Drop e. Control Valve Manufacturer and Part Number f. Control Valve Size g. Control Valve Type (Sweat, NPT, Flange) h. Control Valve Configuration (2-way, 3-way) i. Control Valve CV j. Control Valve Pressure Drop k. Control Valve Close Off Pressure l. Valve Actuator Manufacturer and Part Number m. Valve Actuator Operation (2-position, 0-10 modulating, floating, etc.) n. Valve Actuator Power Source Voltage (24, 120, etc.) o. Spring Return (Yes/No)

9. The BMS contractor shall submit for review a damper selection chart with data for each of the following items. a. Damper Application or Location (indicate BMS supplied or equipment OEM) b. Damper Manufacturer and Part Number c. Damper Size/Shape d. Damper Torque Requirements e. Damper CFM (requirements are to be based on the actual units submitted by the mechanical contractor) f. Damper Type (Parallel, Opposed) g. Damper Actuator Manufacturer and Part Number h. Damper Actuator Operation (2-position, 0-10 modulating, floating, etc.)

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 12 ACPS BMS Master Spec

i. Damper Actuator Power Source Voltage (24, 120, etc.) j. Damper Actuator Spring Return (Yes/No) k. Damper Actuator End Switches (Yes/No/Quantity) l. Damper Actuator Mechanical Limit Stops (Yes/No/CFM at stop)

E. Multiple Submissions: 1. If multiple submissions are required to execute work within schedule, first submit a coordinated schedule clearly defining intent of multiple submissions. Include a proposed date of each submission with a detailed description of submittal content to be included in each submission. 2. Clearly identify each submittal requirement indicated and in which submission the information will be provided. 3. Include an updated schedule in each subsequent submission with changes highlighted to easily track the changes made to previous submitted schedule.

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided in electronic PDF format. b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs. c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data. d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer and service representatives for DDC system and products. e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control and changing set points and variables. f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use. g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to: 1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware. 2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration. 3) Debug hardware problems. 4) Repair or replace hardware. h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language including set points, tuning parameters, and object database. i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as DVDs. j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems, custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software. m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 13 ACPS BMS Master Spec

n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions. o. Owner training materials.

1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

G. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

H. Include product manufacturers' recommended parts lists for proper product operation over five year period following warranty period. Parts list shall be indicated for each year.

I. Furnish parts, as indicated by manufacturer's recommended parts list, for product operation during (5) two-year period following warranty period.

J. Furnish quantity indicated of matching product(s) in Project inventory for each unique size and type of following: 1. Programmable Application Controller: (1) 2. Application-Specific Controller: (1) 3. Space Carbon Dioxide Sensor: (4) 4. Duct Pressure Sensor and Transmitter: (1) 5. Each Type of Temperature Sensor (1 ea. Space and Duct:) 6. General-Purpose Relay: (2) 7. Current-Sensing Relay: (2) 8. Transformer: (1 ea different VA rating) 9. DC Power Supply: (1)

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for a period of two (2) years after date of substantial completion.

B. The BMS system shall not be considered substantially complete until the successful completion of the final inspection and demonstration.

C. The warranty period shall begin only after the successful completion of the BMS final inspection and demonstration for new construction and renovation projects.

D. At no cost to the Owner, during the construction and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide maintenance services for software and hardware components as specified below: 1. Maintenance services shall be provided for all devices and hardware specified in this Section. Service all equipment per the manufacturers recommendations. All devices shall be calibrated within the last month of the warranty period.

E. Owners Request for Service: 1. Contractor shall specify a maximum of three telephone numbers for Owner to call in the event of a need for service. At least one of the lines shall be attended at any given time at all times.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 14 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within (2) hours of the Owner’s initial telephone request for service.

F. Normal Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure of any control programming that would not result in property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired following telephonic notification by the Owner to the Contractor. 1. Response by telephone to any request for “Normal Service” shall be provided within (4) hours of the Owner’s initial telephone request for service during the contractor specified 40 hr per week normal working period. Outside of the contractors normal working period, the request will be responded to the next business day. 2. Attempts shall be made to rectify the issue over the internet. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected via remote communications, at least one (1) hardware or software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the Owner’s site within (1) Working day.

G. Emergency Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure of any control programming that would result in property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired following telephonic notification by the Owner to the Contractor. 1. Response by telephone to any request for “Emergency- Service” shall be provided within one (1) hour, of the Owner’s initial telephone request for service independent of contractors normal 40 hr per week normal working period 2. Attempts shall be made to rectify the issue over the internet In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through remote communication, at least one (1) hardware or software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the Owner’s site within (2) hours of the Owner’s initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

H. Failure to respond within the described time frames shall be cause to hold the Contractor liable for damages incurred due to the lack of response.

I. Technical Support: Contractor shall provide up to (2) hours per month technical support by telephone throughout the warranty period.

J. Preventive maintenance shall be provided throughout the warranty period in accordance with the hardware component manufacturer’s requirements.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

K. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons during shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protect from weather.

1.11 LICENSING

L. Provide open licensing documentation, and credentials for the Tridium system

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 15 ACPS BMS Master Spec

M. Upgrade all software packages to the release (version) in effect at the end of the Warranty Period and prior to the end of the Warranty Period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. DDC System Provider Qualifications: 1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer. 2. In-place facility located within (50) miles of Project. 3. Demonstrated past experience with installation of DDC system products being installed for period within (5) consecutive years before time of bid. 4. Demonstrated past experience on (10) projects of similar complexity, scope and value. 5. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience. 6. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to execute work according to schedule. 7. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period. 8. Product parts inventory to support on-going DDC system operation for a period of not less than (5) years after Substantial Completion.

2.01 PROCUREMENT / DDC SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. The BMS and digital control and communications components installed, as work of this contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of one of the following manufacturers.

B. The BMS shall be installed by competent mechanics regularly employed by a specialty firm that is in the full time business of designing and installing environmental control systems and is an authorized representative of one of the prequalified control equipment manufacturers listed.

C. Prequalified Controls Manufacturers/Installers 1. Open Niagara N4 based systems by one of the following a. Automated Logic Corporation - Carrier NoVA branch b. Johnson Controls - Washington DC Branch c. Alerton - Havtech Solutions Columbia Branch 2. Substitutions: None

2.02 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

D. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions.

1. DDC system shall consist of a high speed peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC controllers, operator interface devices, and software.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 16 ACPS BMS Master Spec

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.03 WEB ACCESS

F. DDC system shall be web based

1. Web-Based Access to DDC System:

a. DDC system software shall be based on server thin-client architecture, designed around open standards of Web technology. DDC system server shall be accessed using a Web browser over DDC system network, an independently installed using Owner's LAN and remotely over Internet. b. Intent of thin-client architecture is to provide operators complete access to DDC system via a Web browser. No special software other than a Web browser shall be required to access graphics, point displays, and trends; to configure trends, points, and controllers; and to edit programming. c. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the BMS, shall not be acceptable. d. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. e. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: 1) User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, the system shall note user name or password is not recognized and not allow logon. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. 2) Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface. 3) HTML/HTML5 programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML/HTML5 editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. 4) Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the network web server, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable. 5) Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page. 6) Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set-points in a graphical manner. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 17 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b) Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right- clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required. c) View logs and charts. d) View and acknowledge alarms. e) Set up and execute SQL queries on log and archive information. 7) The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator. 8) Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

2. Web-Compatible Access to DDC System:

a. Workstation and or server shall perform overall system supervision and configuration, graphical user interface, management report generation, and alarm annunciation. b. DDC system shall support Web browser access to building data. Operator using a standard Web browser shall be able to access control graphics and change adjustable set points. c. Web access shall be password protected.

2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

G. A qualified professional shall design the BMS system to satisfy requirements indicated.

1. System Performance Objectives:

a. BMS system shall manage HVAC systems. b. BMS system control shall operate HVAC systems to achieve optimum operating costs while using least possible energy and maintaining specified performance. c. BMS system shall respond to power failures, HVAC equipment failures, and adverse and emergency conditions encountered through connected I/O points. d. BMS system shall operate while unattended by an operator and through operator interaction. e. BMS system shall record trends and transaction of events and produce report information such as performance, energy, occupancies, and equipment operation.

H. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Products installed in ducts, equipment, and return-air paths shall comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

I. System Speed:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 18 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. Response Time of Connected I/O:

a. AI point values connected to BMS system shall be updated at least every (5) seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with this requirement. b. BI point values connected to BMS system shall be updated at least every [(5) seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with this requirement. c. AO points connected to BMS system shall begin to respond to controller output commands within (2) second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this requirement. d. BO point values connected to BMS system shall respond to controller output commands within (2) second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this requirement.

2. Display of Connected I/O:

a. Analog point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at least every 15 seconds for use by operator. b. Binary point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at least every 15 seconds for use by operator. c. Alarms of analog and digital points connected to DDC system shall be displayed within 45 seconds of activation or change of state. d. Graphic display refresh shall update within 4 seconds. e. Point change of values and alarms displayed from workstation to workstation when multiple operators are viewing from multiple workstations shall not exceed graphic refresh rate indicated.

J. Network Bandwidth: Design each network of DDC system to include at least 20 percent available spare bandwidth with DDC system operating under normal and heavy load conditions indicated. Calculate bandwidth usage, and apply a safety factor to ensure that requirement is satisfied when subjected to testing under worst case conditions.

K. DDC System Data Storage: 1. Local Storage: a. Include capability to archive not less than 12 consecutive months of historical data for all I/O points connected to system, including alarms, event histories, transaction logs, trends and other information indicated.

2. Cloud Storage: a. Additional Storage shall be provided through Cloud based scalable services b. Provide application based interfaces to configure, upload, download, and manage data, and service plan with storage adequate to store all data for term indicated. Cloud storage shall use IT industry standard database platforms and be capable of functions described in "DDC Data Access" Paragraph. c. The Owner shall bear the cost of the storage.

L. DDC Data Access:

1. When logged into the system, operator shall be able to also interact with any DDC controller connected to DDC system as required for functional operation of DDC system.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 19 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. System(s) shall be used for application configuration; for archiving, reporting and trending of data; for operator transaction archiving and reporting; for network information management; for alarm annunciation; and for operator interface tasks and controls application management.

M. Future Expandability:

1. DDC system controllers shall be expandable to an ultimate capacity of at least 15% of the total I/O points indicated. 2. DDC System capacity shall be designed to accept an extra 20% of devices. 3. Initial network infrastructure shall be designed and installed to support ultimate capacity. 4. Enterprise expandability shall be unlimited through Integration without the need for gateways and shall be provided by the owner outside of this scope of work. 5. Operator interfaces installed initially shall not require hardware and software additions and revisions for ultimate capacity.

N. Environmental Conditions for Controllers, Instruments and Actuators and Routers:

1. Products shall operate without performance degradation under ambient environmental temperature, pressure and humidity conditions encountered for installed location.

a. If product alone cannot comply with requirement, install product in a protective enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as required by product and application.

2. Products shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Products not available with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures. Installed location shall dictate the following NEMA 250 enclosure requirements:

a. Outdoors, Protected: Type 12 b. Outdoors, Unprotected: Type 4 c. Indoors, Heated with Filtered Ventilation: Type1 d. Indoors, Heated with Non-Filtered Ventilation: Type 12 e. Indoors, Heated and Air Conditioned: Type 1 f. Mechanical Equipment Rooms:

1) Chiller and Boiler Rooms: Type 12 2) Air-Moving Equipment Rooms: Type 1

g. Localized Areas Exposed to Washdown: Type 4x h. Within Duct Systems and Air-Moving Equipment Not Exposed to Possible Condensation: Type 12 i. Within Duct Systems and Air-Moving Equipment Exposed to Possible Condensation: Type 4 j. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

O. DDC System Reliability:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 20 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. Design, install and configure DDC controllers, and routers to yield a MTBF of at least 20,000 hours, based on a confidence level of at least 90 percent. MTBF value shall include any failure for any reason to any part of products indicated. 2. If required to comply with MTBF indicated, include DDC system and product redundancy to maintain DCC system, and associated systems and equipment that are being controlled, operational and under automatic control. 3. Critical systems and equipment that require a higher degree of DDC system redundancy than MTBF indicated shall be indicated on Drawings.

P. Electric Power Quality:

1. Power-Line Surges:

a. Protect DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from power-line surges to comply with requirements of IEEE C62.41. b. Do not use fuses for surge protection. c. Test protection in the normal mode and in the common mode, using the following two waveforms:

1) 10-by-1000-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 V and a peak current of 60 A. 2) 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 V and a peak current of 500 A.

2. Power Conditioning:

a. Protect DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from irregularities and noise rejection. Characteristics of power-line conditioner shall be as follows:

1) At 85 percent load, output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 1 percent of nominal when input voltage fluctuates between minus 20 percent to plus 10 percent of nominal. 2) During load changes from zero to full load, output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal. 3) Accomplish full correction of load switching disturbances within five cycles, and 95 percent correction within two cycles of onset of disturbance. 4) Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3-1/2 percent at full load.

3. Ground Fault: Protect products from ground fault by providing suitable grounding. Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition.

Q. Backup Power Source:

1. HVAC systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have associated DDC system products that control such systems and equipment also served from a backup power source.

R. UPS:

1. DDC system products powered by UPS units shall include the following:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 21 ACPS BMS Master Spec

a. Desktop workstations. b. Printers. c. Servers. d. DDC controllers, except application-specific controllers

2. DDC system instruments and actuators powered by UPS units shall include the following:

a. Instruments, dampers valves and actuators associated with the systems controlled by DDC system under emergency power operation:

S. Continuity of Operation after Electric Power Interruption:

1. Equipment and associated factory-installed controls, field-installed controls, electrical equipment, and power supply connected to building normal and backup power systems shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power, without need for manual intervention by operator when power is restored either through backup power source or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought online.

2.05 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System architecture shall consist of no more than 3 levels of LANs.

1. Level one LAN shall connect network controllers and operator workstations. 2. Level two LAN shall connect BACnet interoperable programmable application and application specific controllers to one another and to network controllers. 3. Level three LAN shall connect tertiary open protocol controllers to network controllers.

B. Minimum Data Transfer and Communication Speed:

1. LAN Connecting Operator Workstations and Network Controllers: 100 Mbps. 2. LAN Connecting BACnet interoperable programmable application and application- specific Controllers: 115,000 bps. 3. LAN Connecting tertiary open protocol controllers: Equipment compatible at their maximum compatible speed but no less than 38,600 bps.

C. DDC system shall consist of separated LANs that are not shared with other building systems and tenant data and communication networks.

D. System architecture shall be modular and have inherent ability to expand to not less than two times system size indicated with no impact to performance indicated.

E. System architecture shall perform modifications without having to remove and replace existing network equipment.

F. Number of LANs and associated communication shall be transparent to operator. All I/O points residing on any LAN shall be capable of global sharing between all system LANs.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 22 ACPS BMS Master Spec

G. System design shall eliminate dependence on any single device for system alarm reporting and control execution. Each controller shall operate independently by performing its' own control, alarm management and historical data collection.

2.06 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES

A. Operator Means of System Access: Operator shall be able to access entire DDC system through any of multiple means, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Desktop and portable workstation with hardwired connection through LAN port. 2. Portable operator terminal with hardwired connection through LAN port. 3. Portable operator workstation with wireless connection through LAN router. 4. Mobile device and application with secured wireless connection through LAN router or cellular data service. 5. Remote connection through web access.

B. Access to system, regardless of operator means used, shall be transparent to operator. Owner shall be required to provide and maintain internet access through their selected ISP.

C. Network Ports: For hardwired connection of desktop or portable workstation. Network port shall be easily accessible, properly protected, clearly labeled, and installed at each Programmable Control Unit panel location.

D. Workstations:

1. Performance Requirements: a. Performance requirements may dictate equipment exceeding minimum requirements indicated. b. Energy Star compliant.

2. Provide (1) PC workstation with the following minimum requirements: a. 9th Gen Intel® Core™ i5 9400 (6-Core, 9MB Cache, up to 4.1GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology) Processor b. Windows 10 Pro 64 Bit OS c. 8GB DDR4 RAM operating at 2666 MHz d. 256 GB M.2 PCIe Solid State Drive + 1TB 7200 RPM 3.5” SATA HDD e. Tray load DVD RW Optical Drive f. Intel UHD Graphics 630 with shared graphics memory g. Wireless 802.11bgn + Bluetooth 4.0, 1x1 h. 100/10 Base TM network Interface Card i. Onboard sound j. Wireless 101 Keyboard and Mouse Preloaded k. Preloaded MS Office Professional l. McAfee Small Business Security 12-month subscription, Digitally Delivered m. 2 year premium support with extended warranty n. I/O Cabling: Include applicable cabling to connect I/O devices

3. (1) 24” Flat Screen backlit LED monitor a. 16:9 aspect Ratio b. 1920 x 1080 max resolution at 60 Hz

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 23 ACPS BMS Master Spec

c. 1 year warranty

4. (1) Color Laser Printer a. A4/Legal paper size b. Up to 24 PPM letter size color, up to 13 ppm B/W duplex c. 600x600 dpi resolution d. USB 2.0, LAN or WIFI(n) e. 256 MB installed RAM f. 250 sheet input tray, 1 sheet manual tray g. Supply with (1) 500 sheet ream of standard 8.5”x11” office paper h. 1 year warranty

5. Provide (1) Laptop computer with the following minimum requirements: a. 10th Generation Intel® Core™ i5-10210U Processor (6MB Cache, up to 4.2 GHz) b. Windows 10 Pro 64-bit OS c. 8GB, 8Gx1, DDR4, 2666MHz RAM d. 500GB 5400RPM 2.5" SATA Hard Drive e. Intel® UHD Graphics with shared graphics memory f. 15.6-inch FHD (1920 x 1080) Anti-Glare LED-Backlit Non-touch Display g. I/O Ports 1) 2 USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-A 2) 1 SD Card Reader 3) 1 USB2.0 4) 1 Wedge Shaped Lock Slot 5) 1 Power Jack 6) 1 HDMI 7) 1 RJ45 - 10/100/1000Mbps GbE h. 1 Headphone/Mic Wireless 802.11ac 1x1 WiFi and Bluetooth 4.1 i. Tray load DVD Drive (Reads and Writes to DVD/CD) j. Integrated 720P Camera k. 3-Cell, 42 WHr., Integrated battery with 45W AC Charger l. Preloaded MS Office Professional m. McAfee Small Business Security 12-month subscription, Digitally Delivered n. 2 year premium support with extended warranty o. I/O Cabling: Include applicable cabling to connect I/O devices

6. Accessories: a. Nylon carrying case. b. Docking station. c. Wireless optical mouse. d. Category 6a patch cable. Minimum cable length shall be 6’ e. HDMI cable. Minimum cable length shall be 4’

E. Mobile Device:

1. Connect to system through a wireless router connected to LAN or cellular data service if applicable. 2. Able to communicate with any DDC controller connected to DDC system using secure web access. 3. Owner Provided.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 24 ACPS BMS Master Spec

F. Critical Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator-selected critical alarms shall be sent by DDC system to notify operator of critical alarms that require immediate attention. 2. DDC system shall send alarm notification to multiple recipients that are assigned for each alarm. 3. DDC system shall notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message and prerecorded phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.

G. Simultaneous Operator Use: Capable of accommodating up to 25 simultaneous operators that are accessing DDC system through any one of operator interfaces indicated.

2.07 NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

H. Network communication protocol(s) used throughout entire DDC system shall be open to Owner and available to other companies for use in making future modifications to DDC system.

I. ASHRAE 135 Protocol:

1. ASHRAE 135 communication protocol shall be sole and native protocol used throughout entire DDC system. 2. DDC system shall not require use of gateways except to integrate HVAC equipment and other building systems and equipment, not required to use ASHRAE 135 communication protocol. 3. If used, gateways shall connect to DDC system using ASHRAE 135 communication protocol and Project object properties and read/write services indicated by interoperability schedule. 4. Operator workstations, controllers and other network devices shall be tested and listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories.

J. Industry Standard Protocols:

1. DDC system shall use any one or a combination of the following industry standard protocols for network communication while complying with other DDC system requirements indicated:

a. ASHRAE 135. b. Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b. c. Mesh Networking 900 MHz Radio Frequency

2. Operator workstations controllers shall communicate through ASHRAE 135 protocol. 3. Portions of DDC system networks using ASHRAE 135 communication protocol shall be an open implementation of network devices complying with ASHRAE 135. Network devices shall be tested and listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories. 4. Portions of DDC system networks using Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b communication protocol shall be an open implementation of network devices and technology complying with Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b. 5. Wireless coordinators may be used under certain conditions where it is not feasible to use a wired network or to connect to specialty devices.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 25 ACPS BMS Master Spec

6. Gateways used to connect network devices using different protocols will not be allowed for new construction. 7. Gateways may be used for communications to legacy technologies on a case by case basis at the discretion of the Engineer.

2.08 DDC SYSTEM WIRELESS NETWORKS

A. Use Zigbee or 900 MHz technology to create a wireless mesh network to provide wireless connectivity for network devices at multiple system levels including communications from programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers to temperature sensors and from network controllers to programmable application controllers and application- specific controllers.

B. Installer shall design wireless networks to comply with DDC system performance requirements indicated. Wireless network devices shall co-exist on same network with hardwired devices.

C. A wireless coordinator shall provide a wireless interface between programmable application controllers, application-specific controllers, and network controllers.

D. Wireless Coordinators:

1. Each wireless mesh network shall use wireless coordinator(s) for initiation and formation of network. 2. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology. 3. Operate on the 900 MHz Band. 4. Comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. (FCC ID: ZTL-G2SC1) 5. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with sensors and routers to confirm and synchronize data transmission. 6. Capable of communication with sensors and routers up to a maximum distance of 1200 non-line of sight. 7. Include visual indicators to provide diagnostic information required for operator verification of operation.

E. Wireless Sensors:

1. Wireless temperature sensors shall sense and transmit room temperatures, temperature set point, room occupancy notification and low battery condition to an associated router. 2. Battery life greater than 10 years in regular use 3. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology. 4. Operate on the 900 MHz operating Frequency. 5. Comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. (FCC ID: ZTL-G2SC1) 6. Multiple sensors shall be able to report to a router connected to a DDC controller for averaging or high and low selection.

2.09 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Summary

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 26 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. This section describes the features and requirements of the hardware and software necessary to manage the Building Management System (BMS) Control Networks. 2. Fully configure systems and furnish and install all software, programming and dynamic color graphics for a complete and fully functioning system as specified. a. Provide network management of all BMS control devices. b. Provide custom set-up and development of the software to provide the functional and performance requirements specified. c. Develop system graphics for all specified mechanical and electrical systems, using animated objects to display all system variables and process valves. d. Provide supervisory control strategies for mechanical and electrical systems to permit the global sequence of operations specified herein

3. The User Interface software shall provide concurrent support of multiple display nodes utilizing the latest version of Windows 10 Pro network operating system. The imbedded software shall permit client/server distributed processing of the local area network nodes. The following features as a minimum shall be provided: a. Scalable architecture to permit system expansion without configuration changes. b. Full RAS and WAN support. c. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

B. Licensing

1. Provide or upgrade all licensing for all software packages at all required Network Controllers and Web Supervisors. BMS licensing shall allow unlimited simultaneous users for access to all aspects of the system including system access, workstations, points, programming, database management, network management, graphics etc. No restrictions shall be placed on the licensing. All operator interfaces, programming environment, networking, database management and any other software used by the Contractor to install the system or needed to operate the system to its full capabilities shall be licensed and provided to the Owner. 2. Hardware and software keys to provide all rights shall be provided. At least two (2) sets of flash drives shall be provided with backup software for all software provided, so that the Owner may reinstall any software as necessary. Include all licensing for workstation operating systems, and all required third-party software licenses. 3. In the last month of the Warranty Period, upgrade all software and firmware packages to the latest release (version) in effect at the end of the Warranty Period.

C. Network Management

1. The Contractor shall furnish network management hardware and software to logically manage, configure and program the BMS Control Devices locally. The Contractor shall provide network management of the BMS Control Devices. Network management shall include the following services: Device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, programming, device maintenance, network variable binding, channel traffic analysis, message priority levels, alarm message routing and repeating and protocol conversion.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 27 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Network Management Software shall be an intuitive interface for network design and installation and act as a bridge to integrate DDC Controller devices. The Network Management tool shall include all software modules necessary to provide complete network management, configuration, programming and maintenance locally and via the GUI web browser. 3. Network Management clients shall be capable of performing the following network services by accessing the appropriate network node databases from the Network Services Server: a. Device / node installation. b. Device / node configuration. c. Device / node diagnostics. d. Device / node maintenance. e. Programming. f. Network variable binding. g. A network variable browser. h. A graphical user interface. i. System diagnostics. 4. The Network Management Server Application shall reside on the BMS Local Area Network server. This application shall support multiple thin clients on the Local Area Network via the GUI web browser.

D. Graphical User Interface 1. User Interface Software shall be N4 development software and shall be configured to provide the following level of functionality 2. The User Interface software shall include support for building automation supervisory control, data acquisition, alarming, historical data collection and trending, and management report generation. The User Interface software shall have an open architecture design that allows the system to run in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment with support for on-line, dynamic data exchange and the latest version of ODBC with other applications such as spreadsheets, and database programs. The system shall have the built-in flexibility to permit easy configuration of the system in accordance with the specific objectives of the end user, as well as quick and easy modification of the end application by the user in the field. 3. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall It shall be dynamic to allow multiple views and menus. It shall include menu pull-downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification. 4. Real-Time Graphic Displays. The GUI shall, at a minimum, support the following graphical features and functions: a. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, PDF, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures. b. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML5 or XML

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 28 ACPS BMS Master Spec

document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens. c. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. d. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by either right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu or buttons that allow program functionality. No entry of text shall be required. e. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and entering the desired value or buttons with program functionality. 5. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access: a. Create, delete or modify control strategies. b. Add/delete objects and network variables to the system. c. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. d. Enable, disable or create control strategies; configure and program controllers. e. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. f. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. g. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically. 6. Operators shall be able to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: a. Start or stop selected equipment. b. Adjust set points. c. Add, modify, and delete time programming. d. Enable and disable process execution. e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point. f. Enable and disable totalization for each point. g. Enable and disable trending for each point. h. Override control loop set points. i. Enter temporary override schedules. j. Define holiday schedules. k. Change time and date. l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits. m. Enter and modify analog warning limits. n. Enable and disable demand limiting. o. Enable and disable duty cycle. p. Display logic programming for each control sequence.

7. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected group(s), or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.

2.10 ASHRAE 135 PROTOCOL ANALYZER

E. Analyzer and required cables and fittings for connection to ASHRAE 135 network.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 29 ACPS BMS Master Spec

F. Analyzer shall include the following minimum capabilities:

1. Capture and store to a file data traffic on all network levels. 2. Measure bandwidth usage. 3. Filtering options with ability to ignore select traffic.

2.11 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. PCU Software Residency: Each PCU as defined below shall be capable of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. All software including the following shall reside and execute at the PCU: 1. Real-Time Operating System software 2. Real-Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization 3. PCU diagnostic software 4. PCU Communication software/firmware 5. Direct Digital Control software 6. Alarm Processing and Buffering software 7. Energy Management software 8. Data Trending, Reporting, and Buffering software 9. I/O (physical and virtual) database 10. Remote Communication software

B. ASC Software Residency: Each ASC as defined below shall be capable of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. As a minimum, software including the following shall reside and execute at the ASC. 1. Real-Time Operating System software. 2. ASC diagnostic software. 3. ASC Communication software. 4. Control software applicable to the unit it serves that will support a single mode of operation. 5. I/O (physical and virtual) database to support one mode of operation.

C. Operating System: Controllers shall include a real-time operating system resident in ROM. This software shall execute independently from any other devices in the system. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions.

D. Network Communications: Each controller shall include software/firmware that supports the networking of controllers on a common communications trunk. Network support shall include the following: 1. Controller communication software shall include error detection, correction, and re- transmission to ensure data integrity. 2. Operator/System communication software shall facilitate communications between other NCs, all subordinate PCUs/ASCs, LAN Interface Devices or Operator Workstations. Software shall allow point interrogation, adjustment, addition/deletion, and programming while the controller is on line and functioning without disruption to unaffected points. The software architecture shall allow networked controllers to share selected physical and virtual point information throughout the entire system.

E. Point Database/Summary Table:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 30 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. All points included in the typical equipment point list must be represented to Owner’s WAN in a common, open protocol format. All points should be provided as BACnet objects. 2. Network Management: Point/system database creation and modification shall be via a user-friendly, menu-driven program. Network Management software shall support virtual or logic point (points not representing a physical I/O) creation.

F. Diagnostic Software: Controller software shall include diagnostic software that checks memory and communications and reports any malfunctions.

G. Alarm/Messaging Software: Controller software shall support alarm/message processing and buffering software as more fully specified below.

H. Application Programs: Controllers shall support and execute application programs as more fully specified below: 1. All Direct Digital Control software, Energy Management Control software, and functional block application programming software templates shall be provided in a ‘ready-to-use’ state, and shall not require (but shall allow) Owner programming. 2. Accurately and reliably record and transmit critical electrical information from pulse output demand side applications to provide revenue grade data analysis. 3. Line programs shall supply preprogrammed functions to support energy management and functional block application algorithms. All functions shall be provided with printed narratives and/or flow diagrams to document algorithms and how to modify and use them.

I. Security: Controller software shall support multiple level password access restriction.

J. Direct Digital Control: Controller shall support application of Direct Digital Control Logic. All logic modules shall be provided pre-programmed with written documentation to support their application. Provide the following logic modules as a minimum: 1. Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control with analog, PWM and floating output. 2. Two Position control (Hi or Low crossing with dead band). 3. Single-Pole Double-Throw relay. 4. Delay Timer (delay-on-make, delay-on-break, and interval). 5. Hi/Low Selection. 6. Reset or Scaling Module. 7. Logical Operators (And, Or, Not, Xor).

K. Psychometric Parameters: Controller software shall provide preprogrammed functions to calculated and present psychometric parameters (given temperature and relative humidity) including the following as a minimum: Enthalpy, Wet Bulb Temperature.

L. Updating/Storing Application Data: Site-specific programming residing in volatile memory shall be uploadable/downloadable from an OWS or CSS connected locally, to the FAC LAN, to the device level network and remotely via the Internet as applicable, but all must be available.

M. Restart: System software shall provide for orderly shutdown upon loss of power and automatic restart upon power restoration. Volatile memory shall be retained; outputs shall go to programmed fail (open, closed, or last) position. Equipment restart shall include a user definable time delay on each piece of equipment to stagger the restart. Loss of power shall be alarmed at operator interface indicating date and time.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 31 ACPS BMS Master Spec

N. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device, devices on a single network, or all devices simultaneously. Automatic time synchronization shall be provided.

O. Miscellaneous Calculations: System software shall automate calculation of psychometric functions, calendar functions, kWh/kW, and flow determination and totalization from pulsed or analog inputs, curve-fitting, look-up table, input/output scaling, time averaging of inputs and A/D conversion coefficients.

2.12 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION

A. The application software shall be user programmable.

B. This Specification generally requires a programming convention that is logical, easy to learn, use, and diagnose. General approaches to application programming shall be provided by one, or a combination, of the following conventions: 1. Graphical Block Programming: Manipulation of graphic icon ‘blocks’, each of which represents a subroutine, in a functional/logical manner forming a control logic diagram. Blocks shall allow entry of adjustable settings and parameters via pop-up windows. Provide a utility that shall allow the graphic logic diagrams to be directly compiled into application programs. Logic diagrams shall be viewable either off-line, or on-line with real-time block output values. 2. Functional Application Programming: Pre-programmed application specific programs that allow/require limited customization via ‘fill-in-the-blanks’ edit fields. Typical values would be setpoints gains, associated point names, alarm limits, etc. 3. Line Programming: Textual syntax-based programming in a language similar to BASIC designed specifically for HVAC control. Subroutines or functions for energy management applications, setpoints, and adjustable parameters shall be customizable, but shall be provided preprogrammed and documented.

C. Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs both off-line and on-line.

2.13 APPLICATION CONTROL LOGIC

A. The following type of process variable types shall be supported: 1. Discrete: On/Off or 0/1 2. Integer: 32 bit signed integer value between -2,147,483,648 and +2,147,483,647 3. Real: + or - 3.4 E38 4. String: Text string up to 131 characters long

B. System shall have the ability to execute user defined logic scripts. Logic scripts shall be created in an object or statement-based programming environment. No compilers or linkers shall be required.

C. System logic shall be able to automatically perform functions such as increase set-points, perform totalization, and check the status of process set-points to take action.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 32 ACPS BMS Master Spec

D. System logic shall be able to control and start other application programs running in the multi- tasking environment.

E. System logic shall be able to monitor the status of each process variable in the system, and perform specific functions based on the following parameters: 1. Normal Status 2. Alarm Status 3. Lo Alarm Status 4. Hi Alarm Status 5. Logical Result of Boolean Expression 6. Individual Bit in Word Status (0-31) 7. Acknowledged Alarm Status 8. Unacknowledged Alarm Status

F. System shall have the capability to perform application control to turn on/off discrete points, show windows, download recipes, etc. This application logic shall also start and stop other application programs in the multitasking environment, including spreadsheet programs, database programs, and recipe storage programs. Condition Logic shall be able to support up to 32,767 bytes of memory and shall support the following command functions: 1. String Functions 2. Math Functions 3. System Functions 4. Add-On Functions 5. Miscellaneous Functions

G. System shall have the capability to perform application control based upon a user definable state of a process variable or the result of an expression involving multiple process variables.

H. It shall be possible to define Condition Logic scripts which execute once when the condition expression becomes true, once when the condition expression becomes false or while the condition is true or while the condition is false at a user definable rate down to 55 mSec.

I. System shall have the ability to execute System Logic when the value of a Process Variable changes.

J. Data Change Logic shall support up to 32,767 bytes of memory and shall support execution and control of logic

2.14 APPLICATION BUILDER CAPABILITIES

A. Graphics development tools shall allow the creation of filled rectangles, circles/ellipses, polygons, and arcs. All display elements such as real time and historical trends, alarm summary displays, bitmap images, and charts shall be configurable objects with the capability to be placed in any window in any configuration.

B. The graphic drawing system shall be object-oriented. The user shall have the capability to arrange graphic objects based on the following commands: 1. Align Top 2. Send to Front 3. Align Bottom

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 33 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Send to Back 5. Align Left 6. Space Horizontal 7. Align Center Points 8. Rotate Clockwise and Counter-Clockwise 9. Space Vertical 10. Group Objects into a Cell

C. Graphics Editor shall allow layering of objects to activate specific objects based upon conditions in the process.

D. Graphics development tools shall allow object placement via a “snap-to-grid” feature with configurable grid spacing.

E. Graphics development tools shall support an “undo/redo” feature with a configurable number of levels and command display.

F. The system shall support a library of “self-configuring” objects that change properties based on dialog box entries made by the configurator. For example consider a standard setpoint loader object that has a graduated scale and a default range of 0 to 100.0. By simply making entries in a dialog box it shall be possible to change the range of the set-point loader to 32 - 212, change the number of major and minor divisions on the scale, and change the font used for the label text. The object should then redraw itself with new number of tick marks, new spacing, new labels, and new font.

G. The system shall support the import of .DXF files with the drawing elements imported as native objects. It shall be possible to animate these objects using the full set of object animation properties.

H. Graphics editor shall also allow the user to import drawings and images in .BMP file format.

I. In order to ensure the most productive graphics development environment, animated graphic objects or symbols shall be copyable in just two keystrokes, and immediate substitution of a tag name for the duplicated object shall be possible without leaving the graphics editor.

J. Animated graphic objects or process symbols shall be copyable from one window or display to another with all of their animation characteristics retained, thereby eliminating duplication of effort. In addition, it shall be possible to import windows from another application in this same fashion.

K. User shall have the capability to add tag name dictionary items while building a display without exiting the graphics editor.

L. User shall have the capability to search for process tag names while building a display and then get the exact detail of the item (alarm set-points, I/O address, and all other dictionary details) while building a display without exiting the graphics editor.

M. User shall have online context sensitive help on the display build routines to be able to obtain immediate help should he or she have a question about the details of linking objects to the tag name database dictionary.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 34 ACPS BMS Master Spec

N. The user shall be able to configure graphic screens while the system is monitoring the process.

O. User shall have the capability to edit tag name items and add new tag names while the system is running the process.

P. It shall be possible to export the entire database in .CSV format for import and subsequent editing to a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

Q. It shall be possible to import the entire database from a .CSV file created with Microsoft Excel.

R. A built-in editor shall be provided for the development of logic scripts. The editor shall be a full-featured text editor with single keystroke entry of Tag names, logic constructs and script functions. When a script function is placed in the editing window any arguments necessary for the script function to operate shall be automatically pasted into the window.

S. Online help shall be provided for all script functions.

T. The user shall be able to configure and edit logic scripts while the system is monitoring the process.

2.15 REPORT WRITER

A. Report Printing Capability 1. Printed reports shall contain process information including process data, status, accumulated variables, etc. 2. Reports shall have the capability to include a snapshot of trends, histograms, and SPC charts on the printed report. 3. Reports shall support use of graphic templates in a printed report.

B. Report Scheduling 1. Reports shall be able to be scheduled by time of day, day of week, hour of day, or at the end of a shift. 2. Reports shall be able to be printed on demand by the operator. 3. Reports shall be able to be printed based on any state change in the system.

C. Standard Reports: Standard DDC system reports shall be provided and operator shall be able to customize reports later.

1. All I/O: With current status and values. 2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout. 3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled. 4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic. 5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm. 6. Logs:

a. Alarm history. b. System messages. c. System events. d. Trends.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 35 ACPS BMS Master Spec

D. Custom Reports: Operator shall be able to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. Reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title. Custom Reports may include: 1. Tenant Override Reports: Prepare Project-specific reports. a. Weekly report showing daily total time in hours that each tenant has requested after-hours HVAC. b. Monthly report showing daily total time in hours that each tenant has requested after-hours HVAC. c. Annual summary report that shows after-hours HVAC usage on a monthly basis. 2. HVAC Equipment Reports: a. Chiller Report: Daily report showing operating conditions of each chiller according to ASHRAE 147, including, but not limited to, the following: 1) Chilled-water entering temperature. 2) Chilled-water leaving temperature. 3) Chilled-water flow rate. 4) Chilled-water inlet and outlet pressures. 5) Refrigerant levels. 6) Oil pressure and temperature. 7) Oil level. 8) Compressor refrigerant discharge temperature. 9) Compressor refrigerant suction temperature. 10) Addition of refrigerant. 11) Addition of oil. 12) Vibration levels or observation that vibration is not excessive. 13) Motor amperes per phase. 14) Motor volts per phase. 15) Refrigerant monitor level (PPM). 16) Purge exhaust time or discharge count. 17) Ambient temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 18) Date and time logged.

E. Utility Reports: Prepare

1. Electric Report:

a. Include monthly report showing the daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter. b. Include annual report showing the monthly electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

2. Natural Gas Report:

a. Include monthly report showing the daily natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand with time and date stamp for each meter. b. Include annual report showing the monthly natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

3. Service Water Report:

a. Include monthly report showing the daily service water consumption and peak service water demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 36 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b. Include annual report showing the monthly service water consumption and peak service water demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

F. Standard Trends:

1. Trend all I/O point present values, set points, and other parameters indicated for trending at 60 minute intervals. 2. Trend intervals shall be operator selectable from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes. Minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable. 3. Trends shall be associated into groups, and a trend report shall be set up for each group. 4. Trends shall be stored within DDC controller and uploaded to hard drives automatically on reaching 75% of DDC controller buffer limit, or by operator request, or by archiving time schedule. 5. Preset trend intervals for each I/O point after review with Owner. 6. When drive storage memory is full, most recent data shall overwrite oldest data. 7. Archived and real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and graphically by operators.

G. Custom Trends: Operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any I/O point in DDC system.

1. Each trend shall include interval, start time, and stop time. 2. Data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC controller, and then uploaded to archive on [workstation] [server] hard drives. 3. Data shall be retrievable for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.

2.16 ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS

A. System shall have the ability to perform all of the following energy management routines via preprogrammed function blocks or template programs. As a minimum provide the following whether or not required in the software: 1. Meets ANSI C12.20 Accuracy Standard 2. Time-of-Day Scheduling 3. Calendar-Based Scheduling 4. Holiday Scheduling 5. Temporary Schedule Overrides 6. Optimal Start/Optimal Stop-based on space temperature offset, outdoor air temperature, and building heating and cooling capacitance factors as a minimum 7. Night Setback and Morning Recovery Control, with ventilation only during occupancy 8. Economizer Control (enthalpy set-up for heating and cooling) 9. Peak Demand Limiting / Load Shedding 10. Dead Band Control

B. The User Interface HVAC application package shall automatically perform predefined calculations based on operated input, real-time data and required constants. Calculations shall be defined for evaluation by both the User Interface and BMS LAN Clients. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Enthalpy: Calculate total heat of air by sensing dry bulb and either relative humidity, wet bulb, or dew point

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 37 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Relative Humidity: Calculate RH from dry bulb temperature and either wet bulb or dew point. Acronym and type of sensor shall be operator input. 3. Wet Bulb: Calculate wet bulb temperature from enthalpy 4. Liquid Flow: Calculate flow rate from differential pressure across an orifice or venturi, or from an annubar sensor. Sensor acronym and type shall be operator input. 5. Zone Heat Energy: Calculate total heat energy in a zone based on dry bulb and either wet bulb, relative humidity, or dew point, and the volume of the space. All parameters shall be operator input. 6. Electrical Power: Calculate electrical power based on voltage and amperage, or on pulse meter input 7. Fluid Btu Rate: Based on flow and differential temperature 8. Addition/Subtraction/Multiplication/Division/ - Min/Max/Increment/ Decrement: Add, subtract, multiply, divide, selection of min or max for a number of real values and/or constants, and increase or decrease value by a fixed amount to obtain a virtual value. 9. Steam Flow: Calculate steam flow from pressure and temperature values 10. Steam Energy: Btu of steam flow 11. General Degree Three Polynomial. 12. Degree Days

C. Calculated points for which all component data is available within the realm of a single Control Unit shall be downloaded to the Network Controller or BMS LAN Server for calculation. Changes of state shall be reported to the BMS LAN Server as described for analog points. The definition of such a point shall include the creation of a free form algorithm using a command language designed specifically for User Interface applications. In addition to the arithmetic operators listed above, the algorithm shall allow trigonometric, logarithmic, and exponential terms. The time increment of calculating such points shall be on a resolution of 10 seconds.

D. Calculations requiring data from more than one controller shall be defined for evaluation by the User Interface Workstation. The operator shall choose the output units for the calculations from a list. The operator shall be able to determine the time increment for performing calculations on a resolution of 1 minute. Each calculated point shall be assigned a calculation priority which dictates the order in which the calculations are performed. Acronyms of sensed values shall be input by the operator. The operator shall input the value of required constants.

E. Calculated points shall be defined through the operator’s terminal in the same manner as sensed points with additional information requested as required. The calculated point shall appear to the operator as any real point (with a sensor) and the operator shall be able to use the acronym of the calculated point in the same manner as a real point.

F. Run-time Totalizing: Provide the capability to totalize the number of hours that any binary point in the system is in the “on” condition. The point may be a motor, lights, unlocked doors, and so forth. Every binary point shall be able to be totalized on operator assignment. 1. The operator shall be able to set limits associated with run-time. Provide capability to have a limit with every binary point. Limits shall be set through the operator’s keyboard. The system shall print an alarm on the event printer when the run-time of a point reaches the run-time limit. Run-time totals and limits shall be able to be reset from the operator’s terminal on command. 2. The operator shall be able to list a summary of run-time totals and each associated limit, if any. The summary shall be of all binary points or restricted to a particular location, system or point. The summary shall also be able to be restricted to those points that have reached the run-time limit.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 38 ACPS BMS Master Spec

G. Analog Totalizing/Averaging: Any analog or calculated point in the system shall be able to be assigned to the totalized and/or averaging program. The points assigned shall be totalized for averaged as minimum of once a minute. The following totals and averages for each point assigned shall be kept in storage. 1. Last 12 Months, by Month 2. Last 30 Days, by Day 3. Last 24 Hours, by Hour 4. Last Hour, by 5 Minute Increments 5. Last 10 Minutes, by Minute

H. Time Based Control 1. Any commandable point in the system shall be able to be assigned a specific command by time of day and day(s) of week through the operator’s terminal. The number of commands per point, per day, shall be limited only by the amount of memory available in the respective controller. The following commands shall be available: a. Start b. Stop c. Auto d. Low e. High f. Change set-point g. Change high limit h. Change low limit 2. Points shall be assigned time windows in which the assigned command is valid. Points shall be able to be assigned different time windows each day of the week plus a holiday schedule. Provide a means of deleting points from the time schedule by day(s) and time window. 3. Provide a time delay between starts, within an individual controller, that shall be adjustable on a per point basis. 4. Time schedules shall be downloaded to the respective controller for implementation. Loss of communication with the User Interface Workstation shall not affect the operation of downloaded time schedules. Any changes made by a time schedule shall be communicated to the User Interface Workstation and saved to the BMS LAN Server. 5. The operator shall be able to list summaries of time schedules on the operator’s terminal or data logger. The summary shall indicate the point and the various time windows assigned for that particular day. The summary shall be able to be restricted to a particular location, system, system type, point type, or point as well as to those days of the week desired. 6. Provide a means of scheduling holidays one year in advance. The system shall recognize scheduled holidays and run the holiday schedule for that day or days. The holidays shall be defined through the User Interface Workstation. 7. Provide a means to extend the time of equipment operation in a particular zone. The extended time shall be initiated from an operator’s keyboard or for a binary input request from the one itself. The extension shall be for a user defined period (minutes, days) and the system shall automatically use the normal schedule the next day. The zone, equipment within the zone (motors, lights, and so forth), and the length of the time extension shall be defined through the User Interface Workstation. Provide a summary of zone parameters and a summary of zones currently operating under extended time.

I. Time and Event Programs

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 39 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. Provide a method for automatically running programs based on occurrence of specified changes in the status of any binary, analog, or calculated point. The following changes in status shall be able to generate an automatic sequence. a. Change of binary status from 1 to 0, or 0 to 1 b. Reaching run-time limit c. High analog alarm (adjustable, prioritized) d. Low analog alarm (adjustable, prioritized) e. Analog return to normal 2. Each input point in the system shall be able to initiate a program and any number of points shall be able to initiate the same program 3. Points initiating programs shall pass a number of parameters to the program. These parameters shall be the following: a. Acronym of the point b. Pointer to the point in the data base c. Current status d. Last value 4. Programs shall be assigned to points through the User Interface Workstation. Assignments shall be able to be modified at any time. Time and Event Programs shall be generated at the User Interface Workstation and downloaded to local NC for execution. 5. The operator shall be able to request a summary of all automatic sequences with point assignments. The summary shall be displayed or printed on the data logger.

J. Duty Cycle 1. The operator shall be able to assign through the operator’s terminal online any controlled load in the system on the duty cycle program and define associated parameters. Parameters shall be individually assigned per load. Parameters shall be at least as follows: a. Acronym of the load start/stop point b. Acronym of the point that will feed back, (space temperature, loop temperature, differential pressure, other) c. The minimum on and off times for the load required for equipment protection from damage d. A description of at least one complete cycle and the time windows in which each is to be followed. At least five different cycles shall be allowed in any one day. The system shall support unique schedules for each day of the week (including holidays) and schedules do not violate the equipment’s minimum on and minimum off times. Cycles shall be defined with a resolution of at least five minutes. 2. The operator shall be able to modify any parameter on an individual basis at any time 3. Each load assigned to the duty cycler shall be cycled based on the individual parameters assigned to it. The duty cycler shall not stop the load if the feedback (space temperature, loop temperature, differential pressure, other) is in alarm. In no case shall the load ever be on or off for less time that the minimum on or off times defined. 4. The operator shall be able to display or print all the parameters associated with a load assigned to the duty cycler on request. Summaries shall be able to be requested for all points or restricted to a particular location or load by operator choice. 5. Loads shall be able to be locked out from or restored to the duty cycler by the operator at any time 6. Duty cycling shall be performed by a controller using parameters downloaded from the BMS User Interface Workstation. A change of state shall be reported to the BMS User Interface Workstation Server by the controller each item the duty cycler starts or stops the load.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 40 ACPS BMS Master Spec

K. Power Demand Monitoring and Load Shedding 1. The operator shall be able to assign through the operator's terminal online any controlled load in the system to the load shed program and define associated parameters. Parameters shall be individually assigned per load. Parameters shall be at least as follows: a. Acronym of the load start/stop point b. Acronym of the point that will feed back space conditions or system status to the program (i.e., space temperature, differential pressure, light level (foot-candles), etc.). If no space temperature point exists, this parameter shall not have to be defined. c. The minimum on and off times for the load required for equipment protection from damage. d. The kilowatt rating of the load. e. The acronym of the electric meter that the load is associated with. f. The priority level of the load. Provided capability of 16 priority levels. 2. The operator shall be able to modify any load parameter on an individual basis at any time. 3. The operator shall be able to display or print all of the parameters associated with the load assigned to the load shedding program on request. Summaries shall be able to be requested for all points, or restricted to a particular location or load by operator choice. 4. Demand meters shall be defined by the operator through the operator's terminal. Parameters associated with demand meters are as follows: a. Acronym of the meter b. The demand limit to begin shedding loads c. The demand at which loads shall begin to be restored d. The number of priority level associated with the meter e. The demand interval strength 5. The operator shall be able to modify any meter parameters on an individual basis at any time 6. The operator shall be able to display or print all parameters associated with a particular demand meter on request 7. The power demand program shall operate on a sliding window basis. Each minute shall be considered to be in the middle of the cycle interval. The demand data shall be gathered each minute. The data from the last N minutes (where N equals one-half the interval length) shall then be used to create a best fit first-degree polynomial curve. The curve shall then be examined at what would be the end of the interval (N minutes ahead). If this value is greater than the shed limit, the power demand program shall calculate the excess load and initiate load shedding. The shedding shall begin with the lowest priority loads and shall be governed by the point's minimum on time, maximum off time, point disability, and status of the space temperature point (if one has been defined). If the point has not satisfied (continuously) its minimum on time, if the maximum off time has already been reached, if the point is disabled, or if the space temperature point is in alarm, the load initially shall not be shed. If the power demand program finds that it has examined all loads in all priorities and more shedding is still necessary, according to the predicted load, it shall go back to the lowest level and re-examine the points, this time overlooking the status of space temperature points. If it is still unable to adequately reduce the load level, the operator shall be informed of the number of kilowatts still needed to be shed. Under no circumstances shall the system shed a load if the point's minimum on time has not been satisfied or if the point is disabled. 8. If at any time after load shedding has been initiated, the system forecasts the end of cycle consumption to be below the restore limit, the power demand program shall begin

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 41 ACPS BMS Master Spec

starting up the loads in order to bring the system back into the state in which it was operating before the shedding began. Load restoration shall be performed in inverse order from that observed in the shedding process. The first group of points to be restored shall consist of those whose sample area is in alarm. The second group shall be the remainder of the power demand monitored points that are currently off and have met their minimum off time. Under no circumstances shall the power demand program restore a point that is either disabled or has not yet satisfied its minimum off time. The starts shall be performed in an efficient manner, each being delayed by the amount of time specified by the preceding point within the same controller. When enough load has been restored so that the forecasted consumption is above the restore limit, the power demand program shall discontinue the restoration process. 9. Points that are both duty cycled and power demand monitored may be shed by the power demand program, but shall only be started up by the duty cycler. If the duty cycler deems it necessary to start such a point, it shall determine whether the point is off due to load shedding or normal cycling. If the point was shed and an entire power demand program interval has not elapsed since the time of the shed, the duty cycler shall then locate and shed enough other load to allow the original point to be started, without affecting the total system power consumption. 10. A power demand profile shall be available to the operator upon request. The profile shall be displayed or printed by operator selection. The profile shall include the demand meter description, the time, date, demand limit, restore limit, interval length, current demand, highest demand today and time of occurrence, highest demand yesterday and time of occurrence, highest demand during current billing period with time and date of occurrence, and the highest demand for the last 11 billing periods by billing period with time and date of occurrence, and the highest demand for the last 11 billing periods by billing period with time and date of occurrence. Billing periods shall be able to be defined by the operator through the operator’s terminal.

L. Mixed Air Enthalpy Control 1. The system shall calculate the enthalpy of the outside air and the return air of each air handling unit assigned to the program. The program shall use the logic required as defined in the sequence of operations.

M. Optimum Start Time 1. The optimum start program shall calculate the latest start time for air handling units in each operator-defined zone. The calculations shall consider occupancy time, outdoor temperature, indoor temperature, desired indoor temperature at occupancy, the capacity of the air handler(s), and the zone's heat gain/loss rate. 2. The program shall run at a reschedule interval of no more than five minutes beginning at an hour that is certain to be before the start-up time for all of the optimum start zones. The program shall examine each zone at the frequency defined for that zone. 3. When the program determines that the optimum start time has been reached, it shall start all of the air handling units included in the zone definition. 4. At the zone occupancy time, the system shall record the actual zone temperature and any deviation from desired temperature. If any unit within the zone was found to have been off-line between the startup time and the occupancy time, the data shall be flagged as invalid. 5. Optimum start zones shall be defined by the operator through the operator's terminal. Parameters shall include as a minimum: a. Occupancy time for each day of the week

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 42 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b. Desired temperature at occupancy during heating season c. Desired temperature at occupancy during cooling season d. Whether the zone is on cooling, heating, or both e. Acronym of outdoor temperature sensor f. Acronym of indoor temperature sensor g. Acronym(s) of air handler(s) to be started h. Acronym of the zone 6. The operator shall be able to modify the parameters at any time. A summary of the zone parameters shall be available on command. The summary shall be displayed on the operator's terminal or printed on the data logger. This summary shall detail the conditions presented to the optimum start program as well as the results of the optimum start function for one week. The information, output by zone, shall include the difference between the target temperature and both the inside and outside air temperatures at the zone start time, the difference between the target temperature and the actual room temperature at occupancy time, and the start time measured in minutes before occupancy. Performance summaries shall be able to be requested for individual or multiple zones.

N. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization

2.17 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE

A. System Protection 1. A supervisory control system is used to control sensitive processes and costly equipment. Therefore, system protection is essential to prevent unauthorized actions on the system or accidental damage to the system. The following describes minimum required system protection capabilities. 2. Foreground Program Switching a. It shall be possible to configure the run-time system so as to prevent the operator from obtaining direct access to foreground program switching by disabling certain keys in the system. In this way, only the foreground program switching which is built into the end application shall be accessible to the process operator. 3. File Menu Access a. It shall be possible to configure the run-time system so as to prevent the operator from obtaining direct access to the File Menu or any other direct ability to open and close files outside of the desired built-in capabilities of the final operator interface application. 4. System Level Interface a. It shall be possible to provide password protection on a moveable mask that can cover the entire system level graphical user interface, including the operating system title bars, menu bars, etc. such that only authorized personnel would have access to this level of control. This protection is necessary to prevent lesser skilled personnel from causing damage to the operator interface application, from accidentally erasing files or records, or from accessing other software not directly connected with the desired plant monitoring and supervisory control application. 5. Operator Log-On a. It shall be possible to assign each operator a log-on password which defines a unique access level, thereby limiting access to various command functions based on the operator's access level. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the Owner’s authorized BMS Administrator to limit workstation

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 43 ACPS BMS Master Spec

control, display and database manipulation capabilities as BMS Administrator deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned user name with a unique password. b. Based on the operator's unique password, it shall be possible to log each operator's actions for later review. c. It shall be possible to define an inactivity time span between operator actions on the system, requiring the operator to log on again with his password. This capability is useful in preventing unauthorized access to the operator interface system while an operator is away from his station performing other duties. d. All passwords for the system shall be provided to the Owner including administrator, dealer, or factory level passwords for the systems provided under this Project. e. Passwords shall restrict access to all Controllers. f. A minimum of 250 user names shall be supported per Owner’s direction.

B. Alarm and Event Management Reporting 1. Alarm Display Capability: a. System shall support displaying of alarms on any display as a user defined sizable object, which may be placed by itself or along with other objects in a window. It shall be possible to scroll forward or backward through the alarm displays by depressing command buttons. Current Alarms shall be available as an Alarm Summary Object and a chronological summary of Alarms shall be available as an Alarm History object. b. The operator shall be able to select the alarms displayed by an object alarms by group and/or priority by using command buttons. Up to 999 priority levels shall be supported. c. The system shall support an unlimited number of alarm displays. d. Alarms shall be color coded according to the state of the alarm, including an acknowledged alarm, unacknowledged alarm, and an alarm that has returned to normal, but is not yet acknowledged. The user shall be able to choose from 32 different colors for display of each of these alarm states. The alarm display object may also support event display with the color used for events also being one of the 32 different colors. e. The alarm display shall support the display of the following alarm parameters, which are user selectable in the configuration mode: Date Time Type of Alarm (HI, LO, etc.) Value of Variable in Alarm Operator Name Alarm Priority Alarm Group Name Comment f. It shall be possible to configure the system such that the operator is notified of an alarm no matter what display he or she is currently viewing. Notification shall include the option of a pop-up alarm display window, a flashing process symbol, such as a process vessel, an alarm text message that is available on each display, or a dedicated alarm display window on the screen. g. The user shall be able to display alarms on an individual or a group basis, with support for sixteen (16) groups, each having up to sixteen (16) subgroups. The alarm hierarchy shall be capable of being nested up to eight (8) levels deep. h. It shall be possible to inform the operator of an alarm condition via an audible tone, a pop-up display, or any combination of animation types on the screen. Alarm acknowledgment may be performed on all alarms, alarms in a single group,

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 44 ACPS BMS Master Spec

alarms in a collection of groups as defined in an alarm group hierarchy or on a point-by-point basis. 2. Alarm File Capability: a. Alarms shall be logged to a file for future viewing or review of alarm history data. The user shall have the capability to review the file for cause and event analysis. b. The alarms that are logged shall be configurable from a choice of the parameters. 3. Alarm Printing Capability: a. Alarms shall be printed to a printer using either a serial or parallel interface. The format of the alarm printout shall be configurable and made up of any of the parameters listed in Section 2.3.A.4. All alarms shall be capable of being printed to either a local or a remote network printer. 4. Alarm Transmission Capability: a. Alarms shall be transmitted over the Owner’s secure internal wide area network. b. Each alarm shall be associated with a priority level and unique user-defined list of operator devices including any combination of local or remote workstations, printers, workstation disk files, e-mail addresses, and pagers. All alarms associated with a given priority level shall be routed to all operator devices on the user-defined list associated with that priority level. For each priority level, alarms shall be automatically routed to a default operator device in the event that alarms are unable to be routed to any operator device assigned to the priority level. 5. Events: a. Events shall be logged for review by the operator, engineering or management personnel. The system shall log each new operator log-on, and whenever an operator changes a set-point or turns any device on or off. Each time the event log records an event, it will record the operator logged in and the type of action taken (set-point change, state change, etc.), along with a date and time stamp.

C. Real-Time and Historical Trending 1. The software shall display real-time and historical data in both a tabular and graphical format. The requirements of this trending shall include the following: a. Provide trends for all physical points, virtual points and calculated variables. b. In the graphical format, the trend shall plot at least four (4) different values for a given time period superimposed on the same graph. The four (4) values shall be distinguishable by using unique colors. In printed form the four (4) lines shall be distinguishable by different line symbology. Displayed trend graphs shall indicate the engineering units for each trended value. c. The sample rate and data selection shall be selectable by the operator. d. The trended value range shall be selectable by the operator. e. Where trended values on one table/graph are COV, software shall automatically fill the trend samples between COV entries. f. Real-time trend displays shall support the use of expressions of tag names including add, multiply, divide, etc., to permit proper scaling of variables. g. Historical trend display should allow the user to zoom in and out in time from 1 minute up to 6 weeks in one display. It shall be possible to activate the zoom-in and zoom-out features using action scripted command buttons available to the operator. h. The operator shall have the capability to pan backward and forward in time to view historically logged data. i. Historically collected data shall be available to be exported to a spreadsheet format for analysis, additional reports, etc.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 45 ACPS BMS Master Spec

j. Control Loop Performance Trends: Controllers incorporating PID control loops shall also provide high resolution sampling in less than six second increments for verification of control loop performance. k. Data Buffering and Archiving: Trend data shall be buffered at the NC and/or CSS, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. All archived trends shall be transmitted to the on-Site OWS or CSS as applicable. Uploads shall occur based upon a user-defined interval, manual command, or automatically when the trend buffers become full. l. Time Synchronization: Provide a time master that is installed and configured to synchronize the clocks of all BMS devices supporting time synchronization. All trend sample times shall be able to be synchronized.

D. Data acquisition and Storage 1. All points included in the typical equipment point list must be represented in a common, open or accessible format. All points should be provided as BACnet Objects. 2. Data from the BMS shall be stored in relational database format. The format and the naming convention used for storing the database files shall remain consistent across the database and across time. The relational structure shall allow for storage of any additional data points, which are added to the BMS in future. The metadata/schema or formal descriptions of the tables, columns, domains, and constraints shall be provided for each database. 3. The database shall allow applications to access the data while the database is running. The database shall not require shutting down in order to provide read-write access to the data. Data shall be able to be read from the database without interrupting the continuous storage of trend data being carried by the BMS. 4. The database shall be ODBC or OLE database compliant. Provide a commercially- available ODBC driver or OLE database data provider, which would allow applications to access the data via Microsoft Windows standard data access services.

E. Totalization 1. The software shall support totalizing analog, digital, and pulsed inputs and be capable of accumulating, storing, and converting these totals to engineering units used in the documents. These values shall generally be accessible to the Operator Interfaces to support management-reporting functions. 2. Totalization of electricity use/demand shall allow application of totals to different rate periods, which shall be user definable. 3. When specified to provide electrical or utility Use/Demand, the Contractor shall obtain from the local utility all information required to obtain meter data, including k factors, conversion constants, and the like.

F. Equipment Scheduling 1. Provide a graphic utility for user-friendly operator interface to adjust equipment- operating schedules. 2. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any workstation. 3. Scheduling feature shall include multiple seven-day schedules, plus holiday schedule, each with start time and stop time. Schedules shall be individually editable for each day and holiday. 4. Scheduling feature shall allow for each individual equipment unit to be assigned to one of the schedules.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 46 ACPS BMS Master Spec

5. Timed override feature shall allow an operator to temporarily change the state of scheduled equipment. An override command shall be selectable to apply to an individual unit, all units assigned to a given schedule, or to all units in a building. Timed override shall terminate at the end of an operator selectable time. A password level that does not allow assignment of schedules shall allow a timed override feature. 6. A yearly calendar feature shall allow assignment of holidays, and automatic reset of system real time clocks for transitions between daylight savings time and standard time.

G. Point Structuring and Naming 1. General: a. The intent of this Section is to require a consistent means of naming points across the Owner’s WAN. Contractor shall configure the systems from the perspective of the Owner’s WAN, not solely the local Project. b. IN general, the naming conventions used shall follow Project Haystack point naming conventions. The following requirement establishes a standard for naming points and addressing Buildings, Networks, Devices, Instances, and the like. c. The convention is tailored towards the Owner’s WAN and as such, the interface shall always use this naming convention. d. BACnet systems shall use this naming convention. For non BACnet systems (e.g. MODBUS), the naming convention shall be implemented as much as practical, and any deviations from this naming convention shall be approved by the Owner. e. Each Network Controller shall have English language descriptors for all system points, variables, parameters etc. located and accessible from the NC memory. All point naming shall match between all system files and record documents. 2. Point Summary Table: a. The term ‘Point’ is a generic description for the class of object represented by analog and binary inputs, outputs, and values. b. With each schematic, Contractor shall provide a Point Summary Table listing: 1) Building code (3 digit building acronym) 2) Floor code 3) Room number 4) Sub room letter 5) Equipment type 6) Equipment number 7) Equipment code 8) Full point name (see Point Naming Convention paragraph) 9) Point description 10) Object type 11) Engineering units 12) Network variable c. Additional fields for Legacy systems shall be appended to each row. Point Summary Table shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format (ODBC-compliant). d. Point Summary Table shall also illustrate Network Variable Data Links. e. The BMS Provider shall coordinate with the Owner’s representative to compile and submit a proposed Point Summary Table for review prior to any object programming or Project startup. The Contractor shall support and not impede direct negotiations between the BMS Provider and the Owner to allow the customizing necessary for structuring the BMS point names to meet the Owner’s needs. The Owner shall grant approval of final point names to be verified through Commissioning by issuing the approved alarms to the Contractor.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 47 ACPS BMS Master Spec

f. The Point Summary Table shall be kept current throughout the duration of the Project by the Contractor as the Master List of all points for the Project. Project closeout documents shall include an up-to-date accurate Point Summary Table. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner the final Point Summary Table prior to final acceptance of the system. The Point Summary Table shall be used as a reference and guide during the Commissioning process. g. The Point Summary Table shall contain all data fields on a single row per point. The Point Summary Table is to have a single master source for all point information in the building that is easily sorted and kept up-to-date. Although a relational database of Device ID-to-point information would be more efficient, the single line format is required as a single master table that will reflect all point information for the building. The point description shall be an easily understandable English-language description of the point.

Point Summary Table - Example (Transpose for a single point per row format)

Building Code LIB (Library) Floor Code 04 Room Number 1000 Sub room letter A Equipment Type Air Handler (AH) Equipment Number 31 Equipment Code SAT *POINT NAME (OBJECT NAME) LIB04_1000a_AH31_SAT *Point Description (Object Description) AH31 Supply Air Temperature Object Type AI Engineering Units Deg f

*Represents information that shall reside in the relevant property for the object

3. Point Naming Convention: a. All point names shall adhere to the format as established below. Said objects shall include all physical I/O points, calculated points used for standard reports, and all application program parameters. For each BMS object, a specific and unique name shall be required. b. For each point, seven (7) distinct descriptors shall be linked to form each unique object name: Building Code, Floor, Room Number, Equipment Type, Equipment Number or Letter, Equipment Code or Point Description. Each of the four (4) descriptors must be bound by an underscore to form the entire object name. Reference the paragraphs below for an example of these descriptors. c. The Owner shall designate the ‘Building’ descriptor. The ‘Equipment Type’ descriptor shall define the equipment category; e.g., Chiller, Air Handling Unit, or other equipment. The ‘Equipment Code’ descriptor shall define the hardware or software type or function associated with the equipment; e.g., supply temperature, water pressure, alarm, mixed air temperature setpoint, etc. and shall contain any numbering conventions for multiples of equipment; e.g., CHLR1KW, CHLR2KW, BLR2AL (Boiler 2 Alarm), HWP1ST (Hot Water Pump 1 Status). d. A consistent object (point) naming convention shall be utilized to facilitate familiarity and operational ease across Owner’s WAN. Inter-facility consistency

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 48 ACPS BMS Master Spec

shall be maintained to ensure transparent operability to the greatest degree possible. The table below details the object naming convention and general format of the descriptor string. A maximum of 30 characters shall be used.

Point / Object Name Requirements Sample: LIB04_1000a_AH31_SAT

(LIB) - Building Code 2 or 3 alpha characters - Building Name 2 alpha or numeric characters - Must use two (04) - Floor Location characters, such as, (02) for Second Floor (_) 1 character – underscore; acts as a separator (1000) - Room Number 3 - 4 numeric characters (a) - Sub Room Letter (a-z) if no sub room DO NOT use space or a dash (_) 1 character – underscore; acts as a separator (AH) - Equipment Type 2 alpha characters (31) - Equipment Number, 1-2 upper case alpha and/or numeric characters Equipment Letter, or Combination (_) 1 character - period; acts as a separator (SAT) - Equipment Code 1 - 4 alpha characters

4. Examples: Within each object name, the descriptors shall be bound by an underscore. Within each descriptor, words shall not be separated by dashes, spaces, or other separators as follows: a. LIB04_1000a_AH31_SAT - Library, 4th Floor, Rm. 1000a, Air Handler #31, Supply Air Temperature. b. OFC03_0407_BR01_S/S – Office Building, 3rd Floor, Rm. 407, Boiler #1, Start/Stop. c. CH04_0102_VV19_ZSTP - Courthouse, 4th Floor, Rm. 102, VAV Terminal 19, Zone Temperature Setpoint.

H. User Input/Control Functions 1. Graphic software shall facilitate user-friendly interface to all aspects of the System Software specified above. The intent of this Specification is to require a graphic package that provides for intuitive operation of the systems without extensive training and experience. It shall facilitate logical and simple system interrogation, modification, configuration, and diagnosis. 2. The operator shall be able to access displays via a pointing device and/or soft key menus with a choice of function keys, cursor control keys, or any key on the keyboard. Supported pointing devices shall include a mouse, touch screen, light pen, or trackball. 3. The system shall support operator access to multiple displays at one time, including split screens where the operator may view more than one process area at a time. In addition, the system shall support unlimited use of pop-up displays for additional help or diagnostic information. 4. Access to all displays and to all command functions shall be based on the operator’s security level to protect against unauthorized use. The security level shall be established during the operator sign-on procedure. 5. Visibility and operation of command buttons, symbols, etc. shall be controllable based upon the operator’s security level. 6. The operator shall be able to have access to context sensitive help at any time during operation of the system.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 49 ACPS BMS Master Spec

7. Graphic software shall provide for multitasking such that third-party programs can be used while the OWS software is on line. Software shall provide the ability to alarm graphically even when operator is in another software package. 8. An operator shall be able to control a discrete point using an action command button. This control includes momentary on, momentary off, toggle on-off, set, and reset. 9. The operator shall be able to use command buttons to adjust set-points up and down on a percentage or absolute basis. Each request for increase or decrease shall be evaluated against valid operating limits before allowing the adjustment. 10. Control of individual set-points shall be enabled based upon a user’s security level and password.

I. Display Capability 1. The software shall allow for Owner creation of user-defined, color graphic displays of geographic maps, building plans, floor plans, and mechanical and electrical system schematics. These graphics shall be capable of displaying all point information from the database including any attributes associated with each point (i.e., engineering units, etc.). In addition, operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. 2. The system shall allow the user to view animated graphics for process templates including tanks, pumps, etc. This includes: a. Percentage fill of the object including irregular shapes such as polygons, ellipses, etc. b. Color change of the object. Up to 32 colors. c. Blinking of the object based upon any alarm in the system or upon a designated group of alarms. d. Each object shall have a visibility attribute option allowing for visibility of the object based upon a condition in the system. e. The system shall support animation of objects via resizing, moving, and/or rotating objects based upon a change in a process variable. f. Objects shall be animated based upon any user-defined criteria made up of other tag-names in the system. This includes the use of expressions containing all mathematical functions and the status of analog and discrete values in the system. g. Objects shall be able to be animated according to any of eight (8) different alarm conditions for an analog variable, including: Lo Alarm LoLo Alarm Hi Alarm HiHi Alarm Rate of Change Normal State h. Objects shall be able to blink or change color by evaluating any of the 32 bits in an analog register. Up to 32 colors shall be possible. 3. The system shall support the capability for the operator to view scanned images from desktop or hand-held scanners. It shall be possible to animate these images to show a color change based on the status of process operations, including alarm or normal state. 4. Screen Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system graphic screens via a graphical penetration scheme by using the mouse to select from menus or ‘button’ icons. Each graphic screen shall be capable of having a unique list of other graphic screens that are directly linked through the selection of a menu item or button icon. 5. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic physical point values shall automatically updated at a minimum frequency of six (6) updates per minute without operator intervention. Point value fields shall be displayed with a color code depicting normal, abnormal, override and alarm conditions.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 50 ACPS BMS Master Spec

6. Point Override Feature: Each displayed point shall be individually enabled/disabled to allow mouse-driven override of digital points or changing of analog points. Such overrides or changes shall occur in the control unit, not just in the workstation software. The graphic point override feature shall be subject to password level protection. Points that are overridden shall be recorded as an event, and shall be displayed in a coded color. The event message shall include the operator’s user name. 7. System shall support use of true-type scalable fonts that may be scaled according to the desired size of the text. The fonts shall be loaded by the operating system. The user may choose from up to 32 different text colors. 8. System shall support change of text color based upon the process value going into eight (8) different alarm states. 9. Text shall be able to blink based upon any user definable condition occurring in the system, such as an alarm on a particular setpoint, alarm on any value in a process group, or based on the actual value of a process variable. 10. System shall display process values based upon the security level of the user. 11. Text shall be able to be made visible or invisible based upon an alarm condition in the process or any other state change in the system.

J. Graphics Development Package: Graphic development and generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. 1. The Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), mechanical system components (e.g., pumps, chillers, cooling towers, boilers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols. 2. The Graphic Development Package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device to allow the user to perform the following: a. Define symbols. b. Position items on graphic screens. c. Attach physical or virtual points to a graphic. d. Define background screens. e. Define connecting lines and curves. f. Locate, orient and size descriptive text. g. Define and display colors for all elements. h. Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays. i. Create hot spots or link triggers to other graphic displays or other functions in the software.

2.18 DDC CONTROLLERS

K. Section includes: 1. Network Controller (NC). 2. Programmable Control Unit (PCU). 3. Application Specific Controller (ASC).

L. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 51 ACPS BMS Master Spec

M. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements indicated.

N. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor with a distributed network database and intelligence.

O. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network.

P. Environment Requirements:

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 2. Controllers located in conditioned space shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F 3. Controllers located outdoors shall be rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F

Q. Power and Noise Immunity:

1. Controller shall operate at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage. 2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios with up to 5 W of power located within 36 inches of enclosure.

R. General Network Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated. 2. Network Controllers shall utilize The Niagara Tridium N4 Platform 3. System shall consist of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based network controllers to manage global strategies indicated. 4. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 5. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices. 6. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms. 7. Controllers shall have a real-time clock. 8. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification. 9. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

S. Communication:

1. Network controllers shall communicate with other devices on DDC system Level one network. 2. Network controller also shall perform routing if connected to a network of programmable control unit and application-specific controllers.

T. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation or mobile device.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 52 ACPS BMS Master Spec

U. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor. 2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

2.19 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL UNITS (PCU)

A. BACnet® based DDC Programmable Control Unit (PCU) shall be provided where required to perform the sequence of operation. The PCU shall be fully configurable and programmable via the GUI web browser. The controller shall store all specific control sequences and program settings in non-volatile memory.

B. All PCU processors shall be operating at 5 MHz or higher with 8K of RAM and 64K of Flash memory with a minimum 10 year memory retention between program downloads.

C. Each PCU shall perform all intended control functions in a ‘standalone’ mode should the unit incur a loss of communications.

D. The complete PCU including accessory devices such as relays, transducers, power supplies, etc., shall be factory-mounted, wired and housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure or as required by the location and local code requirements.

E. Each PCU shall allow communications.

F. All PCUs shall be provided as self sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall include internal ‘soft’ clock, operating systems, communication timing and interrupt controls, and shall be suitable for the specified applications.

G. In the event of a power outage or controller reset, each PCU shall enter a preprogrammed state on power re-application. Upon application of power to the PCU, all control conditions will start from an ‘off’ / ‘closed’ position or the default state. This state will be maintained for an automatically adjusted amount of time. Once this time delay has passed, the PCU control sequence shall resume according to current values

H. Network and controller-to-controller communications must conform to BACnet® standards.

I. All PCUs shall be provided with a communications port to allow connection of any industry standard laptop PC and custom configuration tools. Program access via this communications port allows direct field modification of the configuration parameters.

J. Digital Inputs 1. All digital inputs shall be over voltage protected. 2. Digital Input types supported by the PCU: a. Normally open contacts (24V and 120V). b. Normally closed contacts (24V and 120V).

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 53 ACPS BMS Master Spec

c. Current/no current. d. Voltage/no voltage. e. Pulse/Totalizer contacts.

K. Digital Outputs 1. All digital outputs shall be 24 volt AC, current sinking, 0.5 amp opto-isolated triacs. 2. Digital outputs shall be capable of handling maintained as well as pulsed outputs for momentary or magnetic latching circuits. It shall be possible to configure outputs for 3- mode control (fast-slow-off) and 2-mode control.

L. Analog Inputs 1. All analog inputs shall be over voltage protected. 2. The analog to digital resolutions shall be a minimum of 10 bit. 3. Analog inputs shall accept the following temperature types: 10K Ohm thermistor, 20K Ohm thermistor, or 1K Ohm RTD. 4. Inputs shall be configurable to accept a wide range of inputs including: 4-20mA, 1-5Vdc, 2-10Vdc, etc.

M. Analog Outputs 1. The PCU shall accommodate true analog outputs. Voltage (0-10V) and current (4-20 mA) outputs shall be accommodated. 2. All analog outputs shall be proportional current or voltage type. 3. The digital to analog resolution shall be a minimum of 10 bit. 4. Outputs shall be configurable so that 0-100% output commands can represent any portion of the output voltage/current range. 5. Outputs shall be reversible so that an increasing output command yields a decreasing electrical signal.

N. In addition to local physical or internal I/O, each PCU shall support distributed or ‘bound’ I/O. This bound I/O can be used to allow the PCU to provide I/O data to another controller on the network or to allow another controller to provide data to the controlling PCU Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation or mobile device

O. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor. 2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

P. A PCU as specified above is generally fully featured and customizable whereas the ASC refers to a more cost-effective unit designed for lower-end, high quantity applications. Specific requirements indicated below are required for the respective application. The Contractor may apply the most cost-effective unit that meets the requirement of that application.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 54 ACPS BMS Master Spec

Q. Each Controller shall be capable of performing the required sequence of operation for the associated equipment.

R. All physical point data and calculated values required to accomplish the sequence of operation shall originate within the associated Controller with only the exceptions enumerated below. Listed below are functional point data and calculated values that shall be allowed to be obtained from or stored by other Controllers via the LAN.

2.20 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)

A. Description: Microprocessor-based controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. Controllers are not fully user-programmable but are configurable and customizable for operation of equipment they are designed to control.

1. Capable of standalone operation and shall continue to include control functions without being connected to network. 2. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

B. Communication: Application-specific controllers shall communicate with other application- specific controller and devices on network, and to programmable application and network controllers.

C. Operator Interface: Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor. 2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 3. Controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in event of power loss.

2.21 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General Controller Software Requirements:

1. Software applications shall reside and operate in controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at operator workstations. 2. Controller-to-controller communications must conform to BACnet standards. 3. All ASCs shall be provided with a communications port to allow connection of any industry standard laptop PC and custom configuration tools. Program access via this communications port allows direct field modification of the configuration parameters. 4. Digital Inputs a. All digital inputs shall be over voltage protected. b. Digital Input types supported by the ASC: 1) Normally open contacts (24V and 120V). 2) Normally closed contacts (24V and 120V). 3) Current/no current. 4) Voltage/no voltage.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 55 ACPS BMS Master Spec

5) Pulse/Totalizer contacts. 5. Digital Outputs a. All digital outputs shall be 24 volt AC, current sinking, 0.5 amp opto-isolated triacs. b. Digital outputs shall be capable of handling maintained as well as pulsed outputs for momentary or magnetic latching circuits. It shall be possible to configure outputs for 3-mode control (fast-slow-off) and 2-mode control. 6. Analog Inputs a. All analog inputs shall be over voltage protected. b. The analog to digital resolutions shall be a minimum of 10 bit. c. Analog inputs shall accept the following temperature types: 10K Ohm thermistor, 20K Ohm thermistor, or 1K Ohm RTD. d. Inputs shall be configurable to accept a wide range of inputs including: 4-20mA, 1- 5Vdc, 2-10Vdc, etc. 7. Analog Outputs a. The ASC shall accommodate true analog outputs. Voltage (0-10V) and current (4- 20 mA) outputs shall be accommodated. b. All analog outputs shall be proportional current or voltage type. c. The digital to analog resolution shall be a minimum of 10 bit. d. Outputs shall be configurable so that 0-100% output commands can represent any portion of the output voltage/current range. e. Outputs shall be reversible so that an increasing output command yields a decreasing electrical signal. 8. In addition to local physical or internal I/O, each ASC shall support distributed or ‘bound’ I/O. This bound I/O can be used to allow the ASC to provide I/O data to another controller on the network or to allow another controller to provide data to the controlling ASC. 9. Control functions shall be executed within controllers using DDC algorithms. 10. Controllers shall be configured to use stored default values to ensure fail-safe operation. Default values shall be used when there is a failure of a connected input instrument or loss of communication of a global point value.

2.22 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE TOOL

A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) copy of the manufacturer’s application programming software tool. This software package shall be the same engineering tool that installation technicians / program engineers used to program, configure, and commission each DDC controller used on this project. If more than one software tool is required to achieve this functionality then the Contactor shall provide the necessary packages to accomplish the programming, configuration, and commissioning of each controller used on this project. The Contractor shall include all software licensing fees and costs. If the manufacturer’s software license agreement requires this license to be renewed the Contractor shall include the first fees in this scope of work. If end user training is required as part of the license agreement the Contractor shall provide a letter stating so and the associated costs and requirements as part of their submittal package.

2.23 END DEVICES

A. Binary Temperature Devices.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 56 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal- operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 55°F-85°F setpoint range, 2°F maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover. 2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal- actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 55°F-85°F setpoint range, 2°F maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover. 3. Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 20 ft long. Element shall sense temperature in each 1 ft section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

B. Temperature Sensors. 1. Type. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or thermistor. 2. Duct Sensors. Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as required to meet performance requirements. Averaging sensors shall be used where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. or where prone to stratification, length as required. 3. Immersion Sensors. Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well. Well pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in. Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities. 4. Space Sensors. Space sensors shall have setpoint adjustment and timed override pushbutton. 5. Differential Sensors. Provide matched sensors for differential temperature measurement. 6. Outside Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight where required and unshielded from sun where required by the drawings.

C. Humidity Sensors. 1. Duct or plenum sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-80%. 2. Duct or plenum sensors shall have a sampling chamber. 3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-95% RH and shall be suitable for ambient conditions of 40°F-170°F. 4. Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually 5. Humidity sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 3%.

D. Static-Pressure Transmitter: 1. Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected input, temperature compensated. 2. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. 3. Output: 4 to 20 mA. 4. Building or Plenum Static-Pressure Range: -0.25 to +0.25 inch wg. 5. Supply Air Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg.

E. Combination Temperature and Humidity Sensor 1. Interior or exterior wall mounted sensor which provides both temperature and humidity sensing capabilities in one unit. 2. Temperature sensor shall be thermistor or RTD. 3. Humidity sensor shall be impedence type. 4. Power shall be 15VDC – 24 VDC utilizing shielded wiring. 5. Unit shall have full range temperature compensation for humidity sensor. 6. Humidity sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 3%.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 57 ACPS BMS Master Spec

7. Temperature sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 1°F.

F. CO2 Sensors 1. Wall mounted or return air plenum mounted sensor utilizing non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) analyzer technology and a self-calibrating technology. 2. Unit shall have a total range of 0-2000 ppm. 3. Unit shall have an accuracy of 40 ppm total range or 8.5 % of measured value. 4. Unit shall have a repeatability of 30 ppm total range or 4.5 % of measured value. 5. Unit shall provide a 5-year calibration interval. 6. Unit shall have dual analog output with 0-10 vdc and 4-20 mA. 7. Unit shall be provided with LED indicating light for both power and error detection.

G. Flow Switches. Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential pressure type (air or water service) as shown. Switches shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum). 1. Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified. 2. Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

H. Relays. 1. Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. 2. Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100% from setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control panel.

I. Override Timers. 1. Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by application. Provide 0-12 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush mount timer on local control panel face.

J. Current Transmitters. 1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden. 2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized. 3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

K. Current Transformers. 1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material. 2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 58 ACPS BMS Master Spec

3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for existing wiring installation.

L. Voltage Transmitters. 1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA output with zero and span adjustment. 2. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac, and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden. 3. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.

M. Voltage Transformers. 1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have built-in fuse protection. 2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 40°F-130°F and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load. 3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.

N. Current Switches. 1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output requirements.

O. Pressure Transducers. 1. Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span. 2. Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span shall not damage transducer sensing elements. 3. Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of 150 psi. Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves. 4. Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of 150 psi. Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 300 psi. Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold. 5. Air differential pressure transducer shall be a direct reading device with a +/-1% accuracy of full scale. Unit shall provide a 4-20 mA output. Unit shall be Dwyer Series 616, with a range of 0-2 inches W.C.

P. Differential Pressure Switches. Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

2.24 ENCLOSURES

A. General Enclosure Requirements:

1. House each controller and associated control accessories in a single enclosure. Enclosure shall serve as central tie-in point for control devices such as switches, transmitters, transducers, power supplies and transformers. 2. Properly size enclosures to allow for access to internal devices and for ease of service. 3. Do not house more than one controller in a single enclosure.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 59 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Include enclosure door with key locking mechanism. Key locks alike for all enclosures and include one pair of keys per enclosure. 5. Supply each enclosure with a complete set of as-built schematics, tubing, and wiring diagrams and product literature located in a pocket on inside of door

B. Internal Arrangement:

1. Internal layout of enclosure shall group and protect pneumatic, electric, and electronic components associated with a controller, but not an integral part of controller. 2. Arrange layout to group similar products together. 3. Include a barrier between line-voltage and low-voltage electrical and electronic products. 4. Factory or shop install products, tubing, cabling and wiring complying with requirements and standards indicated. 5. Terminate field cable and wire using heavy-duty terminal blocks. 6. Include spare terminals, equal to not less than 10% percent of used terminals. 7. Include spade lugs for stranded cable and wire. 8. Install a maximum of two wires on each side of a terminal. 9. Include enclosure field power supply with a toggle-type switch located at entrance inside enclosure to disconnect power. 10. Include enclosure with a line-voltage nominal 20-A GFCI duplex receptacle for service and testing tools. Wire receptacle on hot side of enclosure disconnect switch and include with a 5-A circuit breaker. 11. Mount products within enclosure on removable internal panel(s). 12. Include products mounted in enclosures with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplates (black letters on a white background). The nameplates shall have at least 1/4-inch- (6- mm-) high lettering. 13. Route tubing cable and wire located inside enclosure within a raceway with a continuous removable cover. 14. Label each end of cable, wire and tubing in enclosure following an approved identification system that extends from field I/O connection and all intermediate connections throughout length to controller connection. 15. Size enclosure internal panel to include at least 15 percent spare area on face of panel.

2.25 VALVES AND DAMPERS

A. Electric Damper and Valve Actuators. 1. Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator damage throughout the actuator's rotation. 2. Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for all mechanical equipment in the penthouse, penthouse return air plenum, basement and sub-basement (dampers and valves) and safety applications (smoke control dampers) shall have an internal mechanical spring- return mechanism. 3. Signal and Range. Proportional actuators for modulating valve and damper service shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or a 0-20 mA input control signal and shall have a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA operating range. 4. Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring. 5. Analog Output: Actuators shall have an analog output to correlate to actual valve or damper position. 6. Manual Override Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when the actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 60 ACPS BMS Master Spec

manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 60 in.-lb torque capacity shall have a manual crank. 7. Mechanical: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. 8. Position Indicator: Actuators shall have a visible position indicator.

B. Damper Blade Limit Switches:

1. Sense positive open and/or closed position of the damper blades. 2. NEMA 250, Type 13, oil-tight construction. 3. Arrange for the mounting application. 4. Additional waterproof enclosure when required by its environment. 5. Arrange to prevent "over-center" operation.

C. Outdoor Air, Return Air, and Exhaust Air Control Motorized Dampers. 1. Type. Damper shall be UL listed and/or AMCA-rated for the intended service. Control dampers shall have linear flow characteristics and shall be parallel- or opposed-blade type as specified below or as scheduled on drawings. a. Outdoor and return air mixing dampers (not provided as a component of factory constructed air Handling Unit – see Section 15720 – Air Handling Units) shall be parallel-blade and shall direct airstreams toward each other. b. Two-position shutoff dampers used for exhaust air control shall be parallel- or opposed-blade with blade and side seals. 2. Frame. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized steel channel or 1/8 in. extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing. 3. Blades. Damper blades shall not exceed 8 in. in width or 48 in. in length. Blades shall be suitable for medium velocity 2000 fpm performance. Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge. 4. Shaft Bearings. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application, oil impregnated sintered bronze, or better. 5. Seals. Blade edges and frame top and bottom shall have replaceable seals of butyl rubber or neoprene. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel. Blade seals shall leak no more than 10 cfm per ft2 at 4 in. w.g. differential pressure. Blades shall be airfoil type suitable for wide-open face velocity of 1500 fpm. 6. Sections. Damper sections shall not exceed 48 in. - 60 in. Each section shall have at least one damper actuator. 7. Linkages. Dampers shall have exposed linkages. 8. Damper Fail Position. Return air dampers shall fail normally open, Outdoor air dampers shall fail normally closed, exhaust air dampers shall fail normally closed.

D. Round Space/Zone Control Dampers 1. Fabrication: Dampers shall be of the butterfly type consisting of circular blade mounted to a shaft. Inside frame surface shall be clean and smooth with no blade stops or similar inward projections. Frame shall include rolled stiffener beads to allow easy sealing to spiral ductwork joints. Frames shall have no holes or openings to allow air through damper frame. 2. Size as scheduled or as indicated. 3. Type: Round. 4. Frame: 20 gage galvanized steel. 5. Blade: Two layers of galvanized steel; 14 gage equivalent thickness. 6. Axle: 1/2 inch diameter plated steel with stainless steel sleeve bearing pressed into frame.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 61 ACPS BMS Master Spec

7. Finish: a. Mill galvanized steel frame. b. Mill finished blades. 8. Blade Seals: Vinyl foam seals sandwiched between two blades.

E. Rectangular Space/Zone Control Dampers 1. Size as scheduled or as indicated. 2. Frame: 18 gauge galvanized, mechanically joined. 3. Blades: 18 gauge galvanized steel, 3 Inches nominal width. 4. Linkage: Plastic gears. 5. Blade Pin: 1/2 inch round steel, zinc plated. 6. Bearings: None. 7. Side Seals: None. 8. Blade Seals: None.

F. Control Valves. 1. Factory fabricated of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sizing (Water): a. Two-Position: Line size or size using a pressure differential of 1 psi. b. Two-Way Modulating: 5 psid or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than 5 psid. 3. The control valve assembly shall be provided and delivered from a single manufacturer as a complete assembly. 4. The manufacturer shall warrant all components for a period of 2 years from the date of production, with the first two years unconditional

G. Characterized Control Valves: 1. 2” and Smaller: Nickel-plated forged brass body rated at no less than 400 psi, stainless steel ball and blowout proof stem, female NPT end fittings, with a dual EPDM O-ring packing design, fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats, and a Machined brass or stainless steel flow characterizing disc. 2. Valve assemblies shall be maintenance free. 3. Six-way characterized control valves for changeover applications on combination heating/cooling chilled beams and other four pipe systems shall have the following characteristics: a. NPS ½”, ¾”and 1”: Nickel plated forged brass body rated at no less than 600 psi, dual stainless steel ball and blowout proof stems, and female NPT end fittings. Each three-way portion of the 6-way valve body shall have EPDM O-Ring packing design, Teflon PTFE seats, and a machined brass characterizing disc. b. The six-way control valve shall be controlled by a rotary actuator for managing two media in a switching application with an equal percentage flow characteristic. The valve shall be closed to flow at mid-rotation.

H. Butterfly Valves – Resilient Seat: 1. NPS 2 to 12: Valve body shall meet ANSI Class 125/150 flange standards, be full lugged design, 200 psig ductile iron body with a 304 stainless steel disc, EPDM seat with an extended neck. Disc-to-stem connection shall utilize an internal spline. The shaft shall be supported at four locations by RPTFE bushings. A coated disc shell is not acceptable. 2. NPS 14 and Larger: : Valve body shall meet ANSI Class 125/150 flange standards, be full lugged design, 150 psig ductile iron body with a 304 stainless steel disc, EPDM seat

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 62 ACPS BMS Master Spec

with an extended neck. Disc-to-stem connection shall utilize an internal spline. The shaft shall be supported at four locations by RPTFE bushings. A coated disc shell is not acceptable. A coated disc shell is not acceptable. 3. Sizing: Two-Position (on/off) butterfly valves shall be sized using the 900 Cv rating. Modulating butterfly valves shall be sized using the 600 Cv rating. 4. Flow Characteristics: Modified equal percentage, unidirectional dead end service. 5. Close-Off Pressure Rating: Bubble-tight shutoff (no leakage). 6. The combination of two 2-way butterfly valves in a tee configuration cross-linked to ensure proper flow orientation shall be permitted. The tee shall be constructed of cast iron/stainless steel.

I. Fail Position. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows unless otherwise specified. 1. Water zone valves: normally open. 2. Heating coils in air handlers: normally open. 3. Chilled water control valves: normally closed. 4. Other applications: as scheduled or as required by sequences of operation.

2.26 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) UNITS FOR WORKSTATIONS

A. 250 through 1000 VA: 1. UPS units shall provide continuous, regulated output power without using their batteries during brown-out, surge, and spike conditions. 2. Load served shall not exceed 75 percent of UPS rated capacity, including power factor of connected loads. a. Larger-capacity units shall be provided for systems with larger connected loads. b. UPS shall provide seven minutes of battery power. 3. Performance: a. Input Voltage: Single phase, 120- or 230-V ac, compatible with field power source. b. Load Power Factor Range (Crest Factor): 0.65 to 1.0. c. Output Voltage: 101- to 132-V ac, while input voltage varies between 89 and 152- V ac. d. On Battery Output Voltage: Sine wave. e. Inverter overload capacity shall be minimum 150 percent for 30 seconds. f. Recharge time shall be a maximum of six hours to 90 percent capacity after full discharge to cutoff. g. Transfer Time: 6 ms. h. Surge Voltage Withstand Capacity: IEEE C62.41, Categories A and B; 6 kV/200 and 500 A; 100-kHz ringwave. 4. UPS shall be automatic during fault or overload conditions. 5. Unit with integral line-interactive, power condition topology to eliminate all power contaminants. 6. Include front panel with power switch and visual indication of power, battery, fault and temperature. 7. Unit shall include an audible alarm of faults and front panel silence feature. 8. Unit with four NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles. 9. UPS shall include dry contacts (digital output points) for low battery condition and battery-on (primary utility power failure) and connect the points to the DDC system.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 63 ACPS BMS Master Spec

10. Batteries shall be sealed lead-acid type and be maintenance free. Battery replacement shall be front accessible by user without dropping load. 11. Include tower models installed in ventilated cabinets to the particular installation location.

2.27 PIPING AND TUBING

A. Pneumatic, and Pressure Instrument Signal Air, Tubing and Piping:

1. Products in this paragraph are intended for use with the following:

a. Main air and signal air to pneumatically controlled instruments, actuators and other control devices and accessories. b. Signal air between pressure instruments, such as sensors, switches, transmitters, controllers and accessories.

2. Copper Tubing:

a. Seamless phosphor deoxidized copper, soft annealed or drawn tempered, with chemical and physical properties according to ASTM B 75. b. Performance, dimensions, weight and tolerance according to ASTM B 280. c. Diameter, as required by application, not less than nominal 0.25 inch d. Wall thickness, as required by the application, but not less than 0.030 inch

3. Polyethylene Tubing:

a. Fire-resistant black virgin polyethylene according to ASTM D 1248, Type 1, Class C and Grade 5. b. Tubing shall comply with stress crack test according to ASTM D 1693. c. Diameter, as required by application, of not less than nominal 0.25 inch

B. Connect instruments to tubing with connectors having compression connector on one end and IPS or NPT thread on other end.

2.28 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V.

1. Wire size shall be at least No. 18AWG. Final wiring s1ze shall be determined by system length of run and ampacity requirements 2. Conductor shall be 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with 2- to 2.5-inch lay. 3. Conductor insulation shall be 600 V, Type THWN or Type THHN, and 90 deg C according to UL 83. 4. Conductor colors shall be black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground). 5. Furnish wire on spools.

B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 22 AWG. 2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 64 ACPS BMS Master Spec

3. Conductor insulation shall have a Type THHN/THWN or Type TFN rating. 4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 0.35/0.5-mil aluminum/Mylar tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire. 5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 600-V, 90-deg C rating and shall be Type TC cable. 6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white. 7. Furnish wire on spools.

C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 22 AWG. 2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper stranding with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay. 3. Conductor insulation shall have a nominal 15-mil thickness, constructed from flame- retardant PVC. 4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 1.35-mil aluminum/polymer tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire. 5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 300-V, 105-deg C rating and shall be Type PLTC cable. 6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white. 7. Furnish wire on spools.

D. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for network being installed.

1. Cable shall be balanced twisted pair.

a. Cable shall be plenum rated. b. Cable shall have a unique color that is different from other cables used on Project.

2.29 RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for raceways for balanced twisted pair cables and optical fiber cables.

2.31 IDENTIFICATION

A. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices: 1. Self-adhesive label bearing unique identification. a. Include instruments with unique identification identified by equipment being controlled or monitored, followed by point identification. 2. Letter size shall be Minimum of 0.5 inch high 3. Legend shall consist of white lettering on black background. 4. Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign shall be engraved phenolic consisting of three layers of rigid laminate. Top and bottom layers are color-coded black with contrasting

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 65 ACPS BMS Master Spec

white center exposed by engraving through outer layer and shall be fastened with drive pins. 5. Instruments, control devices and actuators with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require additional identification.

B. Raceway and Boxes:

1. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2. Paint cover plates on junction boxes and conduit same color as the tape banding for conduits. After painting, label cover plate "HVAC Controls," using an engraved phenolic tag.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.00 EXAMINATION

A. Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Architect or Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work.

B. Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work.

C. Examine drawings and specifications for work of others. Report inadequate headroom or space conditions or other discrepancies to Engineer and obtain written instructions for changes necessary to accommodate Section 23 09 23 work with work of others. Controls Contractor shall perform at his expense necessary changes in specified work caused by failure or neglect to report discrepancies.

3.01 PROTECTION

D. Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to material caused by Contractor's work or employees.

E. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.02 COORDINATION

F. Commissioning Authority 1. Assist in coordinating the work of the Commissioning Authority (engaged by the owner) in verifying the performance of the BMCS. Refer to Specification Section – HVAC Commissioning.

G. Site.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 66 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. Assist in coordinating space conditions to accommodate the work of each trade where work will be installed near or will interfere with work of other trades. If installation without coordination causes interference with work of other trades, Contractor shall correct conditions without extra charge. 2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.

H. Test and Balance Sub Contractor. 1. Provide Test and Balance Contractor a single set of necessary tools to interface to control system for testing and balancing. 2. Train Test and Balance Contractor to use control system interface tools. 3. Test and Balance Contractor shall return tools undamaged and in working condition at completion of testing and balancing.

I. Life Safety. 1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are provided under Division 26. Interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for shutdown as required by the Sequences of Operation. 2. Smoke dampers and actuators required for duct smoke isolation are provided under Division 23. Interlock smoke dampers to air handlers as required by the Sequences of Operation.

J. Coordination with Other Controls. Integrate with and coordinate controls and control devices furnished or installed by others as follows. 1. Communication media and equipment shall be provided as specified in Section 23 09 23 Article 2.2 (Communication). 2. Each supplier of a controls product shall configure, program, start up, and test that product to meet the sequences of operation regardless of where within the contract documents those products are described. 3. Coordinate and resolve incompatibility issues that arise between control products provided under this section and those provided under other sections or divisions of this specification. 4. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for integration of control products provided by multiple suppliers regardless of where integration is described within the contract documents.

3.03 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to walls wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment vibration isolation.

C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code (NEC) Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.

D. Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 67 ACPS BMS Master Spec

E. Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards and local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.6 (Codes and Standards).

B. Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality.

C. Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.05 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Wiring. Interconnecting control wiring shall be removed and shall become Contractor's property unless specifically noted or shown to be reused. 1. Local Control Panels. Remove and deliver existing control panels to Owner.

B. Room Thermostats. Remove and deliver existing room thermostats to Owner unless otherwise noted. Patch and finish holes and marks left by removal to match existing walls.

C. Electronic Sensors and Transmitters. Remove and deliver existing sensors and transmitters to Owner.

D. Controllers and Auxiliary Electronic Devices. Remove and deliver existing controllers and auxiliary electronic devices to Owner.

E. Damper Actuators, Linkages, and Appurtenances: Remove and deliver existing damper actuators, linkages and appurtenances to Owner.

F. Control Valves. Replace existing control valves with new. Deliver removed control valves to Owner.

G. Existing System Operating Schedule. Existing mechanical system may be disabled during this work.

H. Maintain fan scheduling using existing or temporary time clocks or control systems throughout the control system installation.

I. Modify existing starter control circuits if necessary to provide hand-off-auto control of each controlled starter. Furnish new starters or starter control packages as required.

3.06 WIRING

A. Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical codes, Division 26, and manufacturer's recommendations. Where the requirements of Section 23 09 23 differ from Division 26, Section 23 09 23 shall take precedence.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 68 ACPS BMS Master Spec

B. NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway as specified by NEC and Division 26.

C. Low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Subfuse low-voltage power circuits as required to meet Class 2 current limit.

D. NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires not in raceway but in concealed and accessible locations such as return air plenums shall be UL listed for the intended application.

E. Install wiring in raceway where subject to mechanical damage and at levels below 3 m (10ft) in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms.

F. Install Class 1 and Class 2 wiring in separate raceways. Boxes and panels containing high- voltage wiring and equipment shall not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two through relays and transformers.

G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

H. Run exposed Class 2 wiring parallel to a surface or perpendicular to it and tie neatly at 3 m (10 ft) intervals.

I. Use structural members to support or anchor plenum cables without raceway. Do not use ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems to support or anchor cables.

J. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes shall not be hung on or attached to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

K. Size raceway and select wire size and type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NEC requirements.

L. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger.

M. Use color-coded conductors throughout.

N. Locate control and status relays in designated enclosures only. Do not install control and status relays in packaged equipment control panel enclosures containing Class 1 starters.

O. Conceal raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Maintain minimum clearance of 15 cm (6 in.) between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as steam pipes or flues.

P. Adhere to requirements in Division 26 where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

Q. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and enclosure openings. Seal top ends of vertical raceways.

R. Terminate control and interlock wiring related to the work of this section. Maintain at the job site updated (as-built) wiring diagrams that identify terminations.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 69 ACPS BMS Master Spec

S. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in length and shall be supported at each end. Do not use flexible metal raceway less than ½ in. electrical trade size. Use liquid-tight flexible metal raceways in areas exposed to moisture including chiller and boiler rooms.

T. Install raceway rigidly, support adequately, ream at both ends, and leave clean and free of obstructions. Join raceway sections with couplings and according to code. Make terminations in boxes with fittings. Make terminations not in boxes with bushings.

3.07 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring and shall comply with Article 3.7 (Wiring).

B. Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2 wiring. Plenum rated cabling may be installed in concealed, accessible locations

C. During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius specified by the cable manufacturer.

D. Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for each cable.

E. Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable and ground where a cable enters or exits a building.

F. Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.

G. Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.

H. Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."

3.08 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.

C. Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing.

D. Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor readings from being affected by air transmitted from other areas.

E. Use averaging sensors in mixing plenums. Install averaging sensors in a serpentine manner vertically across duct. Support each bend with a capillary clip.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 70 ACPS BMS Master Spec

F. Install mixing plenum low-limit sensors in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct and/or air handling unit. Support each bend with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each 1 m2 (1 ft2) of coil area.

G. Install pipe-mounted temperature sensors in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with heat- conducting fluid in thermal wells. Sensors shall be installed to the mid-point of the pipe diameter.

3.09 DIFFERENTIAL AIR STATIC PRESSURE.

A. Supply Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Make pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Return Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Make pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Building Static Pressure. Pipe pressure sensor's low-pressure port to the static pressure port located on the outside of the building through a high-volume accumulator. Pipe high-pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.

D. Piping to pressure transducer pressure ports shall contain a capped test port adjacent to transducer.

E. Pressure transducers shall be located in control panels, not on monitored equipment or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a vibration-free location accessible for service without use of ladders or special equipment.

F. Mount gauge tees adjacent to air and water differential pressure taps. Install shut-off valves before tee for water gauges.

G. Smoke detectors, freezestats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall be hard- wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow BMCS software to monitor safety switch status.

3.10 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

B. Adjust flow switch according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.11 ACTUATORS

A. General. Mount actuators and adapters according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Electric and Electronic Damper Actuators. Mount actuators directly on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown as a linkage installation. Link actuators according to manufacturer's recommendations.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 71 ACPS BMS Master Spec

C. For low-leakage dampers with seals, mount actuator with a minimum 5° travel available for damper seal tightening.

D. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, then tighten linkage.

E. Check operation of damper-actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

F. Provide necessary mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.

G. Valve Actuators. Connect actuators to valves with adapters approved by actuator manufacturer for specific valve body type.

3.12 CONTROLLERS

A. Provide a separate controller for each HVAC system. A DDC controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with the system are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used for control loop reset, such as outside air or space temperature, are exempt from this requirement.

B. Future use of spare capacity as previously indicated shall only require providing the field device, field wiring, point database definition, and custom programming. No additional controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.

3.13 PROGRAMMING

A. Point Naming. 1. System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. Use the Project Haystack standard point naming convention: shall be followed for all equipment to aid in consistent tagging and for use in data analysis as outlined in section 2.17G.

B. Software Programming 1. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences of operation provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system, but not specified in this document, also shall be provided by the contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequences of operation. Use the appropriate technique based on the following programming types: a. Text-based 1) Must provide actions for all possible situations 2) Must be modular and structured 3) Must be commented b. Graphic-based 1) Must provide actions for all possible situations 2) Must be documented c. Parameter-based 1) Must provide actions for all possible situations

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 72 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2) Must be documented

C. Operator Interface 1. Standard graphics—Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of the building. This includes each chilled water system, hot water system, chiller, boiler, air handler, and all terminal equipment. Point information on the graphic displays shall dynamically update. Show on each graphic all input and output points for the system. Also show relevant calculated points such as setpoints. 2. Show terminal equipment information on a graphic summary table. Provide dynamic information for each point shown. 3. The contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot all operator interface software and its functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third-party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface

3.14 BMS CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Start-up Testing. Complete startup testing to verify operational control system before notifying Owner of system demonstration. Provide Owner and Commissioning Authority with schedule for startup testing.

B. The contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for service of all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.

C. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

D. Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each device according to manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators, modulating actuators, control valves and dampers, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal positions are correct.

F. Verify that analog output devices such as actuators are functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.

G. Prepare and submit a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated.

H. Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and observe each operational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune PID loops and each control routine that requires tuning.

I. Alarms and Interlocks. 1. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 73 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail in the proper direction. 3. Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of variable and interlock action.

3.15 BMS SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Demonstration. 1. Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests in the presence of the Owner, the Engineer and the Commissioning Authority to demonstrate system operation and compliance with specification after and in addition to tests specified in Article 3.16 (BMS Checkout and Testing). Provide Engineer with log documenting completion of startup tests.

B. Owner, Engineer and Commissioning Authority will be present to observe and review system demonstration. Provide at least 10 days written notification before system demonstration begins.

C. Provide trend analysis performed under section 3.16 BMS Checkout and Testing at least 5 days prior to demonstration testing.

D. Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved under Section 23 09 23 Article 1.8 (Submittals). Complete approved checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration.

E. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation. Demonstrate calibration and response of any input and output points requested by the Engineer or Commissioning Authority. Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system operation.

F. Demonstrate compliance with Section 23 09 23 Part 1 (System Performance).

G. Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode.

H. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.

I. Demonstrate each of the following. 1. DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC loop's response to a setpoint change representing an actuator position change of at least 25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show setpoint, actuator position, and controlled variable values. Engineer will require further tuning of each loop that displays unreasonably under- or over-damped control. 2. Building fire alarm system interface. 3. Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall be developed for each log and shall cover three 48-hour periods and shall have a sample frequency not less than 10 minutes or as specified on its points list. Logs shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for use in other software programs as specified in Section 23 09 23 Article 2.3 Paragraph E.11 (Trend Configuration).

J. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete each test.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 74 ACPS BMS Master Spec

K. Acceptance.

L. After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Commissioning Authority/Owner, the Commissioning Authority/Owner will accept control system as meeting completion requirements. Commissioning Authority/Owner may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Commissioning Authority/Owner will provide written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of warranty.

M. System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are submitted and approved as required in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.10 (Submittals).

3.16 CLEANING

A. Clean debris resulting from work daily. Remove packaging material as soon as its contents have been removed. Collect waste, place in designated location.

B. On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas free from dust, dirt, and debris.

C. On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint damage. Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace deformed cabinets and enclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent areas.

3.17 TRAINING

D. Provide training for a designated staff of Owner's representatives in accordance with the requirements of this section and Specification Section – Demonstration and Training. Training shall be provided via a combination of self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training and classroom training.

E. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet: 1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone number and e-mail address. 2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees listed and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees. 3. Preprinted sign-in sheet shall include training session number, date and time, instructor name, phone number and e-mail address, and brief description of content to be covered during session. List attendees with columns for name, phone number, e-mail address and a column for attendee signature or initials. 4. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial in applicable location. 5. At end of each training day, send Owner an e-mail with an attachment of scanned copy (PDF) of circulated sign-in sheet for each session.

F. Attendee Training Manuals: 1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual presentations.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 75 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals. 3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy materials.

G. Training Outline: 1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling training.

H. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and synopses for each lesson planned

I. Minimum training requirements shall include: 1. Building Operations Staff: Training for three (3) individuals over a 1-day training class. Training shall cover basic system operations, minor programming/setpoint changes, trending/reporting and alarms. 2. Advanced Operators Building Management Staff: Training for three (3) individuals over a 4-day training class for high schools or a 2-day training class for elementary and middle schools.. Training shall include a comprehensive review all system operations, programming, software setpoint creation and changes, trending/reporting and alarms. Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives. a. Proficiently operate system b. Understand control system architecture and configuration c. Understand DDC system components d. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines (algorithms) e. Operate workstation and peripherals f. Log on and off system g. Access graphics, point reports, and logs h. Adjust/change system setpoints, time schedules, holiday schedules i. Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics, trend graphs, and other system tools j. Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual k. Understand job layout and location of control components l. Access data from DDC controllers m. Operate portable operator's terminals n. Create and change system graphics o. Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions p. Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend graphs q. Configure and run reports r. Add, remove, and modify system's physical points s. Create, modify, and delete application programming t. Add operator interface stations u. Add a new controller to system v. Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller w. Configure and calibrate I/O points x. Maintain software and prepare backups y. Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 76 ACPS BMS Master Spec

z. Add new users and understand password security procedures

END OF SECTION

PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

General:

A. The management and control system functionality specified in a sequence of operation, specified herein, in the schedule of point descriptions, or shown on the drawings shall be supplied in full without exception. The BAS contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary equipment, hardware, software, programming, and tuning to achieve the specified sequences of operation. However, the provided control sequences and BAS functions including alarms, monitoring, reset functions, and operational sequences shall not necessarily be limited to the specified point schedules and written sequences of operation if additional functions are needed for the specified operation. It shall be the responsibility of the BAS Contractor to review the drawings and applicable Specifications to determine the complete Project requirements. Any deviations from these Contract Documents shall be submitted in written form for review by the Owner's Representative. Complete drawings and itemizations of deviations shall be included with the shop drawings and submittals.

1. Provide the operating sequence described in detail in the following paragraphs. The sequence shall not be deviated from unless a proposed change is submitted with justifying reasons approved by ACPS and a Change Order is issued. Inability of the proposed control system logic to produce the desired sequence is not grounds for approval of a change. Furnish adequate programming capability for the sequence outlined below.

2. Equipment Response Time – Operating program shall be arranged so that system components such as valve, damper and VAV box operators shall require no more than 12 minutes elapse time to complete a totally closed to totally open position cycle if space conditions are such that continued movement in one direction is necessary.

3. System operation printouts shall be accurate and sufficiently detailed to establish that the specified sequence is being affected.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 77 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Control shall be direct digital Owner programmable microprocessor located in the field, unless otherwise specified

5. Equipment listed in the following Input/Output Summaries shall have the necessary electric and electronic equipment, material and supplies added to accomplish the indicated actions. Present time clock functions shall be done by the IFID.

6. Provide all equipment listed in the following input/output summaries with individual times override switches located in the boiler room or adjacent equipment room.

7. All points indicated in the Input/Output summaries shall be displayed on the proper computer graphic display screen.

8. Scheduling Terminology: When control zones are scheduled throughout the day, the following defines the terminology used:

a) Day or Occupied Period: period of time when the building is in use and occupied. This period is defined as follows:

Elementary Schools – 6:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday – Friday

Exclude all County holidays. Systems shall be fully operational throughout this period and ventilation air shall be continuously introduced.

b) Night or Unoccupied period: period of time when the building or zone is not in use and unoccupied. Ventilation air shall not be introduced. Systems shall be off except to maintain a night setting.

c) Occupancy During Construction: New equipment shall run during the period of time when spaces are turned over. This period is defined as follows:

All Schools – 6:00 a.m. to 12:00 p.m. Monday – Saturday

Systems shall be fully operational throughout this period and ventilation air shall be continuously introduced.

9. Where any sequence or occupancy schedule calls for more than one motorized unit to start simultaneously, the BAS start commands shall be staggered by 5 second (adj.) intervals to minimize inrush current.

10. Alarm messages specified throughout the sequences are assigned to discrete priority levels. Priority levels dictate the handling and destination of alarm reports, and are defined in Section 3.07.E.

11. All setpoints, deadbands, PID gains, throttling ranges, requests etc. shall be adjustable and shall be easily modifiable, with the proper password

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 78 ACPS BMS Master Spec

level, from the operator interface or via a function block menu. For all setpoints, deadbands, throttling ranges, requests etc., it is unacceptable to have to modify programming statements to change the setpoint.

12. Each analog output shall include, as an integral function, a ramp control algorithm that limits the rate of change of an output on an increase in value or a decrease in value. These values shall be adjustable from the graphic screen.

13. Where reset action is specified in a sequence of operation, but a reset schedule is not indicated on the drawings, one of the following methods shall be employed:

a. Contractor shall determine a proportional (P) fixed reset schedule, which shall result in stable operation and shall maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance. Reset range maximum and minimum values shall limit the setpoint range.

b. A floating reset (utilizing integral (I)) algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary variable setpoint (setpoint of control loop being reset) on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable setpoint. The recalculation time and reset increment shall be chosen to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance. Reset range maximum and minimum values shall limit the setpoint range.

c. Primary variable shall control the devices directly using a PID feedback control loop without resetting the secondary variable. However, the control devices shall still modulate as necessary to maintain upper and lower limits on the secondary variable. Proportional band, integral gain, and derivative term shall be selected to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable tolerance while minimizing overshoot and setting time. Reset range maximum and minimum values shall limit the setpoint range. Contractor shall gain prior approval for implementing this method of reset.

14. A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary variable (e.g., supply air temperature or duct pressure) setpoint on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable (e.g. space temperature) setpoint. The reset increment shall be determined by the quantity of “need heat” or “need cool” requests from individual ASC’s. An ASC’s “need heat” virtual point shall activate whenever the zone’s space temperature falls below the currently applicable (occupied or unoccupied) heating setpoint minus a fixed value that is adjustable. An ASC’s “need cool” virtual point shall activate whenever the zone’s space temperature rises above the currently applicable (occupied, unoccupied, or economy) cooling setpoint plus a fixed value that is adjustable. The recalculation time and reset increment shall be chosen to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance while

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 79 ACPS BMS Master Spec

minimizing overshoot and setting time. Reset range maximum and minimum values shall limit the setpoint range.

15. Where a supply air temperature, duct pressure, or differential water pressure setpoint is specified to be reset by valve or damper position of the zone or zones calling for the most cooling/heating, the following method shall be employed:

a. A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary variable (e.g., supply air temperature, pipe or duct pressure) setpoint on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable (e.g. cooling valve, heating valve, damper position) setpoint of 85% open. The reset increment shall be calculated based on the average position of the quantity of the worst (most open valve/damper) zone(s) as specified. The recalculation time, reset increment and control device position influence shall be chosen to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance while minimizing overshoot and setting time. The BAS analog output value shall be acceptable as indicating the position of the control device.

b. Rather than continuously calculating the average of the quantity of worst valve/damper positions, a method similar to the one described above may be employed whereby the “need heat” or “need cool” virtual point shall increment by one unit each time a zone’s valve/damper position rises to greater than 95%. The quantity of “need heat” or “need cool” points shall then be the basis for reset.

16. Where “prove operation” of a device (generally controlled by a digital output) is indicated in the sequence, it shall require that the BAS shall, after an adjustable time delay after the device is commanded to operate (feedback delay), confirm that the operational via the status input. If the status point does not confirm operation after the time delay or thereafter for an adjustable time delay (debounce delay) while the device is commanded to run, an alarm shall be enunciated audibly and via an alarm message at the operator interface and print at the alarm printers. A descriptive message shall be attached to the alarm message indicating the nature of the alarm and actions to be taken. Contractor shall provide messages to meet this intent.

17. Program adjustable maximum rates of change for increasing and decreasing output from the following analog output points:

a) Speed control of variable speed drives (acceleration 0 to 100 percent speed in 30 seconds, deceleration 100 to 0 percent speed in 10 seconds, unless noted otherwise)

b) Chiller supply water setpoint reset (limit to ±1°F per 5 minutes unless noted otherwise)

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 80 ACPS BMS Master Spec

c) Chiller demand limit to 10% per minute unless noted otherwise)

18. Wherever a value is indicated to be dependent on another value (i.e.: setpoint plus 5°F) BAS shall use that equation to determine the value. Providing a virtual point that the operator must set is unacceptable. In this case, three virtual points shall be provided: One to store the parameter (5°F); one to store the setpoint; and one to store the value that is the result of the equation.

19. Sequenced Heating and Cooling: BAS shall control the heating and cooling coils, mechanical cooling and heating and air side economizer as detailed for the particular equipment. Program logic shall directly prohibit the mechanical cooling and heating to be energized as well as the heating source to be energized and economizer damper to be open (or above minimum) simultaneously unless specifically noted. This does not apply to cooling and reheat valves that are used simultaneously for dehumidification.

20. Mixed Air Low Override: BAS shall override the signal to the OA damper via a proportional only loop to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 45°F (adj.) (loop shall output 0% at 45°F which shall be passed to the output via a software programmed low selector).

21. Freeze Safety: Upon operation of a freeze stat, unit shall be de-energized with the exception of the heating loops. Supply and return fans, heating valve, O/A damper and chilled water valve shall be de-energized via hardwired interlock. BAS shall enunciate appropriate alarms which shall initiate “fan failure” alarms.

22. Smoke Safety: Upon indication of smoke by a smoke detector, the mechanical unit shall be de-energized by a hardwired interlock. OA dampers cooling valve and heating valve shall spring to the failsafe position.

23. Abbreviations used in the input/output summaries and sequences:

1. ACWC - AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER

2. AHU - AIR HANDLING UNIT (INCLUDES CONSTANT

VOLUME AND VARIABLE VOLUME)

3. CEF - CABINET OR CEILING EXHAUST FAN

4. CHW - CHILLED WATER

5. CONF - CONFIRMATION

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 81 ACPS BMS Master Spec

6. C.R. - CLASSROOM

7. CT - COOLING TOWER

8. CU - CONDENSING UNIT

9. CUH - CABINET UNIT HEATER

10. CZ - CONTROL ZONE

11. FTR - FIN TUBE RADIATOR

12. FCU - FAN COIL UNIT

13. HW - HOT WATER

14. IFID - INTELLIGENT FIELD INTERFACE DEVICE

15. MAU - MAKE-UP AIR UNIT

16. MZU - MULTI-ZONE UNIT

17. O.A. - OUTSIDE AIR

18. PBOR - PUSHBUTTON OVERRIDE

19. PRV - POWER ROOF VENTILATORS

20. RAHU - ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT

21. RTU -ROOFTOP UNIT (INCLUDES CONSTANT

VOLUME AND VARIABLE VOLUME)

22. RWC - REMOTE HOT WATER COIL

23 SC - SELF-CONTAINED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

24. TEMP - TEMPERATURE

25. TW - TOWER WATER

26. TWU - THRU-WALL UNIT

27. UH - UNIT HEATER

28. UV - UNIT VENTILATOR

29. UVS - UTILITY VENT SET

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 82 ACPS BMS Master Spec

30. VAVTU -VAV TERMINAL UNITVRF/VRV- VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW/VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME

31. WCWC - W3ATER COOLED WATER CHILLER

32. ERU - ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT

33. AHS - AIR HANDLING SYSTEM

34. HEX - HEAT EXCHANGER

35. VAL - VALANCE

36. VFD - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

37. HRW - HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL

38. SF - SUPPLY FAN

39. EF - EXHAUST FAN

40. FZ STAT - FREEZESTAT

41. ECON - ECONOMIZER

42. RAT - RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE

43. OAT - OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

44. DAT - DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE

45. BCU - BLOWER COIL UNIT

46. DPS - DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR

Notes: (1) Provide the required number of inputs and outputs in each classroom or space to comply with the sequence of operations specified in Part 3, Execution, Paragraph 3.05 whether or not they are shown in the summaries.

(2) When equipment is supplied and wired by the factory as a complete product, the factory points shall be acceptable for monitoring and control provided that all aspects of this specification and sequences are met.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 83 ACPS BMS Master Spec

ACTION SPACE/EQUIP LOCATION RESPONSE REMARKS ANALOG INPUTS

1. NORTH WALL O. A. TEMP/HUMIDITY NOTE #5 2. BOILER ROOM HW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE NOTE #1 3. BOILER ROOM HW RETURN TEMPERATURE NOTE #1, 13 4. BOILER HW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE NOTE #3 5. BOILER ROOM CHW TEMPERATURE NOTE #1,17 SUPPLY 6. BOILER ROOM CHW TEMPERATURE NOTE #1,17 RETURN

7. BOILER ROOM TW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE NOTE #1,3 8. BOILER ROOM TW RETURN TEMPERATURE NOTE #1,3 9. ZONE TEMP. 1 EACH TEMPERATURE NOTE #2 ROOM 10. ZONE TEMP. 1 EACH TEMP. ADJUST NOTE #2 ROOM 11. MAU/ERU ON WALL HUMIDITY NOTE #3 12. RTU/AHU/MAU/ SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE NOTE #3,7 MZU/UV/FCU/ ERU BCU/VAV TERMINAL UNIT 13. RTU/AHU/MZU RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE NOTE #3

14. RTU/AHU/MZU MIXED AIR TEMPERATURE NOTE #3

15. AHU/RTU SUPPLY AIR STATIC PRESS NOTE #3 16. RTU/AHU/MAU/ FAN FLOW CONF. NOTE #3 MZU/ ERU STARTER 17. BOILER ROOM PUMPS FLOW CONF. NOTE #4 18. CT FAN FLOW CONF. NOTE #3 STARTER

20. GYM/CAFETERIA ON WALL CO2 CONC. NOTE #6

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 84 ACPS BMS Master Spec

AUDITORIUM 21. AHU/ RTU OUTSIDE FLOW NOTE #3 AIR 22. COMM ROOM ON WALL TEMPERATURE NOTE #8 23. WALK-IN REFR ON WALL TEMP/ALARM NOTE #9,10 24. WALK-IN-FREEZER ON WALL TEMP/ALARM NOTE#9,11 25. CT BASIN TOWER TEMP/ALARM NOTE#3,16 BASIN 26. MAU/ERU SUPPLY AIR HUMIDITY NOTE#3 27. AHU/ERU EXHAUST TEMP. NOTE#3 AIR 28. AHU/ERU HRW TEMP. NOTE#3 DISCHARGE 29. AT IFID SPARES (5% OF TOTAL POINTS)

30. HW / CHW SYSTEM PIPING DIFF PRESS NOTE#16 SYSTEM 31. VAV TERMINAL UNIT IN BOX CFM NOTE#3

Notes: 1. boiler rm. or mechanical room see plans. 2. one per classroom or space. 3. one per unit. 4. transducer – one per pump. 5. mount on shaded wall with shield. 6. readout in parts per million with 4-20 ma signal. 7. mzu’s shall have one per each zone. 8. space temperature monitor 9. annunciate a level 1 alarm if temperature rises above 40°f (adj.) for more than 10 minutes (adj.). 10. annunciate a level 1 alarm if temperature rises above 15°f (adj.) for more than 30 minutes (adj.). 11. provide the required number of inputs and outputs in each classroom or space to comply with the sequence of operation specified in part 3, execution, paragraph 3.04. 12. all relays with the exceptions of boilers, hot water pumps and heat trace, shall be wired normally open. 13. locate on system side of 3-way valve. 14. locate sensor 2/3 distance of longest duct run. 15. annunciate a level one alarm if basin temperature drops below 32deg f for more than fifteen minutes. 16. as shown on drawings 17. provide for primary system, secondary system and all zones. 18. one per fan (supply, exhaust).

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 85 ACPS BMS Master Spec

19. locate in the discharge of recirculating pumps. 20. locate in return to boiler room, before boilers or cooling tower. 21. through bacnet interface to each vrf unit. 22. for prv and cef units labelled “sensor” on equipment schedule.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 86 ACPS BMS Master Spec

ACTION SPACE/EQUIP LOCATION RESPONSE REMARKS ANALOG OUTPUTS

1. BOILER ROOM 3 WAY HW MODULATION NOTE #1 VALVE 2. RTU/AHU/MAU/MZU/E HW VALVE MODULATION NOTE #1 RU 3. AHU/MAU/MZU/ERU CHW VALVE MODULATION NOTE #1 4. FCU/UV/BCU/ HW VALVE MODULATION NOTE #1 VAL 5. FCU/UV/BCU/ CHW VALVE MODULATION NOTE #1 VAL 6. FTR/ RWC HW VALVE MODULATION NOTE #1 7. BOILER ROOM 3 WAY TW MODULATION NOTE #1 VALVE 8. VAV/MZU DAMPER MODULATION NOTE #1 9. RTU/MAU/AHU/ERU O. A. MODULATION NOTE #2 DAMPER 10. RTU/MAU RELIEF MODULATION NOTE #2 DAMPER 11. AHU/RTU VFD MODULATION NOTE #1 12. VAVTU HW VALVE MODULATION NOTE #1

13. VFD EF/PUMP/CT/ MODULATION NOTE#1 HRW 14. AHU/ERU OA BYPASS MODULATION NOTE#1 15. AHU/ERU EX AIR MODULATION NOTE#1 BYPAS 16. AT IFID SPARES (5% OF TOTAL POINTS)

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 87 ACPS BMS Master Spec

Notes:

1. one per unit and device. boiler room or mechanical room. see drawings. 2. one per unit economize cycle. 3. provide the required number of inputs and outputs in ecah classroom or space to coply with the sequence of operation specified in part 3, execution, paragraph 3.04.  4.all relays with the exceptions of boilers, hot water pumps, and heat trace shall be wired normally open.

ACTION SPACE/EQUIP LOCATION RESPONSE REMARKS DIGITAL OUTPUTS 1. BOILER PUMPS STOP/START NOTE #1 ROOM 2. ACWC UNIT STOP/START NOTE #1 3. WCWC UNIT STOP/START NOTE #1 4. CT FAN STOP/START NOTE #1 5. RTU/AHU/MA FANS STOP/START NOTES U/MZU ERU SUPPLY #1,4,5 RETURN EXHAUST 6. CZ PRV/UVS STOP/START NOTE #2, 6 7. CZ FCU/TWU STOP/START NOTES #2,4 8. CZ UV STOP/START NOTES #2,4 9. CZ FAN STOP/START NOTE #2 10. RTU HEAT CYCLE NOTE #3 11 RTU COOL CYCLE NOTE #3 12. CU COOL CYCLE NOTE #3 13. RTU/AHU/MA O. A. OPEN/CLOSE NOTE #1 U/MZU/ERU DAMPER 14. RTU/AHU/MA O. A. LOCKOUT NOTE #1 U/MZU/ERU DAMPER 15. RTU/AHU/MA RELIEF OPEN/CLOSE NOTE #1 AIR VENT U/ERU

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 88 ACPS BMS Master Spec

16 ACWC/CT HEAT ON/OFF TRACE 17. HRW HEAT ON/OFF NOTE#1 RECOVER Y WHEEL 18. HEX 3-WAY OPEN/CLOSE NOTE#1 HEX VALVE 19. AT IFID SPARES SECURITY NOTE#7 ALARM 20. AT IFID SPARES (5% OF TOTAL POINTS)

21. DOMESTIC PUMP STOP/START NOTE#1 RECRIC. PUMP

Notes:

1. one per unit. boiler room or mechanical room. see plans. 2. equipment within zone per zone. 3. provide a digital output point for each heating and cooling stage. connect to factory built-in controls.  4. all units with water coils and o. a. connections shall have fan lock-0ut by freezestat independent of ifid control. 5. rtu/ahu fan lockout by smoke detector shall be independent of ifid control. 6. all fans shall have fan lock-out (except kitchen hood) by firestat independent of ifid control. 7. provide two digital output points for security. 8. provide the required number of inputs and outputs in each classroom or space to comply with the sequence of operation specified in part 3, execution, paragraph 3.04. 9. all relays with the exceptions of boilers, hot water pumps and heat trace, shall be wired normally open.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 89 ACPS BMS Master Spec

ACTION SPACE/EQUIP LOCATION RESPONSE REMARKS DIGITA L INPUTS 1. BOILER ROOM BOILERS STATUS NOTE #1 2. MAIN IFID ZONEOVERRI STATUS NOTE #3 DE 3. MAIN IFID BOILERS ALARM NOTE #4,5 4. MAIN IFID ACWC ALARM NOTE #4 5. MAIN IFID WCWC ALARM NOTE #4 6. MAIN IFID CZ ALARM NOTE #3 7. UV/FCU/BCU/ FAN STATUS NOTE #4 PRV’s/CEF’s 8. MAIN IFID CHILLER PUMP NOTE #4 REQUEST 9. UTILITY FAN STATUS NOTE #4 VENTSET

10. CHILLER CHILLER STATUS NOTE#4

11. HWR HEAT STATUS NOTE#4 RECOVERY WHEEL 12. AHU/RTU/MA HW COIL ALARM NOTE#4 U/ERU FZSTAT 13. CHW PUMP SELECTOR STATUS NOTE#4 SWITCH 14. TW PUMP SELECTOR STATUS NOTE#4 SWITCH 15. KW ELEC. METER PULSE NOTE#4 SWITCHEGER 16. AT IFID SPARES (5% OF TOTAL POINTS) Notes:

1. One per unit, burner status on/off. boiler room or mechanical room. see plans.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 90 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. One per IFID. 3. One per control zone. 4. one per unit. 5. Any alarm 6. Provide the required number of inputs and outputs in each classroom or space to comply with the sequence of operation specified in part 3, execution, paragraph 3.04. 7. All relays with the exceptions of boilers, hot water pumps, and heat trace shall be wired normally open.

B. For renovation projects Existing equipment - Shall be replaced and in first class operating condition to function as outlined below. Refer to drawings for mechanical equipment to remain.

C. Boiler-Burner Unit - The boiler with burners shall be manually selected for operation and shall remain in constant operation during the heating season. Burner shall cycle to maintain water temperature setting of the built-in aquastat. The system hot water supply temperature shall be controlled by the boiler by- pass three-way valve. Valve shall be modulated by the local indoor/outdoor controller with 1 1/2 to 1 reset ratio. Controller shall reset the supply water temperature in response to changes in outside temperatures at 20oF outside = 180oF Boiler Water.

D. Hot Water Heating Zone Control

1. Pump shall be controlled through the time clock function and energized when the outside air temperature drops below 62oF through the central control panel. The outside air sensor bulb shall be on a shaded wall, insulating mounting and shall be protected by a sunshield. The outside air sensor shall be wired directly to the master controller or the heating controller.

2. Time Clock Operation

a) Day or Occupied Clock Position - Heating pump or pumps shall be energized and operate constantly.

b) Night or Unoccupied Clock Position - Heating pump shall be de- energized.

c) In the night position, when any sensor falls below its setting of 55°F, it shall override the time clock function and return the heating pump to operation until the sensor setting is satisfied.

3. In addition, during the night position, there shall be a programmed override to run building in the day heating mode anytime the outside air temperature falls below 20oF, with all O. A. dampers in the system closed and make-up air units off. Also, the heating pump shall operate and circulate water throughout the building when the outside air temperature falls below 40o F.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 91 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Manual Operation - Timer override switches, one for each building control zone, shall be indexed to move the heat pump or pumps to day operation. This position shall override the time clock.

5. Space temperature controls shall operate while pump is running.

6. Any type of system failure, (i.e. - communication, program, heating failure etc.), shall cause the building to maintain temperature with all supply fans from heating equipment operating, all make-up air units off, all O. A. dampers in the system closed and exhaust fans and PRV's shall turn off. All hydronic heating control valves shall fail open through a hard wire interlock.

1. The time delay for pump changeover shall be one minute.

2. The two primary pumps shall operate utilizing a lead/lag strategy. The lead pump shall run first. On failure of the lead pump, the lag pump shall run and the lead pump shall remain active. For systems equipped with VFD’s On decreasing differential pressure, the lag pump shall stage on and run in unison with the lead pump to maintain differential pressure setpoint. The Fail Safe of the VFD driven hot water pumps shall be accomplished by wiring the Stop / Start relay normally closed. The signal shall be from 0 volt to 10 volts with 0 volt equals pump minimum speed (Adj.). The designated lead pump shall rotate upon one of the following conditions: manually through a software switch, if pump runtime is exceeded, daily, weekly, monthly.

3. Central Hot Water Heating System (to be used for atmospheric modular boilers, engineer to edit)

a) General: BAS shall control the Central Hot Water Heating System including boilers, boiler primary pumps, secondary hot water pumps and secondary pump VFDs, as well as provide monitoring and diagnostic information for management purposes.

b) Heating Enable:

1. The heating shall enable when:

a. The outside air temperature is below the Heat Lockout setpoint of 62°F (adj.) AND when any heating request is received from any zone served by the central HW heating system continuously for 5 min. (adj.)

b. Anytime the outside air temperature is below the continuous run setpoint of 40°F (adj)

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 92 ACPS BMS Master Spec

c. Whenever manually enabled by the operator locally via a graphic icon. The graphic icon shall also be capable of Overriding the System Off.

2. The Heating System shall be disabled when:

a. All the zones served by the Heating System have shut down as scheduled AND the OA temp is above the continuous run OA setpoint plus 2°F.

b. The outside air rises above the OA Heat Lockout setpoint plus 2°F.

3. Secondary Heating Water (Building Loop) Pump Control

a. The lead secondary hot water pump shall start and run continuously when heating is enabled.

b. BAS shall prove operation of the lead secondary hot water pump via a current transducer. If, after 30 seconds, the pump fails to start or fails at any time thereafter, the BAS shall generate an alarm and start the lag pump. The request for the failed pump shall stay active. The pump shall be considered failed when the signal from the current transducer reading the pump amps is less than 50% of the signal when the pump is running at minimum speed. The pump shall also be considered failed if the system differential pressure signal is 25% below the signal at setpoint for more than 30 minutes in which case the lag pump shall start while the lead pump signal remains active.

c. The lead pump shall continue to run for 15 min. (adj.) after the heating system has been disabled. The pumps shall remain off for at least three minutes before being allowed to restart.

d. The lead/lag pump sequence shall rotate weekly.

e. For pumps with variable frequency drives (VFDs), the BAS shall receive a system differential pressure signal from a pressure transducer located as shown on the drawings, if not indicated on the drawings; locate approximately 75% to the farthest point in the system from the pump. The BAS shall modulate the operating pump speed signal to maintain the differential setpoint (adjustable). A separate output start/stop and speed signal from the BAS shall

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 93 ACPS BMS Master Spec

be provided for each pump VFD. A VFD minimum speed of 20 Hz. shall be programmed in to each VFD.

1. Secondary Hot Water Supply Temperature (building loop) setpoint Control

The secondary hot water supply temperature setpoint shall be reset based on outdoor air temperature with all values being adjustable from the graphic. The setpoint shall be reset from 135°F to 180 * F as the O/A temperature falls from 60*F to 20*F or below.

2. Boiler Burner Temperature Control

The BAS shall only enable and disable a boiler to run. When a boiler is enabled the boiler shall run on internal controls to maintain its operating temperature of 180* F

3. Boiler Enable and Rotation Sequence

a) Boilers Enable: When the Central Heating System is Enabled the BAS shall sequence the boilers on and off to maintain the secondary hot water temperature setpoint as follows:

(1) Least 2 degrees F (Adjustable) below the secondary If the Secondary Hot Water Supply temperature is at hot water supply temperature setpoint, enable the lead boiler primary pump, confirm pump flow via a current switch input to the BAS, after a 30 second delay, enable the lead boiler. Once the lead boiler is enabled, it shall remain enabled for at least 30 minutes to prevent short cycling.

(2) If after a five minute delay from the time the lead boiler is enabled the Secondary Hot Water Supply temperature is at least 2 degrees F below the secondary hot water supply temperature setpoint continuously for five minutes, enable the second boiler primary pump, confirm pump flow via a current switch input to the BAS, after a 30 second delay, enable the second boiler. Once the second boiler is enabled, it shall remain enabled for at least 15 minutes to prevent short cycling.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 94 ACPS BMS Master Spec

(3) Continue to add additional boilers in the same manner.

b) Boilers Disable:

(1) If the Secondary Hot Water Supply temperature is at least 2 degrees F above the secondary hot water supply temperature setpoint continuously for at least 15 minutes, disable the last boiler that was enabled (unless that boiler is in its minimum run time delay in which case it shall continue to run until the delay expires), after a 5 minute delay, disable the boiler’s primary pump. Once a boiler is disabled, it shall remain disabled for at least 15 minutes to prevent short cycling.

(2) If after a five minute delay, the Secondary Hot Water Supply temperature remains at least 2 degree F above the secondary hot water supply temperature setpoint continuously for at least 15 minutes, disable the second to last boiler that was enabled (unless that boiler is in its minimum run time delay in which case it shall continue to run until the delay expires), after a 5 minute delay, disable the primary pump. Once a boiler is disabled, it shall remain disabled for at least 15 minutes to prevent short cycling.

(3) Continue to disable boilers in the same manner until all boilers including the lead boiler are disabled.

c) Boiler Rotation

(1) The BAS shall rotate the lead boiler every 24 hours. Each boiler shall be in the rotation.

(2) The lead boiler rotation shall take place only when the plant is disabled and only if all boilers are disabled. Should the plant be enabled for more than 24 hours continuously, the lead rotation shall be delayed until the next time the plant is

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 95 ACPS BMS Master Spec

disabled. Additional boilers shall stage on in numerical order starting from the lead boiler.

7. Boiler and Primary Pump Alarm

a) The BAS shall monitor the boiler alarm point from each boiler burner control and if active, generate a "Boiler #X Failure" alarm. Should a boiler alarm point be active, the BAS shall continue to keep the signal to the boiler enabled (no lock-out) and continue through the enable/ disable sequence.

b) Should a boiler primary pump fail to start or fails while running, the BAS shall continue to keep the signal to the pump enabled (no lock- out) but shall disable the boiler and continue through the enable/ disable sequence. Should the failed pump start while the BAS is attempting to enable the boiler, then the boiler shall be allowed to start.

8. Boiler Plant monitoring and alarming

a) Each boiler shall have a boiler supply/discharge temperature sensor which shall be displayed on the graphic for monitoring purposes. The sensors shall be located between the boiler and the connection to the primary loop as close to the boiler as practical.

b) The secondary hot water supply (building loop) shall have temperature sensor located downstream of the last boiler connection which shall be displayed on the graphic. Should the secondary hot water supply temperature be below the secondary hot water supply temperature setpoint by 10 degrees continuously for more than 30 minutes while the plant is enabled, then activate an alarm.

c) The secondary hot water return (building loop) shall have a temperature sensor located upstream of the first boiler connection which shall be displayed on the graphic for monitoring purposes.

9. General

a) All points, and commands for the Central Hot Water system shall be displayed on the graphic.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 96 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b) All points, and commands for the Central Hot Water system shall be trended by the BAS. Digital points shall be set up to trend on a change of state. Analog points shall trend every 10 minutes.

c) Failsafe wiring: All primary pumps, secondary pump VFDs and boiler enable points shall be controlled using normally closed contacts so that a failure of the controller will enable the pumps and boilers. Control relays coils shall be energized to disable equipment and de-energized to enable equipment.

E. Water Chillers - Air Cooled

1. When a request for cooling requires the chiller to start, the following sequence shall occur:

A. Command the chiller to start under its own control.

B. Start CHWP based on chiller pump request. Verify CHWP pump is operating (prove operation).

C. Monitor chiller status and prove operation. If status is not indicated within 15 minutes (ADJ.) of a command to start, enunciate an alarm.

2. The chiller shall be hard wired interlocked with its chilled water pump and with a flow sensor so it cannot operate unless the pump is in operation and a differential pressure switch proves water flow in the chilled water line.

3. With the chilled water flow proved the compressors shall be cycled on and off and loaded and unloaded by a built-in return water thermostat either with multiple stages or controlling a step controller through the required number of stages of control or an approved factory controlled method

4. Chiller control and crankcase heater circuit and electric heat tracing circuit shall remain on constantly during all seasons. Heat tracing circuit shall be cycled off during mild weather by outside air sensor sensing outside air temperature.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 97 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. This contractor shall interface with the chiller supplied network interface card. The points listed in the input/output summaries as well as those listed below shall be the minimum acceptable.

1. Chilled water pump request. 2. Chilled water setpoint. 3. Chiller enable/disable. 4. Chiller current draw. 5. Entering water temperature. 6. Leaving water temperature. 7. Compressor starts. 8. Compressor run time. 9. Alarm. 10. Present operating mode.

F. Chilled Water Cooling Zone Control

1. Zone shall be controlled though the time clock function and when the outside air temperature rises to 50oF and a call for cooling is present through the central control panel.

2. In the day occupied mode In addition to the outside air sensor, if any four rooms on the chilled water system call for cooling, for fifteen minutes or more it shall over ride the outside air sensor and allow the cooling to operate below 50F.

3. Time Clock Operation

a. Day or Occupied Clock Position - Cooling pump or pumps shall operate when requested by the chiller.

b. Night or Unoccupied Clock Position - Cooling pump or pumps shall be de-energized.

c. In the night position, when any four sensors rise above its setting of 85F, it shall override the time clock function and return the chiller and cooling pump to operation until the sensor setting is satisfied.

4. Manual Operation - Timer override switches one for each building control zone, shall enable chiller and chilled water pumps for day operation. This position shall override the time clock.

5. Space temperature controls shall operate while the pump is running.

6. The two primary pumps shall operate utilizing a lead/lag strategy. The lead pump shall run first. On failure of the lead pump, the lag pump shall run and the lead pump shall remain active. For systems equipped with VFD’s On decreasing differential pressure, the lag pump shall stage on and run in unison with the lead pump to maintain differential pressure setpoint. The designated lead pump shall rotate upon one of the

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 98 ACPS BMS Master Spec

following conditions: manually through a software switch, if pump runtime is exceeded, daily, weekly, monthly. Pumps shall stop only after the chiller has been disabled and shall have an adjustable delay on stop feature which will allow for the orderly shutdown of the chilled water system.

H. Split System - AHU/CU

1. Heating - With heating pump in constant occupied operation through time clock function and outside air sensor, space shall be controlled as described below.

2. Heating/Cooling - With Air Handling Unit Fan in constant occupied operation. Room control located as shown shall cycle compressors and heating valve to maintain their settings, heating 71oF - cooling 74oF. Compressors shall be hardwired interlocked with the air-handling unit so they cannot be energized unless the fan is in operation. When air handling unit starts, two position spring return outside air damper shall open. When unit is de-energized outside air damper shall be closed.

3. Heating Setback - During clock unoccupied position, heating pump shall be de-energized. When the reduced setting night control returns the pump to operation the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting (55oF) is satisfied. O.A. dampers shall be closed.

4. Cooling Setback – During clock unoccupied position, provide cooling night control set at 85F, to cycle cooling to maintain setting, with O.A. damper closed.

5. Provide morning warm-up cycle with O.A. damper closed and setpoint (68oF).The morning warm –up sensor shall be located in the space served.

I. Variable Air Volume Rooftop Units

1. General - The rooftop unit shall be controlled through its factory controls via interface and the timing function by the central control panels operating program reacting to space and system temperature and static pressure conditions.

2. Fan

a. When the IFID timing function energizes the system the supply fan shall run constantly. The modulating low leakage outside air damper shall be internally interlocked with the fan to open to its minimum position with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount.

b. The RTU controller will modulate the fan speed by an output signal to the supply VFD to maintain the setpoint of the duct mounted static pressure sensor.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 99 ACPS BMS Master Spec

c. The Ventilation Control Module shall be linked to the air handling unit microprocessor-based controller. Using a velocity pressure sensing ring, the ventilation control module shall monitor and control the quantity of fresh air entering the unit. The building automation system shall send the CFM set point to the unit and shall then monitor that setpoint to ensure that it is maintained.

d. The fresh outdoor air shall enter the air handling unit through the air flow monitor station/damper sensor assembly and shall be measured by velocity pressure flow rings. The velocity pressure flow rings shall be connected to a pressure transducer/solenoid assembly. The ventilation control module shall utilize the velocity pressure input, the outdoor air temperature input, and the minimum outdoor CFM setpoint to modify the volume (CFM) of fresh air entering the unit as the measured airflow deviates from setpoint.

3. Occupied Operation - Warm-Up

a. When the unit is initially energized and controlled by the timed start/stop function the fan shall be energized and the control system shall be activated to the warm up mode.

b. During the warm up mode the static pressure control system shall be activated, the remaining controls shall remain in their respective night positions with O. A. damper closed and the space VAV boxes shall be held open. The VAV box reheat shall be disabled during periods of morning warm up. The system shall remain in the warm up mode until the return air rises above 68F if after a one hour time period the warm up sensor has not reached 68DEG F the outside air damper will be indexed to the occupied position. The Warm up temperature sensor shall be located in return air duct at the unit.

4. Occupied Operation - Cooling

a. When the warm up mode ends the outside air dampers shall open to their adjustable minimum positions with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount. If the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy the discharge temperature sensor shall cause modulation of the outside and return air dampers to maintain its setting. If the outside air enthalpy is greater than the return air enthalpy the dampers shall remain in their minimum positions. Power exhaust fans/relief dampers shall be energized/modulate when outside air damper exceeds 50% open.or the respective building static pressure controller exceeds its setting (adj) When the unit is de-energized the outside air damper and relief damper shall close.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 100 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b. In addition to the dampers the discharge air temperature sensor signals shall cause modulation of the cooling and heating system to maintain its setting. Compressors and heating section shall be hardwired interlocked internally so that they cannot operate unless the unit fan is running. The discharge air temperature sensor shall also act as a low limit control. The sensor shall be located per the manufactures recommendation. The setting of the discharge air temperature sensor shall be reset through the factory electronic control system by field-supplied controls.

c. The unit shall be capable of Discharge Temperature Control and the discharge temperature shall be reset from 55 degrees to 65 degrees as the return air temperature falls from 78 degrees to74 degrees with all values being adjustable. When the unit is energized for setback heating during the unoccupied period, the discharge setpoint shall be 75 degrees. When the unit is energized for morning cool-down, night purge or setback cooling, the discharge setpoint shall be the warmest zone temperature minus 15 degrees.

5. Unoccupied Operation - When the unit is de-energized the controls shall assume their night position. The supply air fan shall be de-energized; the outside air damper and static control dampers shall close, and the return air damper shall open.

J) Variable Air Volume AHU with Heat Wheel

1) Supply Fan Control

The supply fan will operate continuously whenever the BAS commands the mode of the unit controller to be either occupied or optimal start. The supply fan will be off whenever:

(a) The BAS commands the mode of the unit controller to be unoccupied. (b) The freezestat has tripped. (c) A high duct static condition exists. (d) The discharge air temperature sensor fails.

2) Supply Fan Speed

a. The speed of the supply fan will be modulated by the unit controller to maintain duct static pressure.

b. If the duct static pressure sensor fails, the unit controller will alarm and the fan will be shut down.

3) Economizer Operation

a. When the outside air temperature rises above 56DEG F(adj) the ECON will be locked out and mechanical cooling will be used.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 101 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b. When the outside air temperature is 56DEG F(adj) or below, mechanical cooling will be locked out and ECON cooling will be used. The outside air damper will modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature of 56DEG F(adj).

c. A mixed air low limit will active mechanical cooling and modulate the outside air damper if the mixed air temperature drops below 50 DEG F(adj).

4) Outside Air Damper

a. When the unit controller is unoccupied, or in the unoccupied portion of morning warm-up, the outside air damper (OADAMPER) will be closed.

b. During the occupied portion of morning warm-up, the outside air damper (OADAMPER) will modulate to maintain its minimum flow setpoint.

c. The Ventilation Control Module shall be linked to the air handling unit microprocessor-based controller. Using a velocity pressure sensing ring, the ventilation control module shall monitor and control the quantity of fresh air entering the unit. The building automation system shall send the CFM set point to the unit and shall then monitor that setpoint to ensure that it is maintained.

d. The fresh outdoor air shall enter the air handling unit through the air flow monitor station/damper sensor assembly and shall be measured by velocity pressure flow rings. The velocity pressure flow rings shall be connected to a pressure transducer/solenoid assembly. The ventilation control module shall utilize the velocity pressure input, the outdoor air temperature input, and the minimum outdoor CFM setpoint to modify the volume (CFM) of fresh air entering the unit as the measured airflow deviates from setpoint.

e. A password protected graphic icon (button) shall be incorporated in the graphics which, when enabled, will globally reset the outside air dampers to 10% of minimum flow. This icon shall be labeled “summer ventilation mode”.

5) Return Air Damper

(1) The position of the return air damper (RADAMPER) will be proportionate to the outside air damper ( as the outside air damper opens the RADAMPER will close a corresponding amount).

6) Chilled Water Valve

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 102 ACPS BMS Master Spec

(1) The chilled water valve will modulate in order to maintain discharge air temperature as determined by a discharge air sensor. (2) The cooling shall be enabled whenever: a. the outside air temperature is greater than 62 DEG F (adj) b. AND the economizer is disabled or fully open. c. AND the supply fan status is on. d. AND the heating is not active.

7) Heating Water Valve

(1) The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and modulate the heating coil valve to maintain its setpoint.

(2) The heating coil valve shall be enabled whenever: a. Outside air temperature is less than 62F (adj), b. AND the fan status is on, c. AND the cooling is not active.

(3) The heating coil valve shall open to 100% (adj) whenever: a. Supply air temperature is less than 35F (adj), OR the freezestat is tripped or in alarm.

8) Discharge Air

1) The setting of the discharge air temperature sensor shall be reset thru the control system. The discharge air shall be reset from 55 DEG F(adj) to 65 DEG F(adj) as the return temperature falls from 78DEG F to 74 DEG F. with all values being adjustable. When the unit is energized for setback heating during the unoccupied period, the discharge setpoint shall be 75 degrees. The O/A dampers, exhaust fan and any associated remote relief devices shall remain in the unoccupied position. The return air by-pass damper shall fully open and the hot water valve shall modulate to maintain setpoint. When the unit is energized for morning cool-down, night purge or setback cooling, the discharge setpoint shall be the warmest zone temperature minus 15 degrees.

9) Heat Wheel Operation

1) Cooling Recovery Mode If the OAT is greater than the ECON setpoint temperature (55F adj.) and the OAT is greater than the RAT the heat wheel is on. The OAD is at its minimum position and the return air damper is fully open. The outside/ exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are closed and the cooling valve is active.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 103 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2) Cooling No Recovery If the OAT is greater than the ECON setpoint temperature and the OAT is less than the RAT the heat wheel is off. The outside/exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are open and the cooling valve is active.

3) Cooling Economizing Mode If the OAT is less than the ECON setpoint temperature and the OAT is less than the RAT the heat wheel is off. The outside air damper and the return air damper will modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature. The outside/exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are open and the heating and cooling valves are not active.

4) Heating Recovery

a) Heating Stage 1 1. If the OAT is less than both the ECON setpoint temperature and the RAT, and the DAT is less than the discharge air setpoint temperature, the heat wheel is on. The outside air damper is at its minimum position, the outside/exhaust air recovery dampers are open and the heating valve is not active.

b) Heating Stage 2

1. If the OAT is less than both the ECON setpoint temperature and the RAT and the DAT is less than the discharge setpoint temperature, the heat wheel is on. The outside air damper is at minimum. The exhaust air recovery damper will modulate to maintain the DAT and the outside air recovery bypass damper is closed. The heating valve is not active.

c) Heating Stage 3

1. If the OAT is less than both the ECON setpoint temperature and the RAT the heat wheel is on. The outside air damper is at its minimum position, the return air damper is at its maximum position and the outside/exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are closed. The heating valve is active.

10) Exhaust Fan Control

(1) The exhaust fan will operate continuously whenever the BAS commands the unit controller to either the occupied mode or the optimal start mode.

(2) The exhaust fan will be off under any of the following conditions:

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 104 ACPS BMS Master Spec

(a) The unit controller is in the unoccupied mode. (b) The supply fan has failed. (c) The freezestat has tripped. (d) The discharge air temperature sensor has failed. (e) The exhaust fan status indicates a failure.

11) Exhaust Fan Speed

(1) The speed of the exhaust fan will be modulated by the unit controller to maintain the differential building pressure at 0.05 (adj.) in WC.

12) Safeties

(1) The unit controller will shut down the unit when:

(a) The unit controller is in the unoccupied mode. (b) The discharge air temperature sensor has failed. (c) The freezestat is tripped. (d) A high duct static condition exists.

13) Alarms

(1) The unit controller will generate an alarm if:

(a) The supply fan has failed. (b) The discharge air temperature sensor has failed. (c) The duct static pressure sensor has failed. (d) The outside airflow sensor has failed. (e) The freezestat has tripped. (f) A high duct static condition exists.

K) Constant Volume AHU with Heat Wheel

1) Supply Fan Control

The supply fan will operate continuously whenever the BAS commands the mode of the unit controller to be either occupied or optimal start. When the unit is energized The supply fan will be off whenever:

(a) The BAS commands the mode of the unit controller to be unoccupied. (b) The freezestat has tripped. (c) A high duct static condition exists. (d) The supply fan status indicates a failure.

2) Economizer operation

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 105 ACPS BMS Master Spec

a. When the outside air temperature is 56 DEG F(adj) or below cooling will be provided by modulating the outside air damper to maintain the space temperature setpoint.

b. A mixed air low limit will activate mechanical cooling and modulate the outside air damper if the mixed air temperature drops below 50 DEG F(adj).

3) Outside Air Damper

a. When the unit controller is unoccupied, or in the unoccupied portion of morning warm-up, the outside air damper (OADAMPER) will be closed.

b. During the occupied portion of morning warm-up, the outside air damper (OADAMPER) will modulate to maintain its minimum flow setpoint.

4) Return Air Damper

a. The position of the return air damper (RADAMPER) will be equal to 100% open minus the position of the outside air damper.

5) Chilled Water Valve

a. The chilled water valve will modulate in order to maintain its setting of 74 DEG F (adj.)

b. The cooling shall be enabled whenever:

a. the outside air temperature is greater than 62 DEG F (adj) b. AND the economizer is disabled or fully open. c. AND the supply fan status is on. d. AND the heating is not active.

6) Heating Water Valve

a. The heating water valve will modulate in order to maintain its setting of 71 DEG F (adj). b. The heating coil valve shall be enabled whenever: Outside air temperature is less than 62F (adj), AND the fan status is on, AND the cooling is not active.

c. The heating coil valve shall open to 100% (adj) whenever: Supply air temperature is less than 35F (adj), OR the freezestat is tripped or in alarm.

7) Heat Wheel Operation

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 106 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1) Cooling Recovery Mode

a. If the OAT is greater than the ECON setpoint temperature (55F adj.) and the OAT is greater than the RAT the heat wheel is on. The OAD is at its minimum position and the return air damper is fully open. The outside/ exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are closed and the cooling valve is active.

2) Cooling No Recovery

a. If the OAT is greater than the ECON setpoint temperature and the OAT is less than the RAT the heat wheel is off. The outside/exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are open and the cooling valve is active.

3) Cooling Economizing Mode

a. If the OAT is less than the ECON setpoint temperature and the OAT is less than the RAT the heat wheel is off. The outside air damper and the return air damper will modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature. The outside/exhaust air recovery bypass dampers are open and the heating and cooling valves are not active.

8) Heating Recovery

a) Heating Stage 1

1. If the OAT is less than both the ECON setpoint temperature and the RAT , and the DAT is less than the discharge air setpoint temperature, the heat wheel is on. The outside air damper is at its minimum position, the outside/exhaust air recovery dampers are open and the heating valve is not active.

b) Heating Stage 2

1. If the OAT is less than both the ECON setpoint temperature and the RAT and the DAT is less than the discharge setpoint temperature, the heat wheel is on. The outside air damper is at minimum. The exhaust air recovery damper will modulate to maintain the DAT and the outside air recovery bypass damper is closed. The heating valve is not active.

c) Heating Stage 3

1. If the OAT is less than both the ECON setpoint temperature and the RAT the heat wheel is on. The outside air damper is at its minimum position, the return

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 107 ACPS BMS Master Spec

air damper is at its maximum position and the outside/exhaust air recovery bypass damper is closed. The heating valve is active

9) Exhaust Fan Control

a. The exhaust fan will operate continuously whenever the BAS commands the unit controller to either the occupied mode, the optimal start mode or the morning warm up mode.

b. The exhaust fan will be off under any of the following conditions:

(1) The unit controller is in the unoccupied mode. (2) The supply fan has failed. (3) The freezestat has tripped. (4) The exhaust fan status indicates a failure.

10) Safeties

a. The unit controller will shut down the unit when:

(1) The unit controller is in the unoccupied mode. (2) The exhaust fan has failed. (3) The freezestat is tripped.

11) Alarms

a. The unit controller will generate an alarm if:

(1) The supply fan has failed. (2) The outside air temperature has failed. (3) The exhaust fan has failed. (4) The exhaust airflow sensor has failed. (5) The freezestat has tripped. (6) The energy wheel is not rotating when controlled on.

L. Valances – 4 Pipe

1. With respective system pumps in occupied operation the combination heating-cooling room control shall modulate space located controls as described below. Each unit shall have a complete set of control components (see item 5 below).

2. Heating

a. Control shall modulate valance hot water valve to maintain its setting (71oF).

b. During clock unoccupied mode, heating pump shall be de- energized. When the reduced setting night control returns the

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 108 ACPS BMS Master Spec

pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting (55oF) is satisfied.

3. Cooling

a. Heating-cooling room control shall modulate valance chilled water valve to maintain its setting (74oF).

b. During clock unoccupied position, cooling pump shall be de- energized. When the increased night setting control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting of 85F is satisfied.

4. Provide zone warm-up cycle with setpoint (68oF).

5. Rooms shown with two units shall have control components of both units controlled by one room control, except classrooms with folding partitions shall have individual controls for each unit.

M. Fan Powered VAV Boxes, with Hot Water Coils or Electric Heat

1. General

a. Controls, damper operators and linkages furnished and installed under this section for constant volume terminal units shall be as described in section 233600. Coordinate with unit manufacturer for requirements. Operators and linkages shall be compatible with units.

b. Unit shall be controlled by the control panel program reacting to temperature signals transmitted from individual room sensors located where shown and rooftop unit controls. Valve and damper operators shall be electronic.

2. Occupied Mode - With fan operating constantly during occupied hours (fans are to start prior to the starting of the parent AHU/RTU) and the individual room sensor transmitting a temperature signal to the IFID lower than the programmed heating setting of 71F the fan powered box primary air damper shall close to its minimum air flow and the electronic controlled normally open heating coil hot water valve or duct heater shall modulate to maintain the heating setting. As the space temperature rises above the programmed setting the valve shall modulate closed. or the duct heater shall turn off. As the space temperature continues to rise above the programmed cooling setting of 74oF the primary damper shall modulate toward the open position. On a fall in space temperature the reverse sequences shall occur. Units which incorporate electric duct heaters shall lockout heating if the outside air temperature is above 62Deg F(adj), units which incorporate hot water reheat coils shall lock out heating if the heating water pump is not running. A password protected graphic icon (button) shall be incorporated on the graphics

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 109 ACPS BMS Master Spec

which, when enabled, will override the above lockout and allow heating above 62Deg F (adj) for units using electric duct heaters.

3. Unoccupied Mode

a. The constant volume terminal unit shall be fully de-energized during unoccupied hours. The primary air damper shall be in its normally closed position.

b. Heating - The fan and hot water coil valve respond to the IFID to meet the programmed night setting of 55F.

c. Cooling – The fan and damper respond to the IFID to meet the programmed night setting of 85F.

4. Warm-Up Mode - with the associated rooftop unit start-up the terminal unit hot water valve shall fully open the constant volume terminal unit fan shall operate and its primary damper shall be 100% open. The cycle shall continue until the warm-up sensor located in the return air duct reaches the setting of 68F,or when the schedule allows the system shall enter the occupied mode.

5. Engineer designated space sensors shall, in addition to the above, be used to reset the discharge air setpoint as described in the VAV Rooftop unit sequence.

N. VAV Box with Hot water coils

1. General

a. Controls, damper operators and linkages furnished and installed under this section for terminal units shall be as described in section 15870. Coordinate with the unit manufacturer for requirements. Operators and linkages shall be compatible with units.

b. Unit shall be controlled by the control panel program reacting to temperature signals transmitted from individual room sensors located where shown and air handling unit controls.

2. Occupied mode- With the individual room sensor transmitting a temperature signal to the IFID lower than the programmed heating setting of 71* Deg F the primary air damper shall open to its maximum air flow and the heating coil hot water valve shall modulate to maintain the heating setting. As the space temperature rises above the programmed setting the valve shall modulate closed and the primary air damper shall close to its minimum position. As the space temperature continues to rise above the programmed cooling setting of 74*Deg F the primary air damper shall modulate toward the open position. On a fall in space temperature the reverse shall occur. Heating shall be locked out if the associated heating water pump is not running.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 110 ACPS BMS Master Spec

3. Unoccupied mode- The primary air damper and the hot water valve shall be in their normally open position.

4. Warm-up Mode- With the associated air handling unit start-up the terminal unit hot water valve shall fully open and the primary air damper shall be 100% open. The cycle shall continue until the warm-up sensor reaches the setting of 68*Deg F at which time the system shall enter the occupied mode.

O. Rooftop Units - Single Zone with Economizer Cycle

1. General - Rooftop unit shall be controlled through the IFID timing function by the IFID operating program reacting to space temperature signals from the room sensor located where shown. The IFID shall actuate control relays, which will start and stop the unit and open or close circuits for the fan, heating or cooling operation. Compressors and heating section shall be hardwired interlocked internally so that they cannot operate unless the unit fan is running. When the unit is de- energized the outside air damper shall close.

2. Fan - When the IFID timing function energizes the system, the program shall cause the supply fan to run constantly using the factory built-in control circuitry. The modulating electrically operated low leakage outside air damper shall be internally interlocked with the fan to open to its preset minimum position with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount.

3. Heating

a. Occupied Mode - The IFID shall cause modulation or cycling of the heating to maintain the space programmed heating setting of 71F. Whenever the unit is energized, BAS shall enable the heater and use a DA PID loop to control its output via the unit mounted heater management system to maintain space temperature at setpoint, through a step control logic function utilizing dead bands with a 2°F (ADJ.) throttling range. Heating shall remain off if the outside air temperature is above 62°F (ADJ.).

b. Unoccupied Mode - The IFID shall close the outside air damper and stop the fan. When the space temperature falls below the programmed reduced night temperature of 55F, the IFID shall return the system to operation as described above until the programmed setting is reached. During night setback heating operation the outside air damper shall remain closed.

c. Morning Warm-Up - When the IFID returns the equipment to the occupied mode it shall start in a morning warm-up configuration. The fan shall run, the heat shall cycle and the outside air damper shall remain closed until the space temperature signal transmitted

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 111 ACPS BMS Master Spec

to the IFID reaches the programmed setting of 68F. If after a one hour time period the space temperature has not reached 68 DEG F the outside air damper will be indexed to the occupied position.

4. Cooling

a. Occupied Mode

1. The IFID shall close the cooling control circuits to the rooftop unit in noted stages causing the controls to operate the cooling cycle to maintain the IFID programmed cooling setting of 74o F.

2. Mechanical Cooling - When the unit panel operates the cooling controls and the outside air enthalpy is above the built-in enthalpy sensor set point the economizer mode is locked out and the outside air dampers remain at their minimum position. Cooling is done mechanically by the compressors.

3. Economizer Cooling - When the unit panel operates the cooling controls and the outside air enthalpy is below the setting of the built-in enthalpy sensor the economizer mode operates under built-in thermostatic control. The outside air dampers modulate toward their open position while the return air dampers modulate toward closed correspondingly. The economizer mode acts as the first stage of cooling using outside air. In this mode as the outside air damper modulates to the 50% open point and an end switch on the damper shall close the circuit to the relief air means described below. If the outside air alone cannot satisfy the cooling requirements of the conditioned space economizer cooling is integrated with mechanical cooling. Compressors working simultaneously with the economizer mode will be staged on to meet the cooling load. As the conditioned space temperature approaches the set point the mechanical stages cycle off, last stage first. After all stages of mechanical cooling are off as the discharge air temperature drops below 62F the outside air damper will modulate toward its minimum setting. At a discharge air temperature of 50F the outside air damper will be at its minimum position.

4. During the economizer cycle building air shall be relieved through the rooftop unit using barometric dampers, powered exhaust or remote relief dampers sized at 100%.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 112 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b. Unoccupied Mode - The IFID shall de-energize the controls and rooftop unit. The outside air dampers shall close. When the space temperature sensor rises above the programmed night temperature of 85F, the IFID shall return the system to operation as described above until the programmed setting is reached. During the night setback cooling operation, the outside air damper shall remain closed.

5. Rooftop Unit Nos. (select) to (select) - In addition to the above sequence the following shall apply.

a. The rooftop units shall operate an equal amount of time each week. During normal occupancy only one primary unit shall operate. A different unit shall be the primary unit each day. The lead unit shall be determined by the owner.

b. The change from normal occupancy to high occupancy shall be through a carbon dioxide sensor located in the space adjacent to the room sensor. Normal occupancy shall be below 900 parts per million or less and high occupancy shall be above 900 parts per million.

c. Ventilation - When the changeover is made to high occupancy, additional units shall be staged on to provide ventilation as the CO2 level in the space rises from 900 ppm to 1100 ppm so that all rooftop units are energized at a CO2 level of 1100 ppm. Upon a fall in CO2 level, the reverse shall occur. Units shall run for a minimum of one hour when brought on by CO2.

d. Heating - The IFID shall cycle the heating stages in all rooftop units consecutively to maintain a space temperature of 71F.

e. Cooling - The IFID shall cycle the cooling stages in all rooftop units consecutively to maintain a space temperature of 74F.

P. Rooftop Units - Single Zone with minimum outside air

1. General - Rooftop unit shall be controlled through the IFID timing function by the IFID operating program reacting to space temperature signals from the room sensor located where shown. Compressors and heat shall be hardwired interlocked so that they cannot operate unless the unit fan is running. IFID shall provide thermostatic functions to cause the unit to operate with its built-in control and protective circuits. When the unit is de-energized the outside air damper shall close.

2. Fan - When the IFID energizes the system the program shall cause the fan to run constantly using the factory built-in control circuitry. The two-position spring return electric motor operated outside air damper shall be internally interlocked to open to its preset minimum position.

3. Heating

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 113 ACPS BMS Master Spec

a. Occupied Mode - The IFID shall cause the heat to operate through the factory-designed controls to maintain the space programmed heating setting of 71F. When the unit is energized, BAS shall enable the heater and use a DA PID loop to control its output via the unit mounted heater management system to maintain space temperature at setpoint, through a step control logic function utilizing dead bands with a 2°F (ADJ.) throttling range. Heating shall remain off if the outside air temperature is above 62°F (ADJ.).

b. Unoccupied Mode - The IFID shall de-energize the heating, stop the fan and close the outside air damper. When the space temperature falls below the programmed reduced night temperature of 55F the IFID shall return the system to operation as described above until the programmed setting is reached. During night setback operation the outside air damper shall remain closed.

c. Morning Warm-Up - When the IFID returns the equipment to the occupied mode it shall start in a morning warm-up configuration. The fan shall run, the heat shall operate and the outside air damper shall remain closed until the space temperature signal transmitted to the IFID by the sensor reaches the programmed setting of 68F. If after a one hour time period the space temperature has not reached 68 DEG F the outside air damper will be indexed to the occupied position.

4. Cooling

a. Occupied Mode - The IFID shall cause the compressors and condensing fans to operate through the factory designed controls to maintain the individual space programmed cooling setting of 74o F. Cooling stages shall be per the equipment furnished.

b. Unoccupied Mode - The IFID shall stop the compressor and fans and close the outside air damper. When the space temperature sensor rises above the programmed night temperature of 85F the IFID shall return the system to operation as described above until the programmed setting is reached. During the night setback cooling operation, the outside air damper shall remain closed.

Q. Variable Air Volume Air Handling Units with chilled and hot water.

1. General – Units shall be controlled through the factory mounted controls and by the central control panels. The fan shall be energized through the control system, and shall run constantly. The modulating low leakage outside air damper shall be internally interlocked with the fan to open to its minimum position with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 114 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Occupied Operation – Warm-Up

a. During the warm up mode the static pressure control system shall be activated, the remaining controls shall remain in their respective night positions with the outside air damper closed and the space VAV boxes shall be held open. The system shall remain in the warm up mode until the return air temperature rises above 68F. If after a one hour time period the space temperature has not reached 68 DEG F the outside air damper will be indexed to the occupied position the unit shall then be indexed to the occupied mode. Warm up temperature sensor shall be located in the return air duct.

b. When the warm up mode ends the outside and remote relief air dampers shall open to their adjustable minimum positions with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount. If the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy the discharge temperature sensor shall modulate the outside, return and remote relief air dampers to maintain its setting. If the outside air enthalpy is greater than the return air enthalpy the dampers shall remain in their minimum positions.

c. The Ventilation Control Module shall be linked to the air handling unit microprocessor-based controller. Using a velocity pressure sensing ring, the ventilation control module shall monitor and control the quantity of fresh air entering the unit. The building automation system shall send the CFM set point to the unit and shall then monitor that setpoint to ensure that it is maintained.

d. The fresh outdoor air shall enter the air handling unit through the air flow monitor station/damper sensor assembly and shall be measured by velocity pressure flow rings. The velocity pressure flow rings shall be connected to a pressure transducer/solenoid assembly. The ventilation control module shall utilize the velocity pressure input, the outdoor air temperature input, and the minimum outdoor CFM setpoint to modify the volume (CFM) of fresh air entering the unit as the measured airflow deviates from setpoint.

e. A password protected graphic icon (button) shall be incorporated in the graphics which, when enabled, will globally reset the outside air dampers to 10% of minimum flow. This icon shall be labeled “summer ventilation mode”.

3. Occupied Cooling and Heating - In addition to the dampers the discharge air temperature sensor shall modulate the cooling coil valve to maintain its setting of 55°F. The discharge air temperature sensor shall also act as a low limit control by modulating the heating coil valve to maintain its setting of 52°F. The sensor shall be located per the manufacturers

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 115 ACPS BMS Master Spec

recommendation. The setting of the discharge air temperature sensor shall be reset from 55 DEG F (adj) to 65 DEG F (adj) as the return air temperature falls from 78 DEG F (adj) to 74 DEG F (adj). When the unit is energized for setback heating during the unoccupied period, the discharge setpoint shall be 75 degrees. When the unit is energized for morning cool-down, night purge or setback cooling, the discharge setpoint shall be the warmest zone temperature minus 15 degrees. 4. A static pressure sensor, located a minimum of 2/3 the distance of the total duct run, as measured from the unit, shall modulate the variable frequency drive (VFD) to maintain its setting.

5. Unoccupied Mode - the unit is de-energized and the controls shall assume their night positions. The supply air fan shall be de-energized; through a hardwired interlock the outside air damper, remote relief air damper, and cooling coil valve shall close, and the return air damper and heating coil valve shall open.

a. Heating – When the reduced setting night control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting of 55°F is satisfied. O.A. damper shall be closed.

b. Cooling – When the increased night setting control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night seating of 85F is satisfied. O.A. damper shall be closed.

R. Single Zone Air Handling with chilled and hot water.

9. Occupied Mode - the unit is energized and controlled by the timed start/stop function. The fan shall be energized through the control system activated to the warm up mode. When the unit is de-energized the O.A. damper shall close.

10. During the warm up mode the controls shall remain in their night position with O. A. damper closed until the space temperature rises above its setting of 68F. When scheduling permits, the unit shall then be indexed to the occupied mode. Warm up temperature sensor shall be located in the space served.

11. During the day mode the outside and remote relief air dampers shall open to their adjustable minimum position with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount. A room temperature sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the heating coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 71F and the cooling coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 74F. If the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy the room temperature sensor shall also cause the modulation of the outside, return and remote relief air dampers to maintain its programmed setting of 74o F. A mixed air low limit temperature sensor shall override the room temperature sensor and close

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 116 ACPS BMS Master Spec

the outside and relief air dampers if its programmed setting of 55F is reached.

12. Unoccupied Mode – when the unit is de-energized, or manually turned off the controls shall assume their night positions. The fan shall stop; the outside air damper, remote relief air damper and cooling coil valve shall close, and the return air damper and heating coil valve shall open.

a. Heating – When the reduced setting night control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting of 55°F is satisfied. O.A. damper shall be closed.

b. Cooling – When the increased setting night control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting of 85F is satisfied. O.A. damper shall be closed.

S. 100% Roof Top Make-up Air Units with chilled and hot water coils

1. Occupied Mode - the unit is energized and controlled by the timed start/stop function. The fan shall be energized through the control system activated to the occupied mode, the heating valve shall not be indexed until fan status is proven. When the unit is de-energized the O.A. damper shall close.

2. During the day mode the outside air damper shall open fully. A duct discharge air temperature sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the heating coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 70F heating mode shall be enabled when the outside air is below 62 F In the cooling season, the space humidity sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the chilled water coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 55% relative humidity. Cooling coil leaving temperature setpoint shall be reset based on humidity. Setpoint shall be reset based on a RA PID loop outputting a setpoint of 75°F to 55°F as the space humidity rises from 60% RH to 70% RH all adjustable. In addition, the duct discharge air temperature sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the cooling coil valve to prevent the supply air temperature from rising above 75F or below 55°F. In the event of a unit freeze stat alarm, through a hardwired interlock the unit dampers and valves shall return to the failsafe position.

4. Unoccupied Mode - the unit is de-energized, the controls shall assume their night positions. The fan shall stop; and through a hardwired interlock the outside air damper and cooling coil valve shall close and heating coil valve shall open.

T. Energy Recovery Units with chilled and hot water coils

1. Occupied Mode - the unit is energized and controlled by the timed start/stop function. The supply and exhaust fans shall be energized

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 117 ACPS BMS Master Spec

through the control system activated to the warm up mode, the heating valve shall not be indexed until fan status is proven. When the unit is de- energized the O.A. damper shall close.

2. During the occupied mode the outside air damper shall open fully. A duct discharge air temperature sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the heating coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 70F heating mode shall be enabled when the outside air is below 62F. In the cooling season, cooling coil leaving temperature setpoint shall be reset based on humidity. Setpoint shall be reset based on a RA PID loop outputting a setpoint of 75°F to 55°F as the space humidity rises from 60% RH to 70% RH all adjustable. In addition, the duct discharge air temperature sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the cooling coil valve to prevent the supply air temperature from rising above 75F or below 70°F.

3. Unoccupied Mode - the unit is de-energized, the controls shall assume their night positions. The fan shall stop; the outside air damper and cooling coil valve shall close and heating coil valve shall open.

4. Freeze Protection: The energy recovery unit will operate as described in Section 15774, Energy Recovery Units, to defrost the heat exchanger. Also, if the hot water coil entering air temperature is below 40 degrees F, the heating coil valve will modulate fully open.

U. Energy Recovery Units with chilled and hot water coils with bypass dampers.

1. Occupied Mode - the unit is energized and controlled by the timed start/stop function. The supply and exhaust fans shall be energized through the control system activated to the warm up mode, the heating valve shall not be indexed until fan status is proven. When the unit is de- energized the O.A. damper shall close.

2. During the warm up mode the controls shall remain in their night position with O. A. damper closed until the return air temperature rises above its setting of 68F. When scheduling permits, the unit shall then be indexed to the occupied mode. Warm up temperature sensor shall be located in the return air duct.

3. During the day mode the outside and remote relief air dampers shall open to their adjustable minimum position with the return air damper closing a corresponding amount. A room temperature sensor shall, through the IFID controller, modulate the heating coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 71F and the cooling coil valve to maintain its programmed setting of 74F. If the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy the room temperature sensor shall also cause the modulation of the outside, return and remote relief air dampers to maintain its programmed setting of 74 F. A mixed air low limit temperature sensor shall override the room temperature sensor and close the outside and relief air dampers if its programmed setting of 55F is reached.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 118 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Unoccupied Mode - the unit is de-energized, the controls shall assume their night positions. The fan shall stop; the outside air damper, remote relief air damper and cooling coil valve shall close, and the return air damper and heating coil valve shall open.

a. Heating – When the reduced setting night control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting of 55°F is satisfied. O.A. damper shall be closed.

b. Cooling – When the increased setting night control returns the pump to operation, the equipment shall operate as described above until the night setting of 80° 85F is satisfied. O.A. damper shall be closed.

5. Freeze Protection: The energy recovery unit will operate as described in Section 15774, Energy Recovery Units, to defrost the heat exchanger. Also, if the hot water coil entering air temperature is below 4045 degrees F, the heating coil valve will modulate fully open.

Z. Energy Recovery Unit (enthalpy wheel) 1. The unit shall be controlled by a field mounted DDC controller, discharge air and humidity sensor, space temperature and humidity sensor furnished and installed by the controls contractor. Unit shall be started and stopped by a time schedule in the DDC controller. Any unit manufacturer device that is furnished with a factory DDC controller shall use EIA standard 709.1.

2. When a zone is in the unoccupied mode, warm-up mode or cool-down mode of operation, the energy recovery unit serving that zone shall remain de-energized. When any associated zone is in the occupied mode the energy recovery unit shall be energized to operate and provide tempered ventilation air as required.

3. Occupied Heating Mode: The outside air damper shall be open, supply and exhaust fan shall run, and the enthalpy wheel shall be energized. A damper end switch shall be used to verify damper position and start the supply air and exhaust air fans once the damper has been proven open. A current switch shall verify run status of each fan. When the discharge dew point temperature of the enthalpy wheel is below 54°F (adj.) and the dry bulb discharge temperature of the enthalpy wheel falls below 68°F (adj.), the unit's compressors shall be indexed on, and the hot gas reheat valve shall be modulated to maintain the unit's discharge dry bulb temperature of 68°F (adj.). Manufacturer will have a factory preprogrammed compressor on/off time build into their safeties and the DDC system shall provide the required programming that does not exceed a total combined 5 minute (adj.) on and a 5 minute (adj.) off time for the compressors. Failure to achieve run status shall be alarmed.

4. Occupied Cooling Mode: The outside air damper shall be open, supply

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 119 ACPS BMS Master Spec

and exhaust fan shall run, and the enthalpy wheel shall be energized. A damper end switch shall be used to verify damper position and start the supply air and exhaust air fans once the damper has been proven open. A current switch shall verify run status of each fan. When the discharge dew point temperature of the enthalpy wheel rises above 54°F (adj.), the unit's compressors shall be indexed on and the hot gas reheat valve shall be modulated to maintain the unit's discharge dew point temperature and dry bulb temperature of 54°F (adj.) and 68°F (adj.), respectively. When the discharge dew point temperature of the enthalpy wheel is below 54°F (adj.) and the dry bulb discharge temperature of the enthalpy wheel rises above 68°F (adj.), the unit's compressors shall be indexed on and the hot gas reheat valve shall be modulated to maintain the unit's discharge dew point temperature and dry bulb temperature of 54°F (adj.) and 68°F (adj.), respectively. Manufacturer will have a factory preprogrammed compressor on/off time built into their safeties and the DDC system shall provide the required programming that does not exceed a total combined 5 minute (adj.) on and a 5 minute (adj.) off time for the compressors. Failure to achieve run status shall be alarmed.

5. Unoccupied Mode: When all associated zones are in the unoccupied, cool-down or warm-up modes of operation, the energy recovery unit shall be completely de-energized. The outside air damper shall be closed, the enthalpy wheel shall be disabled, the return fan shall be disabled and the mixed air damper shall be indexed to the bypass mode. The unit fan shall be cycled in conjunction with the compressors and hot gas reheat valve to maintain the unoccupied space temperature cooling setpoint of 80°F (adj.), and unoccupied space temperature heating setpoint of 65°F (adj.). There shall be a 5°F (adj.) temperature dead band.

6. Safeties a. The two position isolation valve shall fail close under loss of power or any other alarm shutdown scenario. b. The DDC system shall shut down operation of the energy recovery unit and alarm whenever enthalpy wheel discharge air temperature drops below 35°F (adj.) (supply air temperature between the enthalpy wheel and refrigerant coil). c. Condensate Overflow Switch: A condensate overflow switch shall be installed in the drain pan by the unit manufacturer. The condensate overflow switch shall lock out the compressors under an "alarm" condition. The DDC system shall monitor the condensate overflow alarm and indicate an alarm condition on the graphics page for each unit. The unit shall resume operation automatically once this device returns to normal. d. Isolation Valve Control: Each unit shall have a 2-way normally open ball control valve, as further defined herein, to shut down water flow to the unit whenever the compressor is off. The DDC system shall control the 2-position valves, via a separate Digital Output point, to open whenever the compressor runs and close whenever the compressor is off. An end switch shall verify actuator position. The DDC system shall not turn the compressor(s) on until the end switch proves the isolation valve

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 120 ACPS BMS Master Spec

open. An alarm shall be generated if the end switch fails to prove the valve position command.

AA. Energy Recovery Unit (Self contained with enthalpy wheel and hot gas reheat for demumidification). 1. The unit shall be controlled by a field mounted DDC controller, discharge air sensor, space temperature and humidity sensor furnished and installed by the controls contractor. Unit shall be started and stopped by a time schedule in the DDC controller. Any unit manufacturer device that is furnished with a factory DDC controller shall use EIA standard 709.1.

2. When a zone is in the unoccupied mode, warm-up mode or cool-down mode of operation, the energy recovery unit serving that zone shall remain de-energized. When any associated zone is in the occupied mode the energy recovery unit shall be energized to operate and provide tempered ventilation air as required.

3. Unit Start Command a. Factory mounted and wired outdoor air and exhaust air damper actuators are powered. b. Exhaust fan starts after a 10 second delay (adjustable). c. Supply fan starts 5 seconds (adjustable) after the exhaust fan. d. Heating, cooling, and wheel operation as follows.

4. Unit Stop Command (or de-energized) a. Supply fan, exhaust fan, tempering options, and wheel are de- energized. b. Outdoor air and exhaust air damper actuators are de energized and dampers spring return closed.

5. Cooling sequence a. The cooling is controlled to maintain the 68°F (adj.) supply temperature setpoint. The mechanical cooling will be locked out when the outside air is less than 55°F, adjustable. b. Packaged DX Cooling: Compressor shall modulate to maintain the supply air setpoint. This signal will come wired to the factory provided condensing section.

6. Energy Wheel Sequence a. Wheel shall turn at full speed when supply fan is energized and unit is not in economizer. b. Economizer. 1) Modulate Wheel - When economizer mode is enabled and there is a signal for cooling, the wheel VFD modulates wheel speed to maintain the discharge temperature setpoint. 2) The economizer will be locked out when: the outside air is less than 40°F (adj); the unit is operating in dehumidification mode; or there is a call for heating.

7. Dehumidification sequence

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 121 ACPS BMS Master Spec

a. The cooling is controlled to maintain the cooling coil setpoint. The dehumidification sequence will be locked out when the outside air is less than 10°F above the cold coil setpoint. b. The controller will adjust the cold coil leaving air temperature set point between the minimum (50°F) and maximum (55°F) set points, to satisfy the room relative humidity set point (60% adjustable). c. Reheat Sequence - While the unit is in dehumidification mode, the supply air shall be reheated using modulating hot gas reheat. The controller shall modulate the hot gas reheat valve to maintain the supply temperature set point.

8. Heating Sequence a. The heating is controlled to maintain the supply temperature setpoint. The heating will be locked out when the outside air is above 70°F, adjustable. b. Modulating Gas Furnace – DDC will operate the modulating gas furnace to maintain the 68°F supply temperature setpoint (adj).

9. Unoccupied Mode: When all associated zones are in the unoccupied, cool-down, or warm-up modes of operation, the energy recovery unit shall be completely de-energized. The outside air damper shall be closed, the enthalpy wheel shall be disabled, and the return fan shall be disabled.

10. Safeties a. The DDC system shall shut down operation of the energy recovery unit and alarm whenever enthalpy wheel discharge air temperature drops below 35°F (adj.) (supply air temperature between the enthalpy wheel and refrigerant coil). b. Condensate Overflow Switch: A condensate overflow switch shall be installed in the drain pan by the unit manufacturer. The condensate overflow switch shall lock out the compressors under an "alarm" condition. The DDC system shall monitor the condensate overflow alarm and indicate an alarm condition on the graphics page for each unit. The unit shall resume operation automatically once this device returns to normal. c. Supply and Exhaust Air Alarm - Provide switch on each blower and display an alarm in case of blower failure.

BB. Energy Recovery Unit (enthalpy wheel and hydronic heat pump) 1. The unit shall be controlled by a field mounted DDC controller, discharge air sensor, space temperature and humidity sensor furnished and installed by the controls contractor. Unit shall be started and stopped by a time schedule in the DDC controller. Any unit manufacturer device that is furnished with a factory DDC controller shall use EIA standard 709.1. 2. When a zone is in the unoccupied mode, warm-up mode or cool-down mode of operation, the energy recovery unit serving that zone shall remain de-energized. When any associated zone is in the occupied mode the energy recovery unit shall be energized to operate and provide tempered ventilation air as required.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 122 ACPS BMS Master Spec

3. Unit Start Command. a. Factory mounted and wired outdoor air and exhaust air damper actuators are powered. b. Exhaust fan starts after a 10 second delay (adjustable). c. Supply fan starts 5 seconds (adjustable) after the exhaust fan. d. Heating, cooling, and wheel operation as follows.

4. Unit Stop Command (or de-energized) a. Supply fan, exhaust fan, tempering options, and wheel are de- energized.

b. Outdoor air and exhaust air damper actuators are de energized and dampers spring return closed.

5. Cooling and Heating Sequence a. The outside air damper shall be open, supply and exhaust fans shall run, and the enthalpy wheel shall be energized. b. A damper end switch shall be used to verify damper position and start the supply air and exhaust air fans once the damper has been proven open. A current switch shall verify run status of each fan. c. Compressors shall modulate to maintain supply air temperature setpoint of 68°F (adj). Supply air discharge shall have a 55°F low limit; the air leaving the DX coil shall have a 45°F low limit. The lead compressor operation shall be rotated to achieve even run time. The manufacturer's controller shall control the refrigeration circuits, refrigeration / water heat exchanger (head pressure control), refrigerant system safeties and override EMS operations to protect the equipment. When the ERU is running, the EMS condenser water valve shall open to the ERU when a compressor is commanded on. The ERU manufacturer-furnished head pressure control condenser water valves shall modulate / cycle with the compressors. The ERU fans shall continue to operate unless shut down by the low temperature limit. If the ERU is off, and the outdoor air temperature is below 40°F (adj.), the EMS and manufacturer's valves shall be open to allow flow through the refrigerant / water heat exchanger.

6. Energy Wheel Sequence a. Wheel shall turn at full speed when supply fan is energized and unit is not in economizer. b. Economizer 1) Modulate Wheel - When economizer mode is enabled and there is a signal for cooling, the wheel VFD modulates wheel speed to maintain the discharge temperature setpoint. 2) The economizer will be locked out when: the outside air is less than 40°F (adj); the unit is operating in dehumidification mode; or there is a call for heating. 7. Dehumidification Sequence a. The cooling is controlled to maintain the cooling coil setpoint. The

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 123 ACPS BMS Master Spec

dehumidification sequence will be locked out when the outside air is fess than 10°F above the cold coil setpoint. b. The controller will adjust the cold coil leaving air temperature set point between the minimum (50°F) and maximum (55°F) set points, to satisfy the room relative humidity set point (60% adjustable). c. Reheat Sequence - While the unit is in dehumidification mode, the supply air shall be reheated using modulating hot gas reheat. The controller shall modulate the hot gas reheat valve to maintain the supply temperature set point.

8. Unoccupied Mode: When all associated zones are in the unoccupied, cool-down or warm-up modes of operation, the energy recovery unit shall be completely de-energized. The outside air damper shall be closed, the enthalpy wheel shall be disabled, and the return fan shall be disabled.

9. Safeties: a. The two position isolation valve shall fail open under loss of power or any other alarm shutdown scenario. b. The DDC system shall shut down operation of the energy recovery unit and alarm whenever enthalpy wheel discharge air temperature drops below 35°F (adj.) (supply air temperature between the enthalpy wheel and refrigerant coil). c. Condensate Overflow Switch: A condensate overflow switch shall be installed in the drain pan by the unit manufacturer. The condensate overflow switch shall lock out the compressors under an "alarm" condition. The DDC system shall monitor the condensate overflow alarm and indicate an alarm condition on the graphics page for each unit. The unit shall resume operation automatically once this device returns to normal. d. Freezestat: A freezestat serpentined on the surface of the refrigerant coil shall disable the compressor upon sensing a freeze condition. The freezestat shall be adjustable and initially set for 38'F and shall automatically reset. e. Isolation Valve Control: Each unit shall have a 2-way normally open ball control valve, as further defined herein, to shut down water flow to the unit whenever the compressor is off. The DDC system shall control the 2-position valves, via a separate Digital Output point, to open whenever the compressor runs and close whenever the compressor is off. An end switch shall verify actuator position. The DDC system shall not turn the compressor(s) on until the end switch proves the isolation valve open. An alarm shall be generated if the end switch fails to prove the valve position command. f. Supply and Exhaust Air Alarm - Provide switch on each blower and display an alarm in case of blower failure.

V. Water Cooled Chiller, Cooling Tower, Condensing and Chilled Water Pumps.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 124 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. Chilled Water system shall be controlled through built-in controls that shall be energized through the IFID controller, which shall also operate the condensing and chilled water pumps and through interlocks with the chiller and cooling tower.

2. Chiller capacity shall be controlled in response to return chilled water temperatures by loaded or unloading of compressors by a factory approved method. Provide differential pressure switches in the chilled and condenser water piping to prevent chiller from operating unless there is a positive flow of water. Contractor shall provide necessary control and interlock wiring as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. The chiller shall send a pump request to the IFID which will enable the pumps to run in a lead/lag sequence.

3. Condensing water temperature sensor on a fall in temperature shall de- energize cooling tower fan. On a continued fall in temperature, sensor shall position 3-way valve to gradually by-pass the cooling tower.

4. This contractor shall interface with the chiller supplied network interface card. The points listed in the input/output summaries as well as those listed below shall be the minimum acceptable.

1. Chilled water pump request. 2. Chilled water setpoint. 3. Chiller enable/disable. 4. Chiller current draw. 5. Entering water temperature. 6. Leaving water temperature. 7. Compressor starts. 8. Compressor run time. 9. Alarm. 10. Present operating mode.

W. Water Cooled Chillers, Cooling Tower, Plate Type Heat Exchanger, Condenser and Chilled Water Pumps

1) General

a. The IFID controller shall index the chiller self contained controls, which shall operate the chillers, and through interlocks, shall control the stop/start of the condenser and chiller primary and secondary pumps and shall modulate the Heat Exchanger (HEX) two position diverting valves.

b. Chiller capacity shall be controlled in response to return chilled water temperatures by unloading of compressors by a factory approved method. Provide differential pressure switches in the chilled and condenser water piping to prevent chiller from operating unless there is a positive flow of water. Contractor

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 125 ACPS BMS Master Spec

shall provide necessary control and interlock wiring as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

c. A sensor in the chilled water return piping shall control the chillers and HEX supply and condenser diverting valves.

d. The HEX shall be enabled when chilled water is required and the when the outside air wet bulb is 52DEG F or less (adj).

e. The chiller controls shall send a pump run request to the IFID controller which shall start the chiller and condenser pumps and prove operation. Should the lead pump fail an alarm will be initiated, the chiller run command will be removed. Once the standby pump manual selector switch has been indexed, the corresponding chiller shall be enabled, once the pump request has been issued the stand-by pump shall be commanded on within the factory defined time period and flow proven at this point this pump will become the lead pump for the associated chiller and cooling tower until the alarm condition is corrected, and the pump selector switch is manually placed in the normal position, should this pump fail alarms will be initiated and the chiller and cooling tower shall be disabled.

f. This contractor shall interface with the chiller supplied network interface card. The points listed in the input/output summaries as well as those listed below shall be the minimum acceptable.

1. Chilled water pump request. 2. Chilled water setpoint. 3. Chiller enable/disable. 4. Chiller current draw. 5. Entering water temperature. 6. Leaving water temperature. 7. Compressor starts. 8. Compressor run time. 9. Alarm. 10. Present operating mode.

2. ECONOMIZER MODE

a. When the outside air wet bulb is 52 DEG F or less (adj) the HEX diverting valves shall open to the HEX and close to the primary chiller. When the outside air wet bulb is 55DEG F (adj) or higher, the HEX diverting valves shall be closed to the HEX and open to the primary chiller. The primary chiller shall not operate simultaneously with the HEX.

b. The primary chiller pump and condenser pump shall be energized. The tower by-pass valve shall modulate to maintain the chilled water leaving the HEX to 50 DEG F or less (adj). A

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 126 ACPS BMS Master Spec

low limit shall modulate the tower by-pass valve to prevent the chilled water from the HEX from being less than 45 DEG F.

3) SECONDARY CHILLER

a. When the HEX economizer is not able to fully discharge 45 DEG F (adj), when the chilled water temperature rises to 50 DEG F the secondary chiller cooling tower by-pass valve shall close to the top of the tower; the secondary chiller and condenser pumps shall be energized.

b. When flow is proven the secondary chiller self contained controls shall modulate the secondary chiller to provide 45 DEG F (adj) to the system.

c. When the secondary chiller condenser water rises to 70 DEG F (adj) the cooling tower by-pass valve shall modulate open to the top of the tower.

d. When the secondary chiller is operating and the cooling tower fan is de-energized, the secondary chiller condenser water temperature sensor shall prevent the condenser water temperature from falling below 55 DEG F by gradually bypassing the cooling tower. Fan and valve setpoints shall be different and independent. Valve shall be equipped with a hardwired positive positioning device to ensure proper sequencing so that the water does not bypass the cooling tower until the fan is stopped.

e. The secondary chiller cooling tower controls shall cycle the fan to maintain the condenser water temperature at 55 DEG F (adj) or factory recommendation.

4) MECHANICAL COOLING

a. When the combination of the HEX and the secondary chiller cannot maintain the desired chilled water temperature, the HEX diverting valves shall close, the primary chiller cooling tower by- pass valve shall close to the top of the tower and the primary chiller and condenser pumps shall be energized.

b. When flow is proven the primary chiller self contained controls shall start the chiller to provide 45 DEG F (adj) to the system

c. When the primary chiller condenser water temperature rises to 70 DEG F (adj) the cooling tower by-pass shall open to the top of the tower.

d. The primary chiller cooling tower controls shall cycle the fan to maintain condenser water temperature.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 127 ACPS BMS Master Spec

e. When the primary chiller is operating and the cooling tower fan is de-energized, the primary chiller condenser water temperature sensor shall prevent the condenser water temperature from falling below 55 DEG F by gradually bypassing the cooling tower. Fan and valve setpoints shall be different and independent.

f. When the temperature difference between the common supply and return temperature is greater than 12 DEG F (adj),the secondary chiller shall be energized .

g. The primary chiller shall operate and the secondary chiller shall modulate to provide 45 DEG F (adj) to the system.

h. When the temperature difference between the common supply and return temperatures is less than 7 DEG F (adj) the secondary chiller shall de-energize.

X. Makeup Air Unit with gas heat (auto shop areas)

1. Occupied Mode- The unit is energized and controlled by the ATC timed start/stop function. Unit shall operate only when the switch described below is set to” SUMMER” or “WINTER.”

a. The gas temperature controls shall be electronically modulated between high fire and low fire. The unit shall be provided with pre-purged time delay and arranged for positive low fire start.

b. Discharge air temperature shall be controlled through a sensor mounted in the supply duct. An adjustable temperature selector with a range of 55F to 90F shall be mounted in the control panel in the makeup air unit.

c. The factory provided control panel shall be mounted on the wall in the space served. The panel shall have a switch with “SUMMER-OFF- WINTER” positions. The switch shall be interlocked with the associated exhaust fan (to be interlocked under this section) so that when the switch is set to the “WINTER” position, the supply fan and exhaust fan will operate with the heating enabled. When set to “SUMMER” position, the supply fan and exhaust fan will operate with the heating disabled. The panel shall have indicating lights for “BLOWER ON”, “BURNER ON” and “SAFETY LOCKOUT”.

d. An adjustable outside air controller shall be provided to sense the outdoor air temperature and shut-off the burner if the outdoor temperature exceeds 65DEG F(adj).

2. Unoccupied Mode- The unit is de-energized.

Makeup Air Unit (self contained, plate heat exchanger and hot gas reheat for dehumidification)

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 128 ACPS BMS Master Spec

1. The unit shall be controlled by a field mounted DDC controller, discharge air sensor, space temperature and humidity sensor furnished and installed by the controls contractor. Unit shall be started and stopped by a time schedule in the DDC controller. Any unit manufacturer device that is furnished with a factory DDC controller shall use EIA standard 709.1.

2. When a zone is in the unoccupied mode, warm-up mode or cool-down mode of operation, the makeup air unit serving that zone shall remain de- energized. When any associated zone is in the occupied mode the makeup air unit shall be energized to operate and provide tempered ventilation air as required.

3. Unit Start Command.

a. Factory mounted and wired outdoor air damper actuator is powered.

b. Heating, and cooling operation as follows.

4. Unit Stop Command (Or De energized).

a. Supply fan is de-energized.

b. Outdoor air damper actuator is de-energized and dampers spring return closed.

5. Cooling Sequence. a. The outside air damper shall be open and supply fan shall run.

b. A damper end switch shall be used to verify damper position and start the supply air fan once the damper has been proven open. A current switch shall verify run status of fan.

c. The cooling is controlled to maintain the 68°F (adj.) supply temperature setpoint. The mechanical cooling will be locked out when the outside air is less than 55°F, adjustable.

d. Packaged DX Cooling: Compressor shall modulate to maintain the supply air setpoint. This signal will come wired to the factory provided condensing section.

6. Dehumidification sequence.

a. The cooling is controlled to maintain the cooling coil setpoint. The dehumidification sequence will be locked out when the outside air is less than 10°F above the cold coil setpoint.

b. The controller will adjust the cold coil leaving air temperature set point between the minimum (50°F) and maximum (55°F) set points, to satisfy the room relative humidity set point (60%

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 129 ACPS BMS Master Spec

adjustable).

c. Reheat Sequence - While the unit is in dehumidification mode, the supply air shall be reheated using modulating hot gas reheat. The controller shall modulate the hot gas reheat valve to maintain the supply temperature set point.

7. Heating Sequence

a. The heating is controlled to maintain the supply temperature setpoint. The heating will be locked out when the outside air is above 70°F, adjustable.

b. Modulating Gas Furnace – DDC will operate the modulating gas furnace to maintain the 68°F supply temperature setpoint (adj).

8. Unoccupied Mode: When all associated zones are in the unoccupied, cool-down or warm-up modes of operation, the make up air unit shall be completely de-energized. The outside air damper shall be closed.

9. Safeties

a. The DDC system shall shut down operation of the makeup air unit and alarm whenever the discharge air temperature drops below 35°F (adj.).

b. Condensate Overflow Switch: A condensate overflow switch shall be installed in the drain pan by the unit manufacturer. The condensate overflow switch shall lock out the compressors under an "alarm" condition. The DDC system shall monitor the condensate overflow alarm and indicate an alarm condition on the graphics page for each unit. The unit shall resume operation automatically once this device returns to normal.

c. Supply Air Alarm - Provide switch on each blower and display an alarm in case of blower failure. GG. Makeup Air Unit (hydronic heat pump, plate heat exchanger and hot gas reheat for dehumidification)

1. The unit shall be controlled by a field mounted DDC controller, discharge air sensor, space temperature and humidity sensor furnished and installed by the controls contractor. Unit shall be started and stopped by a time schedule in the DDC controller. Any unit manufacturer device that is furnished with a factory DDC controller shall use EIA standard 709.1.

2. When a zone is in the unoccupied mode, warm-up mode or cool-down mode of operation, the makeup air unit serving that zone shall remain de- energized. When any associated zone is in the occupied mode the makeup air unit shall be energized to operate and provide tempered

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 130 ACPS BMS Master Spec

ventilation air as required.

3. Unit Start Command a. Factory mounted and wired outdoor air damper actuator is powered. b. Heating and cooling operation as follows. 4. Unit Stop Command (or de-energized) a. Supply fan is de-energized. b. Outdoor air damper actuator is de-energized and dampers spring return closed.

5. Cooling and Heating Sequence

a. The outside air damper shall be open and supply fan shall run.

b. A damper end switch shall be used to verify damper position and start the supply air fan once the damper has been proven open. A current switch shall verify run status of fan.

c. Compressors shall modulate to maintain supply air temperature setpoint of 68°F (adj). Supply air discharge shall have a 55°F low limit; the air leaving the DX coil shall have a 45°F low limit. The lead compressor operation shall be rotated to achieve even run time. The manufacturer's controller shall control the refrigeration circuits, refrigeration / water heat exchanger (head pressure control), refrigerant system safeties and override EMS operations to protect the equipment. When the ERU is running, the EMS condenser water valve shall open to the ERU when a compressor is commanded on. The ERU manufacturer-furnished head pressure control condenser water valves shall modulate / cycle with the compressors. The ERU fans shall continue to operate unless shut down by the low temperature limit. If the ERU is off, and the outdoor air temperature is below 40°F (adj.), the EMS and manufacturer's valves shall be open to allow flow through the refrigerant / water heat exchanger.

6. Dehumidification sequence a. The cooling is controlled to maintain the cooling coil setpoint. The dehumidification sequence will be locked out when the outside air is less than 10°F above the cold coil setpoint. b. The controller will adjust the cold coil leaving air temperature set point between the minimum (50°F) and maximum (55°F) set points, to satisfy the room relative humidity set point (60% adjustable).

c. Reheat Sequence - While the unit is in dehumidification mode, the supply air shall be reheated using modulating hot gas reheat. The controller shall modulate the hot gas reheat valve to maintain the supply temperature set point.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 131 ACPS BMS Master Spec

7. Unoccupied Mode: When all associated zones are in the unoccupied, cool-down or warm-up modes of operation, the make up air unit shall be completely de-energized. The outside air damper shall be closed.

8. Safeties

a. The two position isolation valve shall fail open under loss of power or any other alarm shutdown scenario.

b. The DDC system shall shut down operation of the makeup air unit and alarm whenever the discharge air temperature drops below 35°F (adj.).

c. Condensate Overflow Switch: A condensate overflow switch shall be installed in the drain pan by the unit manufacturer. The condensate overflow switch shall lock out the compressors under an "alarm" condition. The DDC system shall monitor the condensate overflow alarm and indicate an alarm condition on the graphics page for each unit. The unit shall resume operation automatically once this device returns to normal.

d. Freezestat: A freezestat serpentined on the surface of the refrigerant coil shall disable the compressor upon sensing a freeze condition. The freezestat shall be adjustable and initially set for 38'F and shall automatically reset.

e. Isolation Valve Control: Each unit shall have a 2-way normally open ball control valve, as further defined herein, to shut down water flow to the unit whenever the compressor is off. The DDC system shall control the 2-position valves, via a separate Digital Output point, to open whenever the compressor runs and close whenever the compressor is off. An end switch shall verify actuator position. The DDC system shall not turn the compressor(s) on until the end switch proves the isolation valve open. An alarm shall be generated if the end switch fails to prove the valve position command. f. Supply and Exhaust Air Alarm - Provide switch on each blower and display an alarm in case of blower failure.

Y. Hot Water Finned Tube Radiation and Remote Water Coils.

1. The space sensor located where shown shall transmit space temperatures to the IFID that shall cause the hot water valve to modulate to maintain its programmed heating setting of 71F. The heating valve shall be de- energized when the outdoor air temperature is above 62F

Z. Through the Wall Units

1. Units shall be operated through the time clock function and by the factory supplied on board controls. Unit controls shall include heating

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 132 ACPS BMS Master Spec

valve and system high, low, heat, off, and cool switches. Unit shall cycle to maintain setting heating 71oF - cooling 74oF - night 55oF. Unit shall have manual outside air damper. AA. Cabinet Heaters and Unit Heaters

1. Cabinet and unit heaters shall be operated by remote line voltage stat located as shown on the drawings and strap-on aquastat sensing hot water availability. Unit fan shall cycle to maintain setting (65F).

KK. Electric Cabinet Heater 1. Unit heater shall be operated by a wall sensor to maintain setting of 65̊ F (Adj). Unit shall be locked out when the outside air temperature is above 62̊ F (Adj). LL. Electric Unit Heater 2. Unit heater shall be operated by a unit mounted sensor, unless shown otherwise, to maintain setting of 65̊ F. Unit shall be locked out when the outside air temperature is above 62̊ F (Adj). MM. Electric Wall Heater 3. Unit heater shall be operated by a wall sensor to maintain setting of 65̊ F. Unit shall be locked out when the outside air temperature is above 62̊ F (Adj). NN. Electric Duct Heater 1. Unit heater shall be operated by a wall sensor to maintain setting of 65̊ F. Unit shall be locked out when the outside air temperature is above 62̊ F

BB.Power Roof Ventilators

1. Kitchen Heat Removal Hood PRV - Shall be operated through time clock function constantly during occupied hours, interlocked with respective zone and shall be de-energized during unoccupied hours. All 3 phase fans shall be controlled by the ATC. All single phase fans shall be controlled manually by wall switch. Note: Firestat not required.

2. PRV’s/CEF’s Nos. (Engineer to number PRV's/CEF’s) - Shall be manually controlled at the wall switch in room.

3. PRV’s/ CEF’s Nos. (Engineer to number PRV's/CEF’s) - Shall be operated through the time clock function constantly during occupied hours interlocked with respective zones and shall be de-energized during unoccupied hours.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 133 ACPS BMS Master Spec

4. Dry Food Storage Exhaust Fan PRV - Shall be cycled by. A line voltage thermostat. Unit shall cycle to maintain setting (75oF).

5. Elevator Equipment Room, Electrical Room and Kiln Exhaust Fans - A line voltage thermostat shall cycle the fan and damper to maintain 75o F. In addition, the KILN exhaust fan shall also be manually controlled at the wall switch in the room. The wall switch and the line voltage thermostat are to be wired in parallel. Note: Firestat not required for the kiln exhaust fan.

CC.Ceiling Exhaust Fans

1. Ceiling Exhaust Fans - Shall operate with local switch in affected area or through lighting circuit switch. See Plans.

DD. Utility Vent Set - Shall be operated through time clock function energized during occupied hours and de-energized during unoccupied hours

EE. Main Communication Room- a room sensor shall be provided for monitoring purposes only. FF. The domestic hot water recirculation pumps shall be enabled and disabled based on building occupied/unoccupied modes.

Domestic Hot Water and Tempered Water Circulating Pumps 1. Pumps shall be enabled through the time clock function starting one hour before occupied hours, and shall be de-energized during unoccupied hours. 2. The temperature sensor for the hot water circulating pimp shall cause the BAS to start the pump at 125*F and stop the pump at 145*. 3. The temperature sensor for the tempered water circulating pump shall cause the BAS to start the pump at 95*F and stop the pump at 115*F. 4. The domestic hot water sensor shall monitor the domestic hot water temperature and display information on the graphics.

TT. HUMIDIFER 1. Humidifier shall operate through a wall mounted humidity sensor to maintain a room relative humidity of 50%. UU. ELECTRIC METER 1. The BAS shall monitor the electric meter for consumption on a continual basis. These values shall be made available to the system at all times 2. The BAS shall monitor and record the peak (high and low) demand readings from the electric meter. Peak readings shall be recorded on a daily, month to date, and year to date basis. 3. The BAS shall monitor and record electric meter readings so as to provide a power consumption history. Usage readings shall be recorded on a daily, month to date, and year to date basis.

3.05 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION DEVICES

A. Provide a minimum of one LANID or equivalent function to support OW’s.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 134 ACPS BMS Master Spec

B. Provide gateways as required to support manufacturers configuration.

3.06 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING A. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1. Thoroughly configure ATC system software, network communications, remote operator workstations, portable operators terminals, printers, alarm printers. B. SITE SPECIFIC APPLICATION PROGRAMMING 1. Provide all database creation and site-specific application control programming as required by these specifications for a fully functioning system. Contractor shall provide all initial site-specific application programming and thoroughly document programming. Meet the written sequences of operation. It is Contractor’s responsibility to request clarification on sequence issues that require such clarification. 2. All site specific programming shall be fully documented and submitted for review and approval, both prior to downloading into the panel, at the completion of functional performance testing, and at the end of the warranty period.

C. PASSWORD SETUP 1. Set up the following password levels to include the specified capabilities: a) Level 1: (Owner’s BAS Administrator) 1) Level 2 capabilities 2) View, add, change and delete user names, passwords, password levels b) Level 2: (Programmer) 1) Level 3 capabilities 2) Configure system software 3) Modify control unit programs 4) Modify graphic software 5) Essentially unrestricted except for viewing or modifying user names, passwords, password levels c) Level 3: (HVAC Technician) 1) Level 4 capabilities 2) Override output points 3) Change setpoints 4) Change equipment schedules 5) Exit BAS software to use third party programs 6) Acknowledge alarms

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 135 ACPS BMS Master Spec

d) Level 4: (Non-Technician) 1) Temporarily override equipment schedules 2) Display all graphic data and alarms 3) Trend point data 2. Assist owner’s operators with assigning user names, passwords and password levels.

D. POINT PARAMETERS 1. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog input: a) Name b) Address c) Scanning frequency d) Engineering units e) Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units f) High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition g) High and low value-reporting limits (reasonableness values) which shall prevent control logic from using shorted or open circuit values. h) Default value to be used when the actual measured value is not reporting. This is required only for points that are transferred across the primary and/or secondary networks and used in control programs residing in control units other than the one in which the point resides. Events causing the default value to be used shall include failure of the control unit in which the point resides, or failure of any network over which the point value is transferred. i) Selectable averaging function that shall average the measured value over a user selected number of scans for reporting. 2. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog output: a) Name b) Address c) Output updating frequency d) Engineering units e) Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units f) Output Range g) Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. 3. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital input: a) Name

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 136 ACPS BMS Master Spec

b) Address c) Scanning frequency d) Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.) e) Debounce time delay f) Message and alarm reporting as specified. g) Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the last change of state. h) Totalization of on time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated number of off-to-on transitions. 4. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital output: a) Name b) Address c) Output updating frequency d) Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.) e) Direct or Reverse action selection f) Minimum on time g) Minimum off time h) Status association with a DI and failure alarming (as applicable) i) Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the last change of state. j) Totalization of on time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated number of off-to-on transitions. k) Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. E. ALARMS 1. Alarm Priority Levels: Alarm messages specified below and the section “Sequence of Operation” shall be assigned to one of the following priority levels. Level 1 is the most critical. Level 5 is the least critical. Unless otherwise specified, alarm messages shall be assigned to priority level 5. If the BAS does not have the capability of displaying the entire specified message, it shall condense the message as necessary; if the entire meaning of the message cannot be included, the message shall reference a code number that refers to an alarm code list. The alarm code list shall be provided by the contractor with a third party database, spreadsheet, or word processor software package in a format that is searchable and easy to interface using the alarm code number. Return to normal conditions for all alarms shall be reported at the same priority level. For those alarm level, which include the POT as a reporting location, alarms shall be reported to the POT only during scheduled off- shift hours.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 137 ACPS BMS Master Spec

2. Alarm message reporting locations for each alarm priority level shall be as follows: a) Level 1: All Workstations and Energy Management Alarm Logger Printer b) Level 2: Energy Management and Applicable HVAC Maintenance Shop Workstation, POT’s, and Energy Management Alarm Logger Printers. c) Level 3: Energy Management Engineer Workstation Screen and Applicable Zone Maintenance Shop Workstation Screen. d) Level 4: Energy Management Engineer Workstation Screen. e) Level 5: Maintenance Shop Workstation Alarm Logging Printer. 3. Override alarms: Any point that is overridden through the override feature of the graphic workstation software shall be reported as a Level 3 alarm. 4. Analog Input Alarms: For each analog input, program an alarm message for reporting whenever the analog value is outside of the programmed alarm limits. Report a return to normal message after the analog value returns to the normal range, using a programmed alarm differential. The alarm limits shall be individually selected by the contractor based on the following criteria: a) Space temperature, except as otherwise stated in sequence of operation with a built in delay of 15 minutes (adjustable): Level 2 1) low alarm: 10F below setpoint 2) low return to normal: 8F below setpoint 3) high alarm: 10F above setpoint 4) high return to normal: 8F above setpoint b) Controlled media temperature other than space temperature (e.g. AHU discharge air temperature, boiler water supply, water temperature, condenser water supply, and chilled water supply) with a built in delay of 10 minutes (adjustable): Level 2 1) low alarm: 8F below setpoint 2) low return to normal: 5F below setpoint 3) high alarm: 8F above setpoint 4) high return to normal: 5F above setpoint. c) AHU mixed air temperature: Level 2 1) low alarm: 45F 2) low return to normal: 47F 3) high alarm: 90F 4) high return to normal: 85F

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 138 ACPS BMS Master Spec

d) VAV Duct Pressure: Level 2 1) low alarm: 1.0”w.g. below setpoint 2) low return to normal: 0.5”w.g. below setpoint 3) high alarm: 0.5”w.g. above setpoint 4) high return to normal: 0.25”w.g. above setpoint e) Space humidity: Level 2 1) high alarm: 80% 2) high return to normal: 70% 5. HOA Switch Tampering Alarms: The sequences of operation are based on the presumption that motor starter HOA switches are in the auto position. If a motorized equipment unit starts without a prior start command from the BAS, (as sensed by status sensing device), then BAS shall perform the remaining sequence as specified. BAS shall also enunciate the following Level 3 alarm message if status indicates a unit is operational when the run command is not present. a) DEVICE XXXX FAILURE: Status is indicated on even though it has been commanded to stop. Check the HOA switch, control relay, status-sensing device, contactors, etc. involved in starting the unit. Acknowledge this alarm when the problem has been corrected. 6. Maintenance Alarms: Enunciate Level 5 alarms when runtime accumulation exceeds a value specified by the operator a) DEVICE XXXX REQUIRES MAINTENANCE. Runtime has exceeded specified value since last reset. 7. To eliminate nuisance and invalid alarms, alarms shall not be reported if the software algorithm or point is inactive. 8. See requirements for additional equipment-specific alarms specified under “Sequence of Operation”.

9. During the construction and warranty period the following alarms and their parameters are the only alarms which are to be considered Level 1. These alarms will not require acknowledgement and display return to normal when the alarm condition has cleared.

a) Boiler alarm

b) Chiller alarm

c) Hot water pump alarm- pump shall alarm when command=on and status is off, or command= off and status is on.

d) Chill water pump alarm- pump shall alarm when command=on and status is off, or command= off and status is on.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 139 ACPS BMS Master Spec

e) Condenser water pump alarm- pump shall alarm when command=on and status is off, or command= off and status is on.

f) Supply fan failure alarm- fan shall alarm when command= on and status is off, or command=off and status is on.

g) Freeze stat alarm- implement only on those projects which have this capability.

h) Walk-in freezer alarm- alarm if temperature is greater than 40 Deg F for 30 or more minutes (adj).

i) Walk-in refrigerator alarm- alarm if temperature is greater than 50 Deg F for 30 or more minutes (adj). j) Communications room high temperature alarm- alarm if room temperature is greater than 90 Deg F.

k) Cooling tower basin alarm- alarm if basin temperature is below 32 Deg F (adj).

l) Hot water reset alarm- alarm if the hot water temperature falls 30 Deg F or more below setpoint when the outdoor air temperature is 50 Deg F or less (adj),

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 140 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide pumps to operate at system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Submit also, manufacturer model number, dimensions, service sizes, and finishes.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application, selection, and hookup configuration with pipe and accessory elevations. Submit hanging and support requirements and recommendations.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, servicing requirements, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pumps.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of mechanical seals for each pump.

B. Furnish two sets of cartridges for each side-stream filter.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 END SUCTION LONG COUPLED PUMPS (BASE MOUNTED)

A. Manufacturer:

1. Pumps shall meet model numbers, types, sizes, capacities, and electrical characteristics as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers: Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong or Wilo.

B. End Suction Long Coupled Pump (Base Mounted):

1. The pumps shall be long coupled, base mounted, single stage, end suction, vertical split case design, in cast iron bronze fitted construction specifically designed for quiet operation. Suitable standard operations at operations at up to 250ºF and 250 PSIG working pressures. Working pressures shall not be de-rated at temperatures up to 250°F. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections, electrical motor connections or pump to motor alignment. 2. The pumps shall be composed of three separable components a motor, bearing assembly, and pump end (wet end). The motor shaft shall be connected to the pump shaft via a replaceable flexible coupler. 3. A bearing assembly shall support the shaft via two heavy-duty regreaseable ball bearings. Bearing assembly shall be replaceable without disturbing the system piping and shall have foot support at the coupling end. Pump bearings shall be regreaseable without removal of the bearings from the bearing assembly. Thermal expansion of the shaft toward the impeller shall be prevented via an inboard thrust bearing. 4. The bearing assembly shall have a solid SAE1144 steel shaft. A non-ferrous shaft sleeve shall be employed to completely cover the wetted area under the seal. 5. Pump shall be equipped with an internally flushed mechanical seal assembly installed in an enlarged tapered seal chamber. Application of an internally flushed mechanical seal shall be adequate for seal flushing without requiring external flushing lines. Seal assembly shall have a brass housing, Buna bellows and seat gasket, stainless steel spring, and be of a carbon ceramic design with the carbon face rotating against a stationary ceramic face. 6. Bearing assembly shaft shall connect to a Stainless Steel impeller. Impeller shall be both hydraulically and dynamically balanced to ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5-1994, section 1.4.6.1.3, figure 1.106, balance grade G6.3 and keyed to the shaft and secured by a stainless steel locking capscrew or nut. 7. Pump shall be designed to allow for back pull-out allowing access to the pump’s working components. 8. A center drop-out type coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor. Pumps for variable speed application shall be provided with a coupler sleeve. Coupler shall allow for removal of pump’s wetted end without disturbing pump volute or movement of the pump’s motor and electrical connections. On variable speed applications the coupler sleeve should be constructed of an EPDM material to maximize performance life. 9. An ANSI and OSHA rated coupler guard shall shield the coupler during operation. Coupler guard shall be dual rated ANSI B15.1, Section 8 and OSHA 1910.219 compliant coupling guard and contain viewing windows for inspection

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

of the coupling. No more than .25 inches of either rotating assembly shall be visible beyond the coupling guard. 10. Pump volute shall be of a cast iron design for heating systems with integrally cast pedestal volute support, rated for 175 PSIG with integral cast iron flanges drilled for 125# ANSI companion flanges. Volute shall include gauge ports at nozzles, and vent and drain ports. 11. Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure design. Pumps and motors shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned after installation by the manufacturer’s representative. Motors shall be non- overloading at any point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications and conform to the current standards. 12. motors to come with shaft grounding rings, motors to be premium efficient and a minimum class F insulation rating when VFD’s are supplied loose. 13. Base plate shall be of structural steel or fabricated steel channel configuration fully enclosed at sides and ends, with securely welded cross members and fully open grouting area (for field grouting). The minimum base plate stiffness shall conform to ANSI/HI 1.3.4-1997 for Horizontal Baseplate Design standards. 14. The pump(s) vibration limits shall conform to Hydraulic Institute ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5- 1994, section 1.4.6.1.1 for recommended acceptable unfiltered field vibration limits (as measured per H.I. 1.4.6.5.2, Figure 1.108) for pumps with rolling contact bearings. Pump manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 certified. 15. The seismic capability of the pump shall allow it to withstand a horizontal load of 0.5g, excluding piping and/or fasteners used to anchor the pump to mounting pads or to the floor, without adversely affecting pump operation. 16. Each pump shall be factory tested and name-plated before shipment. 17. Pump shall conform to ANSI/HI 9.6.3.1 standard for Preferred Operating Region (POR) unless otherwise approved by the engineer. The pump NPSH shall confirm to the ANSI/HI 9.6.1-1997 standards for Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps for NPSH Margin. 18. For chilled water applications provide a drain pan under pump and pipe to nearest floor drain. 19. Pump shall meet the latest minimum efficiency as set forth by the DOE.

C. Accessories:

1. Provide pumps with EPT Tungsten/Carbide seal (250ºF maximum operating temperature), Viton seal, or Teflon seal should be used in lieu of the Buna standard seal (225ºF maximum operating temperature).

2.2 VERTICAL INLINE PUMPS (SPLIT COUPLED):

A. Manufacturer: 1. Pumps shall meet model numbers, types, sizes, capacities, and electrical characteristics as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Taco.

B. Split coupled Vertical Inline Pumps:

1. Pump volute shall be of Class 30 cast iron. It shall be designed with a base ring matching an ANSI 125# flange for pump support or with support feet attached to the flange. The pump casing shall be designed suitable for pipeline mounting with the ability of either the inlet flange or the outlet flange on its own, to support

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

the entire weight of the pump when stressed to its maximum test pressure. The casing shall be of double volute design for pumps with inlet/outlet larger than 4” nominal bore. The impeller shall be of cast bronze, enclosed type, balanced to Hydraulic Institute Standards (ANSI/HI 9.6.4.5-2000, Figure 9.6.4.15B). Section 1.4.6.1.3.1, refer to Figure 1.106. The allowable residual imbalance conforms to ANSI grade 6.3, keyed to the stainless steel shaft and secured by a locking capscrew. The shaft shall be guided by a carbon graphite lower throttle bushing. The impeller shall be single suction type for pumps with inlet/outlets up to 10” nominal bore. The impeller shall be double suction type for pumps with inlet/outlet 12” nominal bore and above. 2. The combination motor bracket and volute coverplate shall be a one-piece unit to ensure concentric alignment of the motor to the pump casing. 3. The liquid cavity shall have a tapped flush line with manual valve to remove air from the seal chamber for fast initial start-up. The mechanical seal shall have a compact Rotating Unitized Seal Head design with EPR elastomer bellows and a positive metal-to-metal drive system to reduce the torsional stress on the bellows. The bellows will be pressure supported without creases or folds for long life. Alternatively, the mechanical seal shall be an external balanced type permitting pressures up to 250 psig. 4. The spacer coupling shall be of high tensile aluminum, split to allow the servicing of the seal without disturbing the pump or motor. The motor bracket shall contain a carbon steel coupler guard conforming to both ANSI B15.1 section 8 and OSHA 1910.219 standards for safety. 5. Provide seal flush line fitted with a factory installed 50 micron cartridge filter (cyclone separator when pump differential pressure exceeds 30 psig) and sight flow indicator. 6. Pumps shall be rated for continuous operation at a minimum of 175 psi working pressure (optional 250 psi) and 250°F. The volute shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles, and vent and drain tappings at the top and bottom. 7. Motor shall be premium efficient complying to NEMA or IEC specifications and shall be the size, voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. It shall have heavy-duty grease-lubricated ball bearings, completely adequate for the maximum load for which the pump is designed. 8. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high-grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. 9. Pump shall meet the latest minimum efficiency as set forth by the DOE.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

B. Install long radius reducing elbows or reducers between pump and piping. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, install supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Install pumps on vibration isolators. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Vibration and Seismic controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

D. Vertical in line split coupled type pumps shall be mounted directly in the pipe system without flexible connectors or connection to the floor. The pipe system may be supported by spring hangars or as determined by the ASHRAE standard.

E. Install flexible connectors at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Vibration and Seismic controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

F. Provide valves and piping specialties as indicated on details on the Contract Drawings.

G. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and larger.

H. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

I. Provide drains for bases and seals.

J. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.

1. Align (laser) pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made. 2. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular offset alignment by methods specified in the Hydraulics Institute Standard 1.1 – 1.5. “Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation”. 3. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill base plate with non-shrink nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 4. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturer’s written instructions.

K. Install base mounted pumps on 4” high concrete housekeeping pad, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place, dimensions per contract drawings.

L. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

M. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

N. Control wiring for remote mounted transmitting sensors, switches, etc. shall be provided by controls contractor. All wiring shall be performed per manufacturer’s instructions and applicable State, Federal and local codes.

END OF SECTION

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include pre-charged tubing, refrigerant specialties, and refrigerant accessories furnished as an integral part of packaged air conditioning equipment.

B. Design and installation shall be provided in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for the following products:

1. Each type valve specified. 2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.

B. Submit Shop Drawings showing: 1. The design and layout of refrigerant piping, valves, expansion valves, heat recovery boxes, branch selector boxes, drains, accumulators, traps, hot gas bypass, filters, and miscellaneous specialties, etc. 2. Pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. 3. Interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.

C. Provide a letter from the equipment manufacturer certifying the refrigerant pipe layout indicated on the refrigerant pipe shop drawing is being provided in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s criteria including layout, pipe length, pipe offsets, and pipe size.

D. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators. b. Refrigerant strainers. c. Refrigerant pressure regulators. d. Refrigerant pressure relief valves. e. Refrigerant filter-driers. f. Refrigerant solenoid valves. g. Refrigerant expansion valves. h. Electronic expansion valves.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

E. Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

F. Test Reports: Indicate results of refrigerant leak test and piping system pressure test.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties: a. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric. b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. c. EATON Corporation, Control Div. d. Henry Valve Company. e. Parker-Hannifin Corporation, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Division. f. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article "Pipe Application" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.

B. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping.

C. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR

1. Contractor Option: Pre-Insulated Line Sets a. UL-Recognized b. ASTM C-534 and ASTM E-84 c. Closed Cell Elastomeric d. UV Resistant Rated Insulation

2.3 FITTING AND JOINING MATERIALS

A. Fitting Materials

1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

B. Joining Materials

1. Brazing Filler for Joining Similar Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP series, with melting range from 1190 to 1480°F.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. Brazing Filler for Joining Dissimilar Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg series, with melting range from 1125 to 1370°F.

2.4 VALVES

A. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation.

B. General: Complete valve assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

C. Ball Valves: 1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals, soldered ends. 2. Maximum working pressure: 700 psig 3. Maximum working temperature: 325 degrees F

D. Check Valves - Smaller Than 7/8 inch: 700 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 °F maximum operating temperature; cast brass body, with removable piston, Teflon seat, and stainless steel spring; straight through globe design. Valve shall be straight through pattern, with solder-end connections.

E. Check Valves - 7/8 inch and Larger: 700 psig maximum operating pressure, 300°F maximum operating temperature; cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained Teflon seat disc. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

F. Solenoid Valves: ARI 760, 250°F temperature rating, 700 psig working pressure; forged brass, with Teflon valve seat, two-way straight through pattern, and solder end connections. Provide manual operator to open valve. Furnish complete with NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure with 1/2 inch conduit adapter, and 24 volt, 60 Hz. normally closed holding coil.

G. Evaporator Pressure Regulating Valves: pilot-operated, forged brass or cast bronze; complete with pilot operator, stainless steel bottom spring, pressure gage tappings, 24 volts DC, 50/60 Hz, standard coil; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

H. Thermal Expansion Valves: thermostatic adjustable, modulating type; size as required for specific evaporator requirements, and factory set for proper evaporator superheat requirements. Valves shall have copper fittings for solder end connections; complete with sensing bulb, a distributor having a side connection for hot gas bypass line, and an external equalizer line.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

I. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valves: Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 700 psig setting; selected to ASHRAE 15.

J. Hot Gas Bypass Valve: adjustable type, sized to provide capacity reduction beyond the last step of compressor unloading; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

K. Electronic Expansion Valves

1. Brass bodies with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and machined seat, stepper motor drive.

2. Evaporation Control System: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral control with adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, pre-selection allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.

3. Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, with proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and low), solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating pressure function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control.

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Complete refrigerant piping specialty assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

B. Strainers: 700 psig maximum working pressure; forged brass body with monel 80-mesh screen, and screwed cleanout plug; Y-pattern, with solder end connections.

C. Moisture/liquid Indicators: 700 psig maximum operation pressure, 200°F maximum operating temperature; forged brass body, with replaceable polished optical viewing window, and solder end connections.

D. Filter-driers: ARI 710, 700 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter-drier core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

1. Standard capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration.

E. Suction Line Filter-Drier: ARI 710, 700 psig maximum operation pressure, 225°F maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter element shall be molded felt core surrounded by a desiccant for removal of acids and moisture for refrigerant vapor.

F. Suction Line Filters: 700 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

G. Flanged Unions: 700 psig maximum working pressure, 330°F maximum operating temperature; two brass tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing; flanges for 7/8 inch through 1-5/8 inch unions shall be forged steel, and for 2-1/8 inch through 3-1/8 inch shall be ductile iron; four plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket. Flanges and bolts shall have factory-applied rust-resistant coating.

H. Flexible Connectors: 700 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin bronze or stainless steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 7 inch in length.

I. Suction Accumulators: Provide as manufactured by Refrigeration Research, Inc.

J. Refrigerant Receivers 1. Internal Diameter 6 inch and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 700 psig pressure rating, with taps for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve. 2. Internal Diameter 6 inch and Larger: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; 700 psig with taps for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and magnetic liquid level indicator.

2.6 REFRIGERANT: Type shall be provided to suit equipment being served.

2.7 LOCKING ACCESS PORT CAPS A. Provide locking cap(s) with multi-key(s) for all refrigerant circuit access ports located outdoors.

B. Locking caps shall be as manufactured by Win Air Company or comparable acceptable product.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through- bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 23 Section: "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VALVING

A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and driers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Install a full sized, 3-valve bypass around each drier.

D. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at the top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26. Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.

E. Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position, as close as possible to the evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount the distributor directly on the expansion valve outlet. 2. Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is warmer than the bulb. 3. Secure the bulb to a clean, straight, horizontal section of the suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line. 4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make the connection where it will clearly reflect the pressure existing in the suction line at the bulb location.

F. Install pressure regulating and relieving valves as required by ASHRAE Standard 15.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

E. Install pipe identification

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

H. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

I. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

M. Insulate piping and equipment

N. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with isolation valves and bypass with valve.

O. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.

P. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.

Q. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.

R. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.

S. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

T. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

U. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5.

V. Size piping and install refrigerant piping, traps, specialties as necessary for a complete and operational system in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

W. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "The Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". Unless specified otherwise by the Section, comply with “Installation of Piping - General” as specified in Division 22 Section; “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” and Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

X. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop.

Y. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as possible.

Z. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.

AA. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation.

BB. Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

CC. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.

DD. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury.

EE. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope away from the compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs. 3. Install traps and double risers and where required in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

FF. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

GG. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

HH. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

II. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

JJ. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1” clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

KK. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

LL. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6” shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6” and larger shall be sheet metal.

MM. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 07 for special sealers and materials.

NN. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.

OO. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas bypass valve, compressor suction valve, and as required to protect refrigerant piping system components.

PP. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 1/8” OD, using a bypass line.

QQ. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

RR. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of compressors.

SS. Refrigerant circuit access ports located outdoors shall be fitted with locking-type-tamper- resistance caps.

3.5 INSTALLATION - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant Liquid Indicators: 1. Install line size liquid indicators in main liquid line downstream of condenser. 2. When receiver is provided, install line size liquid indicators in liquid line downstream of receiver. 3. Install line size liquid indicators downstream of liquid solenoid valves.

B. Refrigerant Valves: 1. Install service valves on compressor suction and discharge. 2. Install gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet. 3. Install gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet. 4. Install check valves on compressor discharge. 5. Install check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems. 6. Install refrigerant charging valve in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.

C. Strainers: 1. Install line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, install single main liquid-line strainer. 3. On steel piping systems, install strainer in suction line. 4. Install shut-off valves on each side of strainer.

D. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers. Install relief valve discharge piping to terminate outdoors.

E. Filter-Dryers: 1. Install permanent filter-dryers in low temperature systems. 2. Install permanent filter-dryer in systems containing hermetic compressors. 3. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers. 4. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer upstream of each solenoid valve.

F. Solenoid Valves: 1. Install in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control. 2. Install in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems. 3. Install in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 10 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Pipe Joints:

1. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual." a. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. b. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do no apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve. 2. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (i.e., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. 3. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.

B. Equipment Connections:

1. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping and fittings. 2. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.

3.7 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Inspect, test and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code B31.5, Chapter VI, “Refrigerant Piping and Heat Transfer Components”, 2001, and as follows:

1. All refrigerant tubing shall be tested before tube insulation is applied. 2. Note: The use of compressed air for pressure testing refrigerant tubing will not be permitted. 3. Refrigerant relieve valves, if installed, shall be removed prior to pressure testing and shell openings plugged. After system is tested and found to be completely tight, relief valves shall be reinstalled prior to system evacuation. 4. Each tubing system shall be pressure tested with dry nitrogen. Leaks shall be repaired by removing and remaking the defective joint. No caulking will be permitted. After repair of leaks, system shall be retested and provided tight. 5. Tubing shall be tested per refrigerant manufacturer’s recommendations. Tubing shall be tested at a minimum of 550 psig on the high side and on the low side. Do not exceed manufacturer recommendations. 6. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Section: “Quality Requirements and Execution and Closeout Requirements”: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

C. Repair leaks.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 11 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

D. Retest until no leaks are detected.

3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with industry standards.

C. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new materials and products.

END OF SECTION

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 12 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 25 01

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements

1. There shall be no, chromates, or heavy metals in the chemical formulation. 2. Water treatment shall not in any way reduce the life expectancy of any part of the water cooling equipment, pipe, valves, fittings, and other appurtenances. 3. Water treatment system shall introduce chemicals into each system only when the system is operating. 4. Chilled water systems shall maintain the following conditions: pH 8.0 to 10.5 Corrosion inhibitor 50 to 100 ppm as molybdate Nitrite 500 ppm to 800 ppm 5. Heating water systems shall maintain the following conditions: pH 8.0 to 10.5 Corrosion inhibitor 100 to 150 ppm as molybdate Nitrite 800 ppm to 1000 ppm 6. Systems with Glycol: pH 8.0 to 10.5 Cycles – use inhibited glycol supplied by manufacturer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup instructions. Provide a list of all chemicals and quantities, including material safety data sheets.

B. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. System diagram showing all piping, valving, tubing, treatment equipment, etc.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

E. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified requirements.

F. Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 01. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 23 25 01 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

A. Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with documented experience. The supplier shall employ an experienced consultant, available at reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about water treatment.

1. Provide a list of at least five (5) projects of similar size and type, which have been in operation for at least 5 years. 2. Supplier shall provide 24-hour emergency service, and shall be capable of being on-site within 4 hours notice.

B. Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.

C. Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for components and installation.

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

E. Perform Work in accordance with Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements for addition of non-potable chemicals to building systems and for discharge to public sewers.

F. Provide cleaning of the piping systems and submit a certificate of compliance with the specification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Chemical Water Treatment Products: a. Arc Water Treatment Co. b. Aqua-Chem, Inc. c. Ecolab.

2.2 CHEMICALS

A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water treatment system manufacturer for treating water to meet specified water quality. Provide only chemicals that are compatible with piping materials, seals, and accessories.

B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.

C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.

D. Closed System (Water) Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 23 25 01 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Operate, fill, start and vent systems prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Concentration: 1. As recommended by manufacturer. 2. One pound per 100 gallons of water contained in the system. 3. One pound per 100 gallons of water for hot systems and one pound per 50 gallons of water for cold systems. 4. Fill steam boilers only with cleaner and water.

B. Hot Water Heating Systems: 1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. 2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill with clean water. 3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain. 4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

C. Chilled Water Systems: 1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. 2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. 3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

D. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and acceptance of Architect/Engineer.

E. Flush open systems and glycol filled closed systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill.

F. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.

G. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.

B. Connections

1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: a. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. b. Hot Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 23

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 23 25 01 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Section: "Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” c. Steam Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 23 Section: "Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 2. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. a. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality control testing.

3.5 CLEANING – HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEMS

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Before adding chemicals to the system, isolate coils of heating and cooling equipment, and open bypasses.

C. Flushing portions of the system:

1. After a piping loop has been completed and prior to the installation of strainer baskets, flush that portion of the system. Connections shall be same size as piping being flushed or one size smaller. 2. When a major section of the building has been completed, repeat the same procedure, except that pipe connections shall be limited to 1.5 inch. 3. Flushing shall remove sediment, scale, rust and other foreign substances. 4. After flushing, install strainers and pressure test system and make it tight.

D. Flushing building system: After the various portions of the piping system have been tested and flushed and system is substantially completed, fill the system completely with water, venting all trapped air, and operating the pump.

1. Open a drain at the low point of the system while replacing the water through the make-up at the same rate. 2. Continue flushing until clean water shows at the drain, but for not less than two hours. 3. After flushing, remove strainers and clean and replace them. Remove the bypass around the heat pump condensers and install control valves.

E. Chemical cleaning: Fill system with sufficient detergent and dispersant to remove dirt, oil, and grease.

1. Circulate for at least 48 hours. 2. Open a drain valve at the lowest point and bleed while the system continues to circulate. Assure that the automatic make-up valve is operating. 3. Continue until water runs clear and all chemicals are removed. Sample and test the water until pH is the same as pH of makeup water. 4. After chemical cleaning, remove strainers, clean and reinstall them. 5. Close bypasses and open valves to coils.

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 23 25 01 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

F. Submit certificate and test results.

3.6 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and interconnecting piping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps as indicated on Drawings.

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.

C. Install 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens.

3.7 SIX MONTH FOLLOW-UP SERVICE

A. The contractor shall return to the project site under warranty phase in six months to flush / blow down all Hydronic strainers.

END OF SECTION

HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 23 25 01 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 30 00

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results without alteration of system performance, including increasing the system total pressure.

B. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission of Architect/Engineer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data including performance data and manufacturers technical details of construction relative to materials, weights, dimensions of individual components, schedules for each type of air devices, terminal units, etc. (fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc.) with location/designation/size/model number, profiles, accessories and finishes.

B. VAV Submittals

1. Product Data: Submit data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings indicating airflow, static pressure, heating coil capacity and NC designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 inch to 4 inches wg

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on sheets same size as Contract Drawings, indicating following: a. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other Work. b. Duct layout that further indicates pressure classifications and sizes in plan view; exhaust duct systems that further indicate classification of materials handled as specified in this Section. c. Fittings. d. Reinforcing details and spacing. e. Seam and joint construction details. f. Penetrations through fire-rated and other walls. g. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. h. Hangers and supports, including methods for vibration isolation and building and duct attachment.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

E. Welder Certificates: Certify welders and welding procedures employed on Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.

F. Manufacturer Instructions: 1. Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. 2. Submit special procedures for glass-fiber ducts.

G. Wiring diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for VAV Boxes with electric re-heat coils including ladder type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years experience on projects with ductwork system, VAV, terminal units, etc. similar to this project.

B. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with SMACNA duct construction standards (high, medium and low pressure) latest editions as of date of issue of these specifications. 1. Perform Work according to SMACNA 1884 and 1966.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

B. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months for employed weld types.

C. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed at Project location

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; galvanized steel continuously threaded.

D. Reinforcing Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel. ¼-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8- inch, minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

F. General: Furnish and install miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and sizes necessary to comply with duct system requirements, including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.2 DUCT APPLICATIONS AND SEALING

A. Static-Pressure and Seal Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct according to the following:

1. Supply: a. Supply Fan to Terminal Box 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 4” Positive b. Terminal Box to Terminal Diffuser/Grille/Register 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 2” Positive c. Supply Fan to Terminal Diffuser/Grille/Register 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 3” Positive

2. Return/Exhaust a. Terminal Box to Return Fan/Exhaust Fan 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 4” Negative b. Terminal Equipment (Diffuser/Grille/Register) To Return/Exhaust Box 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 2” Negative c. Terminal Equipment (Diffuser/Grille/Register) To Return Fan/Exhaust Fan 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 3” Negative

3. Outdoor Air a. All Outdoor Air Ductwork 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 2” Negative

4. Relief Air a. All Relief Air Ductwork 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 2” Positive

5. Transfer Air a. All Transfer Air Ductwork 1) SMACNA Pressure Class: 1” Positive and Negative

6. Provide 18 gauge minimum duct construction for the first ten (10) feet of supply and return ducts connected to all air handling units. Additionally, provide 18 gauge minimum duct construction for all ductwork located in shafts, including top and bottom elbows/tees.

B. Duct Sealing:

1. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in “Duct Schedule” Article according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”. All ducts shall be completely sealed.

2. All ducts shall be sealed. As a minimum, seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.3 DUCT SYSTEMS FABRICATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel or aluminum; in accordance with SMACNA 1966 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Latest Edition, Tables 2-1 through 2-52, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations. 3. Make allowance for internal duct lining where required. 4. Determine duct gauges for the longest duct side and use for all 4 sides. Joints and reinforcing requirements apply to the longest duct side. 5. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, vibration or noise as recommended in the referenced construction standards and as required to suit the installed conditions. 6. Do not crossbreak duct which will receive rigid insulation covering. 7. Where tap sizes of divided flow fittings are not indicated, make branch and main connection sizes proportional to their respective air flows and maintain uniform transverse velocities in the fittings. 8. Make radius elbows and radius tee connection with throat radius equal to or greater than 1-1/2 centerline width of the duct. Use vaned elbows where shown and where radius elbows will not fit the space in all square bends. 9. Turning vanes shall be the airfoil type with extended trailing edges 36" maximum length. Where longer vanes are required, use 2 or more sets of vanes with intermediate runners securely fastened together. 10. Bolts, screws, rivet or spot weld reinforcing members securely to the duct on not less than 6" centers. 11. Where ducts are open ended without grilles, registers or other means of stiffening, reinforce and stiffen the open end with standing seams or an angle frame. 12. Paint all cut ends on galvanized angles, rods and other uncoated surfaces with aluminum paint. 13. Where ductwork is not painted or otherwise finished, remove all exposed traces of joint sealers, manufacturer's identification and other markings. 14. Aluminum sheet shall be 3003 H14 alloy or duct sheet, 16,000 PSI minimum tensile strength and capable of being formed to a Pittsburgh lock seam. 15. Reinforcing members for aluminum ductwork may be galvanized steel or aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Where aluminum reinforcing is used, size the member in accordance with ASHRAE recommendations to have rigidity equivalent to listed mild steel angle sizes. 16. Where aluminum ductwork is used, make allowance for increased thermal expansion. Particularly avoid direct contact between aluminum and concrete or masonry walls subject to dampness. 17. Refer to paragraph 2.26 B for Manual Volume Control Dampers specification.

B. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gauge or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard," Figures: 4-1 and 4-2, unless they are lined or are externally insulated.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," Latest Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-10.

1. Slide-on Transverse Joint Connectors Prefabricated slide-on transverse duct connectors and components will be accepted. a. Duct constructed using prefabricates systems will refer to the manufacturer’s guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing and proper joint reinforcement(s). b. Manufacturers of prefabricated systems must have duct construction and reinforcement guidelines along with supporting independent leakage and deflection performance testing. Manufacturer’s prefabricated systems printed assembly and installation procedures must be adhered to during all phases. c. All components of prefabricated system must be clearly embossed with manufacturer’s marking and systems manufacturer clearly identified on all duct labels. No substitution of system components is permitted. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries or Ward Duct Connectors Incorporated “W.D.C.I.”

D. Transverse Duct Connection System

1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. TDC c. MEZ Industries 2. Furnish materials in accordance with all applicable codes, standards and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements. Provide SMACNA recommended rigidity class connections, interlocking angle and duct edge connection systems with sealant gaskets, cleats, and corner clips. 3. All transverse joints and intermediate reinforcement on rectangular ducts shall be as shown in SMACNA standards. Transverse joints shall be selected consistent with the specified pressure classification, material and other provisions for proper assembly of ductwork. a. Slide-on Flanges: 1) Description: Add on factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. 2) Material: galvanized steel, Stainless 304 or 316, Aluminum, Aluminized, PVC coated, Galvannealed, or Black Iron. 3) Gauge and Shape: For duct constructed using prefabricated systems, refer to the manufacturer’s guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper joint reinforcement. 4) Manufacturers or prefabricated systems must provide duct construction and reinforcement guidelines along with independent testing for leakage, deflection, and seismic performance. 5) Independent leakage testing must be for operating pressures of 10 inch wg positive and negative. 6) Manufacturer’s prefabricated systems printed assembly and installation procedure must be adhered to at all times.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

7) Manufacturer’s procedures must include fastener and clean spacing along with details for all system variations including break-away and roofing connections. 8) All manufactured system components must be clearly embossed with manufacturer’s name or markings. No substitution of manufacturer’s system components is permitted. b. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”, Figure 2-2, “Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams”, for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”. c. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”, Chapter 4, “Fittings and Other Construction” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provision in SMACNA’s “HVAC Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”. 4. Casings a. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated. b. Reinforce access door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Furnish hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Furnish clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 x 6 inch size. c. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Furnish 16 gage back facing and 22 gauge perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cu ft minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.

E. Welding: 1. Continuously Welded Round and Oval Duct Fittings: Two gages heavier than duct gages according to SMACNA 1966. 2. Cemented Slip Joints: a. Minimum 4 inches. b. Brazed or electric welded. 3. Prime coat welded joints.

F. Manufactured Turning Vanes:

1. Furnish and install single thickness, multiple radius, airfoil steel turning vanes. Static pressure loss for square ducts shall be no more than 20% of velocity head. Turning vanes shall be furnished with a mounting plate to facilitate installation in ductwork. Turning vanes shall be Harper double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer’s instruction. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking friction fit tabs designed to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 4-3 of the 2005 SMACNA

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Manual, “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible” Third Edition standard. Rail systems with non-compliant tab spacing shall not be accepted. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that required quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. Turning vanes shall be Tuttle and Bailey Model AOOA, Ductmate “PRO-rail,” or acceptable comparable product.

G. Round Branch Fittings:

1. Provide take off fittings manufactured with airtight seams using a locking double seam. Units shall be constructed of 26 gauge galvanized steel (minimum). Units shall have a factory installed volume damper with locking spring loaded quadrant. Damper regulator shall be elevated 2” to allow for insulation thickness. Fitting shall be conical type as described on the plans with a base mounting flange secured by a minimum of four sheet metal screws or pop-rivets. See drawings for alternate “Streamline” branch take-off fittings. All High Efficiency Take-Offs, Conicals, and Collars must have a factory applied gasket along all rivets, co- latches, and flange. All fittings shall be constructed from a minimum of 26 gauge steel. All dampered fittings must have low-leakage hardware with closed-end bearings. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries “GreenSeam Fittings” or acceptable comparable product.

H. Spin-in Fittings

1. Furnish and install spin-in fittings where indicated on the contract drawings, Royal Metal Products Model No. 168 or acceptable comparable product, provide with balancing damper as manufactured by Duro Dyne, Ductmate Industries or acceptable comparable product. a. Material shall be of same construction as duct main.

2.4 DUCT SOUND LINING

A. Rectangular Ductwork

1. Products: a. K-Flex Gray Duct Liner with PSA b. Armacell AP/Coilflex c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. PolyArmor

2.5 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS

A. Fabrication Requirements: All round duct shall meet SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” – current edition.

B. Manufacturers: 1. McGill AirFlow Corporation 2. Semco Incorporated 3. Tangent Air Corp. 4. Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc. 5. Eastern Sheet Metal, LLC 6. TNT Manufacturing 7. Linx Industries. 8. Ductmate Industries

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Furnish materials in accordance with all applicable codes, standards and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

D. Transverse Joints: Select joint types according to SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” – current edition. Utilize Figure 3-2 – “Transverse Joints - Round Duct”.

E. Longitudinal Seams: Select joint types according to SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” – current edition. Utilize Figure 3-1 – “Seams – Round Duct and Fitting”. 1. Round duct larger than 72” in diameter shall have butt-welded longitudinal seams.

F. All round duct in excess of 1” W.G. positive or negative shall be spiral wound.

G. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized steel.

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Air Devices to Supply/Return Branch Ducts:

1. Flexible ductwork shall be Atco UPC #036 or comparable acceptable product, UL listed for Class 1 Air Ducts, Standard 181. Ducts shall be rated for positive pressure of 10" W.G. and negative pressure of 2” W.G. per UL 181.

2. Description: a. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helical-wound spring steel wire. b. Insulation: Fiberglass. c. Vapor Barrier Film: polyethylene d. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. e. Maximum Velocity: 4,000 fpm f. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 degrees F

3. Limit flexible duct 6' maximum. Install flexible ducts, using all recommended fittings, couplings and accessories. Support ducts with wide straps spaced so that horizontal runs do not sag more than 3" in 3'. Cover with duct tape and fasten with duct strap clamps. 180o bends in flexible duct are prohibited.

B. Flexible Ducts at Fan Coil Units, Fan Powered VAV Boxes:

1. Flexible ducts shall be rated for a negative working pressure of 2 inches w.g. 2. Flexible ducts shall comply with latest NFPA Bulletin 90A. 3. Flexible ducts shall be Quietflex Type HPD FlexTM or comparable acceptable product. 4. Flexible ducts shall be ISO 9001: 2000 certified. 5. Flexible ducts shall be Formaldehyde-free and shall be GreenGuard certified.

C. Flexible Duct Elbow Supports:

1. Flexible Duct Elbow Supports shall be Build Right Products-Flex® or comparable acceptable product.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

a. Universal-mount 1-piece, fully adjustable, radius-forming brace to support 4-inch through 16-inch diameter flexible air ducts. b. Classified: UL 2043. c. Material: 100 percent recycled copolymer polypropylene. d. Support Frame Radius: 8 inches. e. Compliance for Flexible Duct Radius: 1) SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 2) ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guides. 3) ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Indoor Installation: UL listed fire retardant neoprene or vinyl-coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 30 oz./sq. yd. Rated to constant maximum temperature of 200 deg. F.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: a. VentFabrics, Inc, model “Ventglas”. b. Duro-Dyne Corp, model 10012 MF6N Specification Grade Neoprene, Super Metalfab.” c. Ductmate Industries, Inc., model PROflex.

B. Outdoor Weather-Exposed Installations and BSL1 and 2 combined lab room air and chemical fume hood exhaust, Class I and II biosafety cabinet exhaust, lab animal exhaust: UL listed ozone and UV-resistant hypalon-coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 24 oz./sq. yd. Rated to constant maximum temperature of 250 deg. F.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements: a. VentFabrics, Inc., model “Ventlon.” b. Duro-Dyne Corp., model “#10011 MF6D Durolon or Dynalon Super Metalfab.” c. Ductmate Industries, Inc., model PROflex.

2.8 AIR DEVICES

A. General:

1. Furnish and install air devices where indicated on the contract drawings. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be of sizes, shapes, capacities and types as indicated on the contract drawings, as required for a complete installation. 2. Performance: Provide diffusers, registers, and grilles that have, as minimum, throw, pressure drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer’s current data. 3. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers, registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling system with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems, which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. 4. For flush mounting, diffuser housing shall be mounted above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling. 5. For lay-in mounting, diffuser housing shall be sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar. 6. For wet or humid areas the air devices shall be of aluminum construction.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Air device selections are based on manufacturers Model numbers indicated on the contract drawings. The following products of: Titus, Carnes, Hart & Cooley, Kruger, Metalaire, Price, Nailer, or Tuttle & Bailey, Inc. will be accepted provided they meet application, performance and design criteria requirements.

C. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be furnished with factory installed adjustable baffles to provide air patterns shown on the plans.

D. Air distribution devices have been specifically selected based on Price performance data. If devices are submitted, other than those specified, the submittal must include an item by item selection of substitutions listed by space location. This list must include model number, size, air pattern, airflow, pressure drop, throw, NC noise level, finish and mounting method for both the submitted and specified device. Where compliance with performance required different dimensions, such as neck or ace size, than the specified item, the submittal must note where these dimension changes occur listing both the original and new dimensions.

E. Finishes of all air devices shall be baked on enamel, colors shall be selected by Architect.

F. Where air terminal devices are installed in duct collars or branches, furnish and install air extractors. Furnish and install control grids, volume dampers and/or other accessories necessary to ensure uniform air flow across the terminal devices. Accessories shall be of the same material as the terminal device. Install fixed blade terminals so that blades block the normal line of vision. Furnish 3 of each type of removable key operators.

2.9 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Backdraft Dampers 1. General a. Provide and install factory fabricated backdraft dampers suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. b. Frame construction shall be based upon individual application and based on manufacturer’s installation instructions for each damper assembly. c. Mill finish is standard unless specified otherwise. 2. Manufacturers a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following: 1) Ruskin Manufacturing. 2) American Warming and Ventilating. 3) Greenheck Corporation. b. Model numbers and features listed below are based on Ruskin Manufacturing. 3. Light to Medium Duty Backdraft Damper (1000 to 1500 FPM maximum velocity) a. Frame: 6063T5 extruded aluminum, 0.090" wall thickness, mitered corners. b. Blades: (1000 FPM maximum velocity) - Ruskin BD2/A1, 0.025" formed aluminum, extruded vinyl edge seals. (1500 FPM maximum velocity) - Ruskin BD2/A2, 6063T5 extruded aluminum, 0.050" wall thickness, extruded vinyl edge seals. c. Bearings: Synthetic. d. Linkage: Concealed in frame. e. Temperature limits: -40°F to +200°F.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 10 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

f. Operational pressures: BD2A1 blades open at 0.03 in. wg. and are fully open at 0.10 in. wg. BD2A2 blades open at 0.10 in. wg. and are fully open at 0.15 in. w.g. g. Accessories: 1) Rear mounted bird screen. 2) Kynar finish. 3) Baked enamel finish. 4) (Color and finish selection by Architect/Owner) 4. Heavy Duty Backdraft Damper (1500 to 2500 FPM maximum velocity) a. Frame: 6063T5 extruded aluminum, 0.0125" wall thickness, galvanized steel braced corners. b. Blades: 6063T5 extruded aluminum, 0.070" wall thickness, mechanically locked extruded vinyl blade edge seals. Ruskin Model BDG. c. Bearings: Synthetic. d. Linkage: ½” tiebars with stainless steel pivot pins. e. Temperature limits: -40°F to +200°F. f. Operational pressures: 1) BDG blades open at 0.12 in. wg. and are fully open at 0.20 in. wg. g. Accessories: 1) Rear mounted bird screen. 2) Adjustable static pressure control. 3) Kynar finish. 4) Baked enamel finish. (Color and finish to be selected by Architect/Owner)

5. Counterbalanced Backdraft Damper a. Frame: 6063T5 extruded aluminum, 0.090" wall thickness, mitered corners with 12 gauge galvanized braces. b. Blades: 0.025" roll formed aluminum with extruded vinyl blade seals mechanically locked into blade edge. c. Bearings: Synthetic. d. Linkage: ” x ½” aluminum tiebars concealed in frame. e. Counterbalance: Zinc plate steel weights, field adjustable. f. Temperature limits: -40°F to +200°F. g. Operational pressures: h. CBD2 to relieve at 0.02 in. wg. i. Accessories: 1) Kynar finish. 2) Baked enamel finish. (Color and finish to be selected by Architect/Owner)

B. Manual Volume Control Dampers

1. General: a. Provide factory-fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades to provide stability under operating conditions. Provide locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Provide end bearings or other seals for ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches or higher. Extend axles full length of damper blades. Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft. All dampers shall be provided with shaft seals to prevent air leakage.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 11 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

b. Where damper or splitter control rods extend through finished walls or ceilings, terminate rods in approved access box equal to Young No. 1 surface mounted quadrant regulator. c. All splitter rods shall be provided with Young No. 656-3/8” or 659 – ½” end bearings using two (2) bearings per splitter damper. d. All ducts larger than 12 x 12 shall be provided with opposed blade dampers. e. For square ductwork smaller then 12x12 utilize the following damper: 1) Control dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. 2) Damper blades shall be 16 ga. Galvanized steel 3V type with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be completely symmetrical relative to their axle pivot point, presenting identical resistance to airflow and operation in either direction through the damper (blades that are non-symmetrical relative to their axle pivot point or utilize blade stops larger than ½ inch are unacceptable). Blade seals shall to TPE. Linkage shall be blade-to-blade concealed in jamp (out of the airstream) to protect linkage and reduce pressure drop and noise. 3) Damper frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners to meet 11 ga. criteria. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant, permanently lubricated, synthetic (acetal) sleeve type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame for maximum service. Axles shall be square and positively locked into the damper blade. Jamp seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type to prevent leakage between blade end and damper frame. 4) The damper manufacturer’s submittal data shall certify all air leakage and air performance pressure drop data in licensed in accordance with the AMCA Certified Rating Program for Test Figures 5.2, 5.3 and 5.5. Damper air performance dat shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition of AMCA Standard 500-D. 5) Basis of design shall be Greenheck model VCD-23, comparable products as manufactured by Ruskin or American Warming and Ventilation may submitted for consideration. f. For Round Ductwork 12” in. Diameter and Smaller Utilize the following damper: 1) Round control dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall consist of 20 ga. galvanized steel frame, blades fabricated from 20 ga. galvanized steel, and ½ in. dia. plated steel axles turning in bronze bearings and EPDM blade seals. 2) Damper manufacturer’s printed application and performance data including pressure, velocity, and temperature limitations shall be submitted for approval velocities to 3,000 fpm temperatures to 250°F and leakage to 4cfm/ft2 @ 1 in. wg. 3) Testing and rating to be in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D. 4) Basis of design shall be Greenheck model VCDR-53, comparable products as manufactured by Ruskin or American Warming and Ventilation may be submitted for consideration.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 12 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. Manufacturers: a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following: 1) Ruskin Manufacturing. 2) American Warming & Ventilating 3) Greenheck Corporation b. Model numbers and features listed below are based on Ruskin Manufacturing. 3. Standard Duty Manual Volume Dampers: a. Frame: 16 gauge galvanized steel structural hat channel with reinforced tabbed corners. b. Blades: 6" wide, single skin, 16 gauge galvanized steel with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. c. Linkage: Concealed in frame, out of the airstream. d. Axles: ½” plated steel hex, positively locked. e. Bearings: Molded synthetic, corrosion resistant. f. Blade seals: PVC coated polyester fabric mechanically locked into the blade edge. Jamb seals shall be flexible metal between blade and frame. g. Control shaft: ½” diameter, removable steel shaft. h. Maximum system velocity: 1500 FPM. i. Temperature range: -25F to +180F. j. Maximum system pressure: 1) 48" width = 2.5 in. wg. 2) 36" width = 3.0 in. wg. 3) 24" width = 4.0 in. wg. 4) 12" width = 5.0 in. wg. k. Selection based on Ruskin Model No. CD36. l. Application: Parallel blade for mixing air streams and exhaust air duty. Opposed blade for outdoor air ductwork upstream of air monitoring station and adjacent to intake louvers suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. <>:

C. Furnish and install access doors and/or panels in high and low pressure ducts, where indicated or required to provide access for control devices, including but not limited to; control dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, airflow monitoring stations, etc.

1. Access doors in low velocity ducts shall be equal to Prefco CAD-101 or Ductmate “Square Framed Access Doors.” Doors shall have galvanized steel frame, with 1” thick, 1-1/2 pcf fiberglass insulation with 24 gauge galvanized steel inner and outer panels. Doors shall be furnished with cam locks. 2. Doors shall be rated for installation in duct systems with pressures up to 8 in w.g. Where required for fire dampers, doors shall be furnished as a factory fabricated unit along with extended sleeve and fire damper (installed downstream of fire damper). Frame shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced corners. Doors shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet with 1” inch thick foil faced duct liner insulation, sandwiched to 22 gauge perforated inner line. Door panels shall have spring clips designed to relieve a minimum of 150 cfm at 2 ½” negative. Panels shall be: 10” x 10” on ducts less than 12” diameter; 12” x 18” on ducts from 12” to 24” diameter; and 18” x 18” on ducts from 26” to 36” diameter. 3. Systems 4” w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich-type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, “HVAC Duct

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 13 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible” Third Edition. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries “Sandwich” style door or acceptable comparable product. 4. Grease exhaust duct doors shall be grease and air tight, UL 1978 listed, meet NFPA 96 standards and all mechanical codes. Grease duct access doors can be sandwich type or with a weld on frame, with/without hinge. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries “Ultimate” style door or acceptable comparable product. 5. All grease duct access doors used shall be accompanied by independent testing in conjunction with each manufacturer’s respective wrap system for high temperature applications.

2.10 INSTRUMENT TEST PORTS

A. Furnish and install instrument test ports in the ductwork to allow use of pilot tube traverses in testing and balancing air systems. Install ports in each main, submain and branch main of all systems including supply, return and exhaust. Place holes on more than 2 sides of larger ducts if required by available pilot tube length. Equip holes with Ventlok #699 instrument ports. Fittings shall extend beyond duct covering.

2.11 DUCT THERMOMETERS

A. Duct thermometers shall be Johnson Service Co., Powers Regulator Co. or approved equal, 4½" dial, 2F divisions, cast aluminum case, mercury actuated, brass movement, 8' copper averaging bulb with bronze braided armor, stainless steel connecting tube as required.

B. Duct thermometers shall be furnished and installed at air handling units as follows: LOCATION RANGE

Outdoor Air Duct -40oF to 120oF Return Air Duct 30oF to 180oF Mixed Air Plenum 30oF to 180oF Supply Air Duct 30oF to 180oF

2.12 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Smoke detectors and associated wiring shall be provided under Division 26 and located and installed under Division 23.

2.13 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: U.L. labeled according to U.L. Standard 555 “Standard for Fire Dampers.” Dynamic fire dampers shall be used in systems where the use of the air moving system may be “on” or “off” to control the movement of smoke during a fire. Static fire dampers shall be used in systems where the air moving systems are automatically shut down during the event of fire. All dampers shall bear the UL555 label and be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 for air pressure drop ratings.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire dampers of one of the following: a. Air Balance, Inc. b. Ruskin Manufacturing. c. Greenheck.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 14 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

d. United Enertech. 2. Model numbers and features listed below are based on Ruskin Manufacturing.

C. Static Type Fire Dampers:

1. Fire Rating: 1½ hour, curtain with 80-90% free area, or multi-blade type when applicable. 2. Blade/Frame: Galvanized or Stainless Steel to match adjoining ductwork. Gauge thickness per UL Listing. Sleeve may be omitted if wall thickness matches damper construction per UL 555. 3. Closure springs: 301 stainless steel (horizontal only) constant force as required by UL listing. 4. Mounting: Horizontal or vertical (floor or wall). 5. Replaceable Fusible Link: 165°F (standard) or 212°F. 6. Selection based on Ruskin Model IBD2 and FD series, or FDR25 (true round type). 7. Factory provided damper/sleeve assembly shall be provided with single side (FAST) or 2-side (PFMA) mounting angles, per manufacturer’s requirement for duct size and fire rating. Duct/sleeve breakaway connections are per SMACNA Fire Smoke Installation Guide and/or damper manufactures installation instructions.

SMOKE DAMPERS: D. General: U.L. labeled according to UL Standard 555S, “Standard Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.” Dampers shall bear the U.L. classification label. As part of the U.L. qualification, dampers shall be rated to a minimum 2000 FPM at 4” W.G. and 250°F.

E. Manufacturers:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide smoke dampers of one of the following: a. Air Balance, Inc. b. Ruskin Manufacturing. c. Greenheck. d. United Sheet Metal. 2. Model numbers and features listed below are based on Ruskin Manufacturing.

F. Smoke Damper:

1. Assembly Rating: 250°F, or 350°F 2. Actuator: Electric – (Factory mounted) Damper and actuator shall be factory cycled to verify proper operation prior to shipping. 3. Provide damper position indicator (linked directly to blade, integral to actuator, or shaft mounted type) to remotely indicate damper position. 4. Provide damper test switch (DTS). Damper mounted or remote mounted. 5. Blade Material: Galvanized, stainless Steel or aluminum to match adjoining ductwork. Single piece airfoil, V-groove or double skin low profile aerodynamic shaped. Gauge as required by UL listing. 6. Frame: Galvanized, stainless steel, or aluminum to match adjoining ductwork. Gauge thickness per manufacturer’s requirement for duct size and rating. 7. Bearings: Stainless steel, pressed in frame. 8. Blade Seal: Silicone edge type for smoke seal to 450°F, or stainless steel flexible compression type.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 15 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

9. Axle: ½” diameter steel. 10. Provide LP series for ducts 6”x6” up to 36”to14”. Provide SDRS25 for round duct up to 24” diameter. Provide SD36 series for duct systems under 2,000fpm. Provide SD60 (galvanized) or SD50 (aluminum) for duct systems that exceed 2,000fpm.

2.14 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS:

A. General: U.L. labeled according to UL Standard 555S, “Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.” Dampers shall bear the UL classification label. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall be rated to a minimum 2000 FPM at 4” W.G. and 250°F.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide combination fire and smoke dampers of one of the following:

a. Air Balance, Inc. b. Ruskin Manufacturing. c. Greenheck. d. United Sheet Metal.

2. Model numbers and features listed below are based on Ruskin Manufacturing.

C. Combination Fire and Smoke Damper:

1. Fire/ Leakage Rating: 1½ hour/ Class 1 or Class 2, 3 hour /Class 1. 2. Assembly Rating: 250°F (standard), or 350°F (optional) 3. Actuator: Electric or pneumatic – (Factory mounted) Damper and actuator shall be factory cycled to verify proper operation prior to shipping. 4. Heat actuated responsive device for controlled closure: 165°F (standard), 212°F, 250°F or 350°F 5. Provide damper position indicator (linked directly to blade, integral to actuator, or shaft mounted type) to remotely indicate damper position. 6. Provide damper test switch (DTS). Damper mounted or remote mounted. 7. Blade Material: Galvanized, or Stainless Steel to match adjoining ductwork. Single piece airfoil, V-groove or double skin low profile aerodynamic shaped. Gauge as required by UL listing. 8. Frame: Galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum to match adjoining ductwork. Gauge thickness per manufacturer’s requirement for duct size and rating. 9. Bearings: Stainless steel, pressed in frame. 10. Blade Seal: Silicone edge type for smoke seal to 450°F, or stainless steel flexible compression type. 11. Axle: ½” diameter steel. 12. Provide LP series for ducts 6”x6” up to 36”x14”. Provide FSDRS25 for round duct up to 24” diameter. Provide FSD36 series for duct systems under 2,000fpm. Provide FSD60 for duct systems that exceed 2,000fpm.

2.15 DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS

A. General:

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 16 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1. Silencers shall be of the size, configuration, capacity and acoustic performance as scheduled on the drawings. Silencers shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer. 2. Silencer inlet and outlet connection dimensions must be equal to the duct sizes shown on the drawings. Duct transitions at silencers are not permitted unless shown on the contract drawings or approved by the project engineer.

B. Construction: 1. Silencers shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA Standards for the pressure and velocity classification specified for the air distribution system in which it is installed. 2. Casing seams and joints shall be lock-formed and sealed or stitch welded and sealed except as noted, to provide leakage-resistant construction. 3. Airtight construction shall be achieved by use of a duct-sealing compound supplied and installed by the contractor at the jobsite. 4. Perforated steel shall be adequately stiffened to insure flatness and form. Spot welds shall be painted as required. 5. Fire-Performance Characteristics: a. Silencer assemblies, including acoustic media fill, natural cotton fiber, sealants and acoustical spacers shall have Class 1 flame- spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 6. Material gauge thickness: a. Material gauges noted in other sections are minimums and shall increase as required for the system pressure and velocity classification. b. The silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8 inches water gauge.

C. Outer casing shall be ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 galvanized sheet steel, gauge as listed below 1. Rectangular Silencers, including STC-rated models: 22 gauge

D. Rectangular Elbow Silencers: 1. Acoustical splitter/baffles shall be internally radiused and aerodynamically designed for efficient turning of the air.

E. Inner perforated metal liner shall be supplied in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 galvanized sheet steel in the following gauge thicknesses according to silencer type or connection size: 1. Rectangular Silencers: 22 gauge

F. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism: 1. Absorptive (Dissipative) and Film Lined Silencers: a. Standard Acoustic media: 1) Media shall be of acoustic quality, shot-free glass fiber insulation with long, resilient fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Glass fiber density and compression shall be as required to insure conformance with laboratory test data.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 17 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2) Media shall be packed with a minimum of 15% compression during silencer assembly. 3) Media shall be resilient such that it will not pull apart during normal applications, and shall resist settling, breakdown, and sagging from vibration. Media shall not rot, mildew, or otherwise deteriorate, and shall have sufficient flexibility to readily form around corners and curved surfaces. 4) Media shall not cause or accelerate corrosion of aluminum or steel.

G. Media Protection: 1. Film Lined: a. The acoustic media shall be completely wrapped with polymer film to help prevent shedding, erosion and impregnation. b. The wrapped acoustic media shall be separated from the perforated metal by a factory-installed acoustically transparent spacer. c. The spacer shall be flame retardant and erosion resistant. d. Mesh, screen or corrugated perforated liner will not be acceptable as a substitute for the specified spacer. e. Silencer manufacturer shall provide a written test report showing silencer assemblies have Class 1 flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.

2.16 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS

A. Single Duct Variable Air Volume Terminal (Pressure Independent)

1. General: a. Basis of design shall be Price Model SDV single duct, variable air volume terminal; products manufactured by Titus, Nailor, or MetalAire shall be submitted for review as a comparable product. Single duct variable air volume terminals shall meet types, sizes, capacities and electrical characteristics as indicated on the contract drawings. b. Terminals shall be AHRI 880 certified and carry the AHRI seal. Non- certified terminals may be submitted after testing at an independent testing laboratory under conditions selected by the engineering consultant in full compliance with AHRI 880. 2. Performance: a. At an inlet velocity of 2000 fpm, the minimum static pressure required to operate any terminal size shall not exceed 0.02 inch wg for the basic terminal. b. Sound ratings for the terminal shall not exceed scheduled NC values. Sound performance shall be AHRI certified when tested in accordance with AHRI 880-2011 using the attenuation values shown in AHRI 885- 2008 Appendix E. 3. Casing Construction: a. The terminal casing shall be minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel. The terminal casing shall be internally lined b. Actuators shall be capable of supplying at least 35 in-lbs of torque to the damper shaft, and shall be mounted externally for service access.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 18 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. The inlet valve shall be a consistent diameter to retain flex duct and provide a stop for hard duct. The inlet valve shall include a 1/8 inch raised single bead for added strength. The discharge connection shall be slip and drive construction. d. The casing shall be constructed for a maximum leakage rate of: 1) 1% of the unit maximum airflow at 1 inch wg inlet static pressure. 2) 2% of the unit maximum airflow at 3 inches wg inlet static pressure. 4. Casing Liner: a. Casing Insulation – selection 1) Fiber-Free Liner: a) The terminal casing shall be internally lined with engineered polymer foam insulation. The insulation shall meet the requirements of UL 181 and ASHRAE 62.1, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Insulation shall be 1.5 pound density, closed cell foam. Exposed fiberglass is not acceptable. The insulation shall be secured to the unit casing with adhesive. 5. Damper Construction: a. The damper shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel with a solid shaft rotating in self-lubricating bearings. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position over the full range of 90 degrees. The damper shall incorporate two heavy duty stop pins to accurately position the damper in the closed and open positions, and shall also include a peripheral gasket to limit close-off leakage to a maximum value of 2% of the unit maximum airflow at 3 inches wg inlet static pressure. The damper assembly shall be tested to 1.25 million cycles, or the equivalent of 100 full open/closures per day for 35 years, with no visible signs of wear, tear, or failure of the damper assembly after such testing. 6. Airflow Sensor: a. The airflow sensor shall be a differential pressure airflow device measuring total and static pressures, and mounted to the inlet valve. Plastic parts shall be fire-resistant, complying with UL 94. The airflow sensor shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant. Material containing polybrominated compounds shall not be acceptable. Control tubing shall be protected by grommets at the wall of the terminal unit housing. The airflow sensor shall include twelve total pressure sensing ports, four static pressure sensing ports, and a center averaging chamber that amplifies the sensed airflow signal. The airflow sensor signal accuracy shall be plus or minus five percent throughout the terminal’s operating range.

7. Accessories: a. Low Leakage Construction: 1) The terminals shall be supplied with a factory low leakage construction up to [three], [four], or [six] inches wg internal pressure. 2) Terminals with low leakage construction shall include an access door supplied with compression style gasketing and quarter turn latches shall be flanged and gasketed at all external casing seams. The low leakage inner casing seams shall be sealed with duct sealant or Hardcast tape to prevent thermal transfer and further reduce air leakage. Low leakage terminal units shall be individually factory tested to ensure compliance with project

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 19 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

specific leakage requirements. Leakage test results shall be documented on a label affixed to each certified low leakage unit. b. Hot Water Heating Coils: 1) Hot water reheat coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel casing with slip and drive construction for attachment to metal ductwork. Coils shall be factory installed on the terminal discharge. Fins shall be 0.0045 inch thick aluminum formed in high heat transfer sine wave configuration, mechanically bonded to seamless tubes. Tubes shall be copper with a minimum wall thickness of 0.016-inch and with male solder header connections. Coils shall be leak tested to 390 psi with minimum burst pressure of 1800 psi at ambient temperature. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required per the plans. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with AHRI 410. 8. Controls: a. Direct Digital VAV Controls 1) Direct Digital Controls a) Terminal unit manufacturer shall factory mount the direct digital controller which will be furnished by the Building Automation System Supplier. Perform continually check and provide results to Building Automation System Supplier. Field mounted DDC controls are not acceptable. 2) Testing/Verification a) Factory set and check all Price controllers to within 5% of scheduled maximum and minimum settings. Base performance on tests conducted in accordance with AHRI 880.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Metal Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA 1966 Duct Construction Standards – metal and flexible.

B. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Ducts: Comply with SMACNA 1884.

C. Insulated Flexible Duct Fittings: 1. Join each flexible duct section to main trunk duct through sheet metal fittings. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Equip fittings with factory-installed volume damper having positive locking regulator. 4. Provide insulation guard with fittings installed in lined ductwork.

D. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

E. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 20 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

F. Install louvers and accessories complete with mounting frames as indicated on the drawings. Coordinate all rough opening requirements with all trades prior to fabrication or procurement of any penetrations.

G. Make all penetrations in exterior walls watertight and weatherproof in accordance with manufacturer’s specific installations instructions.

H. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

I. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum.

J. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.

K. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

L. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any.

M. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.

N. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.

O. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

P. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

Q. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-½ inches.

R. Outdoor Ductwork: Protect ductwork and ductwork supports, linings, and coverings from weather.

S. Seam and Joint Sealing:

1. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows: a. Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations. 2. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.

T. Connections:

1. General: Installation specified is for conventional connections not exposed to the weather, high heat, or corrosive agents.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 21 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 23 Section: “HVAC Distribution.” 3. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Construction Standards,” Figures 2-7 and 2-8. 4. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Figures 2-16 through 2-18. 5. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Figure 2-19. 6. Thermometers and controllers: Cut openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Cut pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to eliminate against air leakage.

U. Field Quality Control:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with test requirements.

V. Adjusting and Cleaning:

a. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve required air flow. Refer to Division 23 Section: “TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING for HVAC” for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems. b. Vacuum duct systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris. c. During construction install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent dust from entering ductwork system.

W. Duct Liner Application

1. Adhere insulation with 90% adhesive coverage with mechanical pin fasteners. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 6. Follow liner manufacturer’s installation instructions.

X. Installation of Flexible Duct Elbow Supports

1. Install flexible duct elbow supports in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Install flexible duct elbow supports over outer jacket of flexible ducts to form smooth, 90-degree ends to eliminate flexible duct kinks and airflow restrictions. 3. Make bends in flexible ducts with minimum of 1-duct diameter centerline radius. 4. Install flexible duct elbow supports at flexible duct 90-degr bends at following locations:

a. Diffusers. b. Grilles.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 22 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. Registers. d. Air devices with round inlets and outlets. e. HVAC equipment with round inlets and outlets. f. Flexible ducts used as elbows. g. As indicated on the Drawings.

3.2 LEAK TESTING AIR DISTRIBUTION AND DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Duct Leak Testing:

1. Test the entire ductwork air distribution system. 2. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leak testing and for compliance and test requirements. 3. Prior to installing insulation, conduct tests in accordance with SMACNA HVAC air duct leakage testing procedures of reach section of the system. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system operating pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the maximum design operating pressure. 4. Determine leakage from entire system or from each section of the system being tested by relating leakage to the surface area of the test section. 5. Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual “latest edition”. Comply with requirements for leakage listed in Division 23 Section: “Air Distribution” – Duct Applications and Sealing. 6. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable leakage. 7. Record leakage testing results on forms from the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, “latest edition”. Submit results within one week of testing.

3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Tables 5-1 through 5-4 and Figures 5-1 through 5-11.

B. Fabricate and support ducts according to SMACNA 1884 and 1966.

C. Threaded Rods: Provide double nuts and lock washers.

D. Building Attachments: 1. Provide concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 2. If possible, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 3. Powder-Actuated Concrete Fasteners: a. Use only for slabs more than 4 inches thick. b. Install after concrete is placed and completely cured. c. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

E. Hanger Spacing: 1. Comply with SMACNA 1884 and 1966. 2. Install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. 3. Extend strap supports down both sides of ducts and turn under bottom at least 1 inch. 4. Secure hanger to sides and bottom of ducts with sheet metal screws.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 23 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

F. Hangers Exposed to View: Provide threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

G. Vertical Ducts: 1. Support with steel angles or channel secured to sides of duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets. 2. Support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16 feet.

H. Upper Attachments: 1. Attach to structures. 2. Selection and Sizing: Provide pull-out, tension, and shear capacities as required for supported loads and building materials.

I. Penetrations: 1. Avoid penetrations of ducts with hanger rods. 2. If unavoidable, provide airtight rubber grommets at penetrations.

J. Domestic Clothes Dryer Exhaust Ducts shall be supported at 4-foot intervals and secured in place.

3.4 AIR DEVICE INLETS AND OUTLETS

A. Installation:

1. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. 2. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work including, but not limited to; sprinkler heads, exit signs, lights, speaker systems, electrical pullbox access, architectural features and ceiling support system. 3. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on the contract drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, locate air device units in center of acoustical ceiling modules or between plaster framing supports/framing in hard ceiling construction. 4. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets matte black 5. Insulate the backs of supply diffusers and tape all around insulation seems.

3.5 AIR TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Connect to ductwork

B. Install ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.

C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.

D. Support air terminal units connected by flexible duct independently of flexible duct.

E. Install transition piece to match flexible duct size to inlet or outlet of variable air volume terminal.

F. Install minimum of 6 ft of 1 inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 24 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3.6 DAMPERS, GENERAL:

A. Provide access to damper components for maintenance of linkage, adjustments and visual inspection.

B. All dampers shall be installed with their flange outside of the airstream.

C. Coordinate access to damper with all trades.

D. Coordinate motor operated damper requirements with Division 23 Section: “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.”

E. Fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be installed per manufacturer’s U.L. approved printed installation instructions. Provide access panels for fusible links with a minimum size requirement of 12" x 16" inside clear or as required by the Engineer to successfully reach the fusible link assembly for replacement.

F. Install volume control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner material.

G. Make all adjustments to dampers for proper operation. Backdraft dampers shall be set by the Balancing Contractor upon final system adjustment.

H. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

I. Test and inspect fire and fire/smoke dampers after the first year of installed service, per NFPA 80 and NFPA 105 requirements.

3.7 DUCT MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS:

A. Install duct mounted access doors at the following locations, and as shown on the contract drawings:

1. Spaced every 50 feet of straight duct. 2. Upstream of each elbow (for grease ducts only) 3. Upstream of each re-heat coil. 4. Before and after each duct mounted filter. 5. Before and after each duct mounted coil. 6. Before and after each duct mounted fan. 7. Before and after each automatic control damper. 8. Before and after each Fire damper, smoke damper, combination fire and smoke damper 9. Downstream of each VAV box. 10. Install at locations for cleaning kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96.

B. Duct access doors shall be installed centered in the width of the horizontal dimension or vertical dimension taking advantage of the most accessible installation for maintenance.

C. Access doors shall not be covered with insulation.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 25 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

D. Install doors prior to performance of ductwork leak testing.

3.8 DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS:

A. Install duct silencers with flanged connection outside of the airstream.

B. Locate duct silencers in the airstream as indicated on the contract drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s published data for optimum performance location.

C. Coordinate and label direction of airflow prior to installation.

D. Label duct silencers for supply air or return air, etc. duty.

E. Seal all joints as specified.

3.9 TERMINAL HEATING UNITS, GENERAL:

A. Inspection - Examine all areas and conditions under which Terminal Reheat Units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work in questionable areas until conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to meet installation requirements.

B. Installation of Terminals:

1. General: Install Terminal Reheat Units as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 2. Locate each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work. Maintain sufficient clearance around operating parts for maintenance. Control panels shall have a minimum of 36" unobstructed space for controller access, but in no case less space than recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Fan powered terminal units shall be installed to allow removal of the unit bottom providing full access to the unit. This access shall not be subject to removal of light fixtures or ceiling air devices, etc. 4. Duct inlet connections to air terminals shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for straight length of duct and diameter required for maximum controller performance. Reductions to inlets are not permitted. 5. Coordinate units with reheat coils to locate the heating coil control valve and terminal unit control box are on the same side. (This applies to electric and hydronic heating coils.) 6. Transition ductwork from terminal unit with soundlining as detailed on the contract drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer to deaden sound transmission. 7. Install fan powered terminal units with vibration isolation. 8. Demonstrate that all air terminal units and duct connections are leak tight prior to operation. Repair or replace any damaged units prior to system operation and retest for compliance. 9. Insulate terminal units to avoid condensation at duct connections and on hydronic heating coil to minimize heat loss. Refer to Division 23 Section: “HVAC Insulation”. 10. Label all terminal units in accordance with Division 23 Section: “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment” and clearly position identification for unit within plain sight.

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 26 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Cleaning: Clean all factory exposed surfaces, inside and out prior to operation. Repair any marred surfaces with manufacturer’s touch-up paint to match factory finish in color and texture.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Division 01 Section: “Execution and Closeout Requirements”: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.

C. To obtain sufficient airflow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other half.

D. Vacuuming: 1. Clean duct systems with high-power vacuum machines. 2. Install access openings into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

E. Protect sensitive equipment with temporary filters or bypass during cleaning.

END OF SECTION

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 27 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 34 00

HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, and ductwork and accessory connections.

B. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit Manufacturer’s installation, operations, and maintenance manual, including instructions on installation, operations, maintenance, pulley adjustment, receiving, handling, storage, safety information and cleaning. A troubleshooting guide, parts list, warranty and electrical wiring diagrams.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOWNBLAST CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS

A. Belt Drive Roof Downblast Centrifugal Exhaust Fans: 1. Manufacturer: a. Fans shall meet model numbers, types, sizes, capacities and electrical characteristics as indicated on the contract drawings. Acceptable manufacturers: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn Ventilator or Twin City Blower. 2. General: a. Maximum continuous operating temperature of 180 Fahrenheit. b. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's engraved metal nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number. 3. Wheel: a. Wheel shall be constructed of aluminum. b. Wheel shall be non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal. c. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05. d. The wheel cone and fan inlet shall be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. 4. Motors: a. Motor enclosures: Totally enclosed fan cooled b. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and furnished at the specific voltage and phase. c. Motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream.

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

d. For motor cooling there shall be fresh air drawn into the motor compartment through an area free of discharge contaminants. e. Motor shall be accessible for maintenance. 5. Shafts and Bearings: a. Fan shaft shall be ground and polished solid steel with an anti corrosive coating. b. Permanently sealed bearings or pillow block ball bearings. c. Bearing shall be selected for a minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours (equivalent to L50 average life of 500,000 hours), at maximum cataloged operating speed. d. Bearings shall be 100 percent factory tested. e. Fan Shaft first critical speed shall be at least 25 percent over maximum operating speed. 6. Housing: a. Motor cover, shroud, curb cap, and lower windband shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. b. Shroud shall have a integral rolled bead for extra strength. c. Shroud shall be drawn from a disc and direct air downward. d. Lower windband shall have a formed edge for added strength. e. Motor cover shall be drawn from a disc. f. All housing components shall have final thicknesses equal to or greater then preformed thickness. g. Curb cap shall have pre-punched mounting holes to ensure correct attachment. h. Shall have rigid internal support structure. i. Shall be leak proof. 7. Housing Supports and Drive Frame: a. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. 8. Vibration Isolation: a. Shall be double studded or pedestal mount true isolators. b. Shall have no metal to metal contact. c. Shall be sized to match the weight of each fan. 9. Disconnect Switches: a. Disconnect shall be: 1) NEMA 3R: outdoor application falling rain water. 2) Shall have positive electrical shut-off. 3) Shall be wired from fan motor to junction box installed within motor compartment. 10. Drive Assembly: a. Belts, pulleys, and keys shall be oversized for a minimum of 150 percent of driven horsepower. b. Belts shall be static free and oil resistant. c. Shall be fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. d. The motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing. e. Shall be readily accessible for maintenance. 11. Accessories: a. Birdscreen: 1) Material Type: Aluminum 2) Shall protect fan discharge. b. Roof Curbs: 1) Mounted onto roof with fan.

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2) Material: Aluminum 3) Insulation thickness: 2 inch c. Curb Extension: 1) Material Type: Aluminum 2) Coating: Permatector d. Curb Seal: 1) Rubber seal between the fan and the roof curb. e. Dampers: 1) Type: Gravity 2) Shall be balanced for minimal resistance to flow. 3) Shall have galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes. f. Finishes: 1) Types: Permatector- thermo-setting polyester urethane g. Hinge Kit: 1) Aluminum hinges 2) Allows the fan to tilt always for access to wheel and ductwork for inspection and cleaning. h. Hinge Base: 1) Aluminum hinges 2) Hinges and retraint cables are mounted to base (sleeve). 3) Allow the fan to tilt away for access to wheel to ductwork for inspection and cleaning. i. Pressure Probe 1) Provide ¼ inch diameter tube in the fan venture to allow hook up to manometer. j. Tie-Down Points: 1) Provide four heavy gauge aluminum brackets to secure the fan in heavy wind applications.

2.2 UPBLAST CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS

A. Belt Drive Roof Upblast Centrifugal Exhaust Fans: 1. Manufacturer:

a. Fans shall meet model numbers, types, sizes, capacities, and electrical characteristics as indicated on the contract drawings. Acceptable manufacturers: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn Ventilator or Twin City Blower Company. 2. General: a. Fan shall discharge air up and away from the mounting surface. b. Upblast fan shall be for roof mounted applications. c. Shall have a maximum continuous operating temperature is 400 Fahrenheit.. d. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's engraved metal nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number. 3. Wheel: a. Material type: non-stick coating similar to Teflon, coating allows buildup on wheel to be easily removed. b. Shall be non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal. c. Shall be statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05. d. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

4. Motors: a. AC Induction Motor: b. Electronically Commutated Motor: 1) Motor enclosures: Open type. 2) Motor shall be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Examples of unacceptable motors are: Shaded Pole, Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC), Split Phase, Capacitor Start and 3 phase induction type motors. 3) Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase. 4) Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the motor. 5) Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal. 6) Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds. 5. Shafts and Bearings: a. Fan shaft shall be ground and polished solid steel with an anti corrosive coating. b. Shall have permanently sealed bearings or pillow block ball bearings. c. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours (equivalent to L50 average life of 500,000 hours), at maximum cataloged operating speed. d. Bearings shall be 100 percent factory tested. e. Fan Shaft first critical speed shall be at least 25 percent over maximum operating speed. 6. Housing: a. Shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum including exterior housing, curb cap, windband, and motor compartment housing. Galvanized material is not acceptable. b. Housing shall have a rigid internal support structure. c. Windband shall be of one piece spun aluminum construction and maintain original material thickness throughout the housing. d. Windband shall include an integral rolled bead for strength. e. Curb cap base shall be fully welded to windband to ensure a leak proof construction. f. Tack welding, bolting, and caulking are not acceptable. g. Curb cap shall have integral deep spun inlet venturi and pre-punched mounting holes to ensure correct attachment to curb. h. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. i. Breather tube shall be 10 square inches in size for fresh air motor cooling, and designed to allow wiring to be run through it. 7. Motor Cover: a. Shall be constructed of aluminum. 8. Vibration Isolation: a. Shall be double studded true isolators. b. Shall have no metal to metal contact. c. Shall be sized to match the weight of each fan. 9. Disconnect Switches:

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Disconnect shall be: NEMA 3R: outdoor application falling rain water. a. Shall have positive electrical shut-off. b. Shall be wired from fan motor to junction box. 10. Drain Trough: a. Allows for one-point drainage of water, grease, and other residues. 11. Accessories: a. Auto Belt Tensioner: 1) Automatic tensioning device that adjusts for the correct belt tension, only for single drives. b. Birdscreen: 1) Shall be construction of galvanized steel. 2) Shall protect fan discharge. c. Clean Out Port: 1) Provide removable grease repellent compression rubber plug which shall allow access for cleaning wheel through windband. d. Roof Curbs: 1) Mounted onto roof with fan. 2) Material: Aluminum 3) Insulation thickness: 2 inch e. Curb Extension: 1) Material Type: Aluminum 2) Coating: Permatector f. Curb Seal: 1) Types: High Temp Seal 2) Fans are typically mounted between the fan curb cap and the roof curb g. Drain Connection: 1) Shall be constructed of aluminum. 2) Shall allow singe-point drainage of grease, water, or other residues. h. Finishes: 1) Types: Permatector i. Grease Trap: 1) Shall be constructed of aluminum. 2) Shall include drain connection. 3) Shall collect grease residue. j. Hinge Kit: 1) Shall come with aluminum hinges. 2) Shall allow the fan to tilt away for access to wheel and ductwork for inspection and cleaning. k. Hinge Base: 1) Shall come with aluminum hinges. 2) Hinges and restraint cables shall be mounted to a base (sleeve). 3) Shall allow the fan to tilt away for access to wheel and ductwork for inspection and cleaning. l. Heat Baffle: 1) 1 inch thick insulation shield that prevents heat from radiating into the motor compartment. m. Tie-Down Points: 1) Four brackets located on windband secures fan in heavy wind applications. n. Windband Extension:

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1) Fan shall be constructed of aluminum with rolled beads. o. Variable Frequency Drive: <> 1) Factory programmed, mounted and wired. 2) Input speed control <> <<4-20 mA>> <<0- 10VDC>> 3) 24VDC damper power output 4) Motor: (VFD Rated) compatible with induction and permanent magnet motors. 5) Parameters of acquainted motor shall be set to include voltage, speed, FLA, acceleration/deceleration time and minimum & maximum motor frequency. 6) R3 Filtering for harmonic mitigation 7) UL Recognized for 3 phase input at specified voltages. 8) NEMA 4X Enclosure 9) LED indication for Power, Run, and Fault

2.3 UTILITY SET FANS A. Belt Driven Backward Inclined Utility Set Fan:

1. Manufacturer: a. Fans shall meet model numbers, types, sizes, capacities, and electrical characteristics as indicated on the contract drawings. Acceptable manufacturers: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn Ventilator or Twin City Blower Company. 2. General: a. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/-15% of scheduled values. b. Each fan shall be built in AMCA arrangement 1, 3, 9 or 10 according to drawings. c. Fans shall be equipped with lifting lugs. d. After fabrication all carbon steel components shall be cleaned and chemically treated by a phosphatizing process to insure proper removal of grease, oil, scale, etc. Fan shall then be coated with a minimum of 2-4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and baked. Finish color shall be industrial gray. Coating must exceed 1,000- hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method. 3. Fan Housing and Outlet: a. Fan housing shall be aerodynamically designed with high-efficiency inlet, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence. b. All interior and exterior surface steel shall be coated with a minimum of 2-4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and baked. Finish color shall be gray. No uncoated metal fan parts are allowed. c. Housing and bearing support shall be constructed of welded structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings. d. An OSHA compliant belt guard shall be included to completely cover the motor pulley and belt(s). 4. Fan Wheel:

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

a. The fan wheel shall be of the non-overloading single width backward inclined centrifugal type. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to balance grade G6.3 per ANSI S2.19. b. Fan wheel shall be manufactured with continuously welded steel blades and coated with a minimum of 2-4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and baked. Finish color shall be industrial gray. c. The wheel and fan inlet shall be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. 5. Fan Motors and Drive: a. Motors shall meet or exceed EPACT (Energy Policy ACT) efficiencies. b. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 150% of the fan operating brake horsepower, and shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required. c. Fan shaft shall be turned and polished steel that is sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class. d. Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated, self-aligning or roller pillow block type. e. Air Handling Quality bearings shall be designed with low swivel torque to allow the outer race of the bearing to pivot or swivel within the cast pillow block. Bearings shall be 100% tested for noise and vibration by the manufacturer. Bearings shall be 100% tested to insure the inner race diameter is within tolerance to prevent vibration. f. Bearings shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-10) of 80,000 hours at maximum operating speed for each pressure class [Average Life or (L-50) of 400,000 hours]. g. Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars, which reduce vibration, increase service life, and improve serviceability. Bearings that use set screws shall not be allowed. h. Bearings shall have Zerk fittings to allow for lubrication. 6. Accessories a. Weatherhoods for Arr. 10 and SWO-9: Vented steel weatherhoods shall protect the motor and drive components from rain, moisture, dust, and dirt. Weatherhoods shall meet OSHA guidelines and shall be easily removed for service access. b. Belt Guard*: Belt guards shall be designed to allow access to the belts and pulleys for service. All belt guards shall include tachometer openings to monitor the fan speed as well as an access panel for testing belt tension. Belt guards shall meet OSHA guidelines. c. Shaft Guard*: Shaft guards shall be designated to cover shafts and bearings on arrangements 1, 8, 9, or 10 configuration. Extended lube lines shall be included for bearing lubrication without removal of the guard. Shaft guards shall meet OSHA guidelines. d. Inlet and Outlet Guards*: Provide removable inlet and outlet guards to provide protection for personnel and equipment in non-ducted installations. Inlet and outlet guards shall meet OSHA guidelines. e. Inlet and Outlet Flanges*: Provide inlet flanges on all single width fans that are pre-punched and welded to the inlet collar. f. Inlet Box*: Provide an inlet box to minimize entry losses when a 90° turn is required at the fan inlet. Inlet boxes shall come with dampers, access doors and drains.

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

g. Access Doors*: Provide bolted or hinged (quick-opening) access doors to provide access for cleaning or inspection. Access doors shall be standard on downblast discharge fans. Raised bolted access doors shall be available to allow for up to 4 in. (102 mm) of field-applied insulation on the fan housing. h. Companion Flanges*: Provide punched companion inlet flanges for all single width fan sizes. i. Drain Connection*: Provide a 1 inch (25 mm) threaded drain connection to be located at the bottom of the fan housing to drain water. j. Heat Slingers: Provide heat slinger in a aluminum cooling disc mounted on the fan shaft between the inboard bearing and the blower housing to dissipate heat conducted along the fan shaft. k. Stainless Steel Shafts: Provide stainless steel fan shafts for excessive corrosive conditions. l. Shaft Seals: Provide a ceramic shaft seal with an aluminum rub ring for operation at high temperatures for exhausting contaminated air. Stuffing boxes shall be provided upon request. m. Extended Life Bearings: Provide extended life bearings for a basic rating fatigue life (L10) per ABMA Standards in excess of 200,000 hours at the maximum RPM for each pressure class. L10 is the life associated with 80% reliability of a bearing. n. Split Pillow Block Bearings: Provide split pillow block bearings which contain double-row roller bearings and a two-piece cast iron housing. Split pillow block bearing life shall be selected to exceed L(10) life in excess of 80,000 hours. o. Extended Lubrication Lines: Provide flexible nylon tubing extending from the bearings to grease fittings mounted on the fan drive frame (or on the fan housing if a weatherhood is supplied). p. Nested Inlet Vanes: Nested inlet vanes provide variable inlet volume at reduced horsepower. Nested inlet vanes shall be built into the inlet cone. Provide electric actuators. The maximum operating temperature for inlet vanes shall be 200°F (93°C). q. External Inlet Vanes: Provide inlet vanes mounted externally on the fan inlet flange. External inlet vanes shall extend beyond the fan inlet electric actuators. The maximum operating temperature for inlet vanes shall be 200°F (93°C). r. Disconnect Switches: 1) Disconnect shall be: NEMA 3R: outdoor application falling rain water. >> 2) Shall have positive electrical shut-off. 3) Shall be wired from fan motor to junction box. s. Vibration Isolators and Structural Bases: Provide structural isolation base including motor slide base for belt adjustment. Base shall come with height savings brackets to keep the base and fan center of gravity lower to the mounting surface. Vibration isolator options include: <>, <>, <> and <>. Seismic isolators and calculations shall be provided on request for all centrifugal configurations. t. Motors: Provide NEMA Premium efficiencies. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) compatible motor. u. Protective Coatings: All coatings shall be electrostatically applied. Provide baked powders that offer durable, long lasting finish.

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Secure fans and gravity ventilators with stainless steel lag screws to roof curb/structure.

B. Suspended Fans: Install flexible connections between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

C. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to exhaust fans and gravity ventilators used in relief air applications.

D. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated on Drawings.

E. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.

G. Install backdraft dampers on the discharges of exhaust fans when they are not integral with fans and as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

H. Provide adjustable sheaves as required for final air balance.

I. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

J. Install fans in accordance with the fan manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the contract drawings.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fans to function properly.

B. Adjust belt tension on belt driven fans.

C. Lubricate bearing.

D. Adjust drives for final system balancing.

E. Check wheel overlap.

END OF SECTION

HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 52 01

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components.

B. Units to suit actual motor nameplate full load currents.

C. Submit VFD wiring diagrams showing all field input/output connections, internal power control devices, breakers, fuses, disconnects, main/bypass/isolation contactors, overload protection, etc.

D. Submit Harmonic Filters, as required in these specifications. Submittal shall identify individual VFD’s and associated harmonic filtering method/ratings.

E. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization complies with the requirements specified in “Quality Assurance” below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Variable frequency drives. a. Square D. Company b. General Electric Co. c. Eaton d. Yaskawa e. Eurotherm f. ABB g. Reliance

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be provided as indicated or scheduled on the drawings.

B. The Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall convert 460 volt, three (3) phase, sixty (60) hertz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency, three (3) phase, AC power for stepless motor control from ten (10) percent to one hundred ten (110) percent of base speed. The manufacturer shall provide VFDs of the same basic model number for all the drives. The VFD shall be a PWM-V design.

C. The manufacturer shall provide on site start-up services for each VFD. A training period of four (4) hours shall be provided by factory personnel to instruct the Owner's personnel in the use of the VFD.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

D. The VFD shall be a voltage source type with Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output utilizing power transistor semi-conductors.

1. Complete efficiency versus load and speed shall be submitted for approval.

E. Circuits shall provide DV/DT and DI/DT protection for semi-conductors. VFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load without damage to the drive. Protective circuits shall cause instantaneous trip should any of the following faults occur:

1. 110 percent of VFD duty wave current rating for 60 seconds. 2. 135 percent of VFD current rating for 2 seconds. 3. Output phase to phase and phase to ground short circuit condition. 4. High input line voltage. 5. Low input line voltage. 6. Loss of input phase. 7. External fault. This protective circuit shall permit, by means of the terminal strip, wiring of remote normally closed safety contacts such as high static, firestat, etc. to shut down the drive.

F. The following adjustments shall be available in the controller:

1. Maximum frequency (fifteen (15) to two hundred fifty (250) Hz) factory set at sixty (60) Hz. 2. Minimum frequency (three (3) to sixty (60) Hz) factory set at six (6) Hz. 3. Acceleration adjustable from 0.1 to 360 seconds factory set at twenty (20) seconds. 4. Deceleration adjustable from 0.1 to 360 seconds factory set at twenty (20) seconds. 5. Volts/Hertz ratio factory set for 480V at 60 Hz. 6. Voltage offset or boost factory set at 100 percent torque. 7. Current limit (fifty (50%) percent to one hundred ten (110%) percent sine wave current rating) factory set at 100% current.

G. The VFD shall have the following basic features: 1. PWM Inverter Design & Ratings: a. VFD’s 100 HP and less: 6-Pulse with 5% impedance dual link reactor. b. VFD’s >100 HP and less than 200HP: Passive filter or 18-Pulse. c. VFD’s 200 HP and larger: 18-Pulse with phase shifting transformer. The transformer shall be single-wound, rated 480V, UL recognized, 180 degree C insulation system. Performance shall be achieved without exceeding the temperature rise in a 50 degree C ambient. Transformer shall be integral to the VFD cabinet. 2. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked, padlockable disconnect, output contactor and mechanically interlocked bypass contactor, and a VFD isolation service switch. UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes. 3. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, BACnet/IP, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU. Optional protocols shall include Johnson Controls N2 bus and Seimens Building Technologies FLN. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

4. Door-mounted operator controls consisting of a membrane command center which allows manual stop/start and speed control, local/remote indication and manual/automatic speed control selection. In addition, the command center will serve as a means to configure controller parameters such as minimum speed, maximum speed, acceleration and deceleration times, volts/Hz ratio, torque boost, etc. Potentiometers will not be allowed for these settings. 5. Main input circuit breaker shall provide a positive disconnect of all phases of the incoming A-C line to both the controller and the bypass circuitry. This circuit breaker shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and have through-the-door interlocking toggle with provisions for padlocking in the OFF position. 6. Main input circuit breaker for overload and short circuit protection. 7. Run permissive circuit – there shall be a run permissive circuit for damper valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, time-clock control, or serial communications), the VDF shall provide a dry contract closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end- switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close. 8. Automatic restart after power outage, drive fault (except ground fault or short circuit) or external fault, with drive in automatic mode. The circuit shall allow the user to select up to nine (9) restart attempts as well as the dwell time between attempts. The reset time between fault occurrences shall also be selectable, set at twenty (20) seconds. All settings shall be via the membrane command center. 9. Door-mounted LED display for digital indication of: a. Frequency output b. Voltage output c. Current output d. First fault indication 10. Relay contacts for remote indication of drive fault and motor running. 11. Three (3) critical frequency avoidance bands, field programmable via the membrane command center. Each critical frequency avoidance band shall have a bandwidth adjustable via keypad entry of up to ten (10) Hz. 12. Three (3) programmable preset speeds which will force the VFD to a preset speed upon a user contact closure. 13. Process follower to enable VFD to respond to any of the following signals: a. A pneumatic 3 - three (3) to fifteen (15) pound signal or b. 0 -10VAC or c. 4 - 20MA signal. 14. The VFD shall have the capability to ride through power dips up to 500 msec without a controller trip depending on load and operating condition. 15. Electronic motor solid-state overload protection provided for controller: a. Overload circuit shall provide for 3:1 FLA range. b. Class 10, 20 or 30 (programmable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included. c. 2% tripping accuracy. d. True single phase protection by detecting loss of, or low voltage and tripping within 3 seconds. e. Inherently protection from short circuit damage by saturation of current sensors. 16. Bypass – Bypasses shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer as defined on the VFD schedule. All VFD with bypass configurations shall be UL

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. a. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked, padlockable disconnect, output contactor and mechanically interlocked bypass contactor, and a VFD isolation service switch. UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes. b. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be mechanically interlocked such that the disconnecting device must be in the “Off” position before either enclosure may be accessed. c. The VFD and bypass package shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 100,000 AMPS and this rating shall be indicated on the UL data label. d. The bypass shall maintain positive contactor control through the voltage tolerance window of nominal voltage +30%, -35%. This feature is designed to avoid contactor coil failure during brown out / low line conditions and allow for input single phase operation when in the VFD mode. Designs that will not allow input single phase operation in the VFD mode are not acceptable. e. Motor protection form single phase power conditions – utilize a digital bypass signal and an electromechanical switch as back-up. f. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when an external safety opens. Example test display indications include “FireStat”, “FreezStat”, “Over pressure” and “Low suction”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection. g. Smoke Control Override Mode (Override 1) – The bypass shall include a dedicated digital input that will transfer the motor from VFD mode to Bypass mode upon receipt of a dry contact closure from the Fire / Smoke Control System. The Smoke Control Override Mode action is not programmable and will always function as described in the bypass User’s Manual documentation. In this mode, the system will ignore low priority safeties and acknowledge high priority safeties. All keypad control, serial communications control, and normal customer start / stop control inputs will be disregarded. This smoke Control Mode shall be designed to meet the intent of UL964/UUKL. h. Fireman’s Override Mode (Override 2) – the bypass shall include a second, programmable override input which will allow the user to configure the unit to acknowledge some digital inputs, all digital inputs, ignore digital inputs or any combination of the above. This programmability allows the user to program the bypass unit to react in whatever manner the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) requires. The Override 2 action may be programmed for “Run-to-Destruction”. The user may also force the unit into Override 2 via the serial communications link. 17. Serial Communications: a. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, BACnet/IP, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU. Optional protocols shall include Johnson Controls N2 bus and Seimens Building Technologies FLN. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

b. The BACnet connection shall be an RS485, MSTP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Control (B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BASnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to: 1) Data Sharing – Read Property – B. 2) Data Sharing – Write Property – B. 3) Device Management – Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-AM). 4) Device Management – Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I- Have). 5) Device Management – Communication Control – B. c. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run- stop control, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current limit, accel/decal time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed/frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. “Pass thru I/O” All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible.

H. Integral Line Conditioning and Harmonic Filtering 1. Input Line Conditioning: Provide input filtering, to limit TDD and THD(V) at the defined PCC per IEEE 519. Input Line Reactors or DC Chokes shall be provided for all 6 pulse drives. 200HP VFD’s shall utilize an integral phase-shifting transformer. 2. Every 6 pulse VFD shall be provided with integral or factory means to minimize AC input line surges, line notching, and input current and voltage distortions due to harmonic current. The manufacturer’s method shall provide mitigation equal to, or better than, that of 5% AC Line Reactors. 3. Provide one of the following means to achieve required harmonic mitigation: a. 5% AC Line Reactors b. DC Bus Chokes (installed on both positive and negative busses) c. Passive Filters (filters must not create resonance condition) 4. Where required harmonic filters, reactors or chokes require an additional enclosure, it shall be close coupled to the VFD enclosure, and shall be a metal enclosure with same NEMA rating as that of the VFD. 5. The VFD manufacturer shall provide harmonic calculations, per IEEE 519, to show the effect of the motor and VFD (for all 6 or 18-pulse drives) on the electrical distribution system. The calculations and report shall determine and include the following: a. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) for the harmonic calculation(s) shall be defined as the building’s main distribution switchboard or main panel on the secondary side of the service transformer. b. Calculations shall be based on the upstream distribution system characteristics, feeder size, supply transformer impedances (assumed loaded to 70%) and VFD impedances. Base calculations on all VFD controlled motors running with VFD’s at full load.. c. Calculate the input voltage THD at the PCC. d. Calculate Total current Demand Distortion (TDD) at PCC.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

I. The VFD together with all options and modifications shall be mounted within a standard NEMA 3R enclosure suitable for continuous operation at ambient temperature of zero (0) to forty (40) degrees Celsius with relative humidity of ninety-five (95) percent non- condensing. All high voltage components within enclosure shall be isolated with steel covers. The complete unit shall be UL listed and UL labeled.

J. The VFD manufacturer shall maintain and staff nationwide service centers. These service engineers shall be employed by the manufacturer and shall provide start-up service including physical inspection of the drive and connected wiring and final adjustments to meet specified performance requirements.

K. The VFD shall carry a full parts and labor warranty for the time period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance (or start-up) by the Owner.

L. The Contractor shall coordinate the connections between the VFD and the individual motors provided. This coordination shall take place prior to shop drawing submittals and shall be reflected in the shop drawings, which are submitted for review.

M. The Contractor shall verify that the motors served by the VFD’s are compatible with the supplied VFDs.

2.3 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. General: Factory installed in controller enclosure except as otherwise indicated. Where separately mounted, provide NEMA, “National Electrical Manufacturers Association,” enclosure except as otherwise indicated.

B. Pushbutton Stations and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type, oil tight.

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

D. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.

E. Current Sensors: Rated to suit application.

F. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hardwired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.

G. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relay: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated contacts for hard-wired connection. Arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install variable frequency drives in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Mounting: For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on light-weight structural steel channels bolted to the wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and light-weight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8 inch thick steel plates, 6 inches

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

square, bolted to the floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1 ½ inch by 1 ½ inch by ¼ inch vertical angle posts not over three feet on centers. Connect the posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt the control equipment to the channels.

C. AC motor conductor length from VFD to motor shall not exceed 100 LF.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify variable frequency drives in accordance with Division 23 Section: “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between motor control devices and control/indicating devices as specified in Division 23 Section: “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for hard-wired connections.

B. Install wiring in enclosures neatly bundled, trained, and supported.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field connected connectors and terminals’, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torqueing requirements are not indicated, comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week’s advance notification.

B. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current project drawings. 2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench. Use manufacturer’s recommended torque values. 4. Clean devices using manufacturer’s approved methods and materials. 5. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices.

C. Electrical Tests: Perform the following in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to the extent permitted by the manufacturer’s instructions. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. Tests are required for all motors > 10 HP. 2. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of motor- circuit protectors and for overload relays of controllers for motors 15 horsepower and larger. Trip characteristics not within manufacturer’s published time-current tolerances are not acceptable. 3. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices based on installed motor nameplates. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, phase unbalance and undervoltage to verify operation. 4. Check for improper voltages at terminals in controllers that have external control

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

wiring when controller disconnect is opened. Any voltage over 30 V is unacceptable. 5. Test ground fault protection devices by current injection method. 6. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by the retests that specified requirements are met.

END OF SECTION

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 52 01 -8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 64 11

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loads, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system.

B. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements, wiring diagrams, and control diagrams.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include startup instructions.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements including those furnished but not produced by manufacturer.

E. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.

F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

G. Manufacturer Reports: 1. Submit startup report for each unit. 2. Indicate results of leak test and refrigerant pressure test.

H. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.

I. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. Indicate results of leak test and refrigerant pressure test.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to ARI 550/590 code for testing and rating of reciprocating, scroll, and screw water chillers.

B. Performance Ratings: Coefficient of Performance (COP) and Integrated Part-Load Value (IPLV) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1.

C. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’ experience.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty to include coverage for complete assembly including materials and labor

1.5 FIELD MEASURMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

B. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of chiller for five years from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Examine unit components as recommended by chiller manufacturer. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.

C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of unit, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.

D. Perform work without removing units from service during building normal occupied hours.

E. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.

F. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without unreasonable loss of time.

G. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision of manufacturer or original installer.

H. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Daikin Applied

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Provide and install as shown on the plans factory-assembled, factory-charged air-cooled scroll compressor packaged chillers in the quantity specified. Each chiller shall consist of hermetic tandem scroll compressor sets (total four compressors), brazed plate evaporator, air-cooled condenser section, microprocessor-based control system and all components necessary for controlled unit operation.

B. Chiller shall be functionally tested at the factory to ensure trouble free field operation

2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Flow Range: The chiller shall have the ability to support variable flow range down to 40% of nominal design (based on AHRI conditions).

B. Operating Range: The chiller shall have the ability to control leaving chilled fluid temperature from 15F to 65F.

C. General: Provide a complete scroll compressor packaged chiller as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The unit shall be in accordance with the standards referenced in section 1.02 and any local codes in effect.

D. Performance: Refer to the schedule of performance on the drawings. The chiller shall be capable of stable operation to a minimum percentage of full load (without hot gas bypass) of 17%. Performance shall be in accordance with AHRI Standard 550/590.

E. Acoustics: Sound pressure levels for the unit shall not exceed the following specified levels. All manufacturers shall provide the necessary sound treatment ( parts and labor) to meet these levels if required. Sound data shall be provided with the quotation. Test shall be in accordance with AHRI Standard 370.

Sound Pressure (at 30 feet) 63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz Overall 75% 50% 25% dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dBA Load Load Load dBA dBA dBA 66 61 63 63 63 57 55 48 67 66 64 63 Sound Power 63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz Overall 75% 50% 25% dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dBA Load Load Load dBA dBA dBA 94 88 91 90 91 84 82 75 94 93 91 90 Octave band is non 'A' weighted and overall readings are 'A' weighted. Sound data rated in accordance with AHRI Standard-370.

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.4 CHILLER COMPONENTS

A. Compressor 1. The compressors shall be sealed hermetic, scroll type with crankcase oil heater and suction strainer. The compressor motor shall be refrigerant gas cooled, high torque, hermetic induction type, two-pole, with inherent thermal protection on all three phases and shall be mounted on RIS vibration isolator pads. The compressors shall be equipped with an internal module providing compressor protection and communication capability.

B. Evaporator 1. The evaporator shall be a compact, high efficiency, dual circuit, brazed plate-to- plate type heat exchanger consisting of parallel stainless steel plates. The water- side working pressure shall be a minimum of 653 psig (4502 kPa). Vent and drain connections shall be provided in the inlet and outlet chilled water piping by the installing contractor. Evaporators shall be designed and constructed according to, and listed by, Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 2. The evaporator shall be protected with an external, electric resistance heater plate and insulated with 3/4" (19mm) thick closed-cell polyurethane insulation. This combination shall provide freeze protection down to -20°F (-29°C) ambient air temperature. 3. The water-side maximum design pressure shall be rated at a minimum of 435 psig (3000 kPa). Evaporators shall be designed and constructed according to, and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

C. Condenser 1. Condenser fans shall be propeller type arranged for vertical air discharge and individually driven by direct-drive fan motors. The fans shall be equipped with a heavy-gauge vinyl-coated fan guard. Fan motors shall be TEAO type with permanently lubricated ball bearings, inherent overload protection, three-phase, direct-drive, 1140 rpm. Each fan section shall be partitioned to avoid cross circulation. 2. Coil shall be microchannel design and shall have a series of flat tubes containing multiple, parallel flow microchannels layered between the refrigerant manifolds. Tubes shall be 9153 aluminum alloy. Tubes made of 3102 alloy or other alloys of lower corrosion resistance shall not be accepted. Coils shall consist of a two- pass arrangement. Each condenser coil shall be factory leak tested with high- pressure air under water. Coils shall withstand 1000+ hour acidified synthetic sea water fog (SWAAT) test (ASTM G85-02) at 120°F (49°C) with 0% fin loss and develop no leaks. 3. Provide painted steel condenser coil louvers covering the condenser coils for protection from hail.

D. Refrigerant Circuit 1. Provide a minimum of 2 independent refrigeration circuits 2. Provide a minimum of 3 compressors per circuit for a total of 6 compressors minimum for unloading. 3. Provide factory installed hot gas bypass on lead circuit for low load situations

E. Construction 1. Unit casing and all structural members and rails shall be fabricated of pre-painted or galvanized steel. Painted parts shall be able to meet ASTM B117, 1000-hour salt spray test.

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2. Upper section of unit shall have protective and decorative louvers covering the coils and unit end and have painted steel wraps enclosing the coil end sections and piping.

F. Control System 1. A centrally located weatherproof control panel shall contain the field power connection points, control interlock terminals, and control system. Box shall be designed in accordance with NEMA 3R rating. Power and starting components shall include factory circuit breaker for fan motors and control circuit, individual contactors for each fan motor, solid-state compressor three-phase motor overload protection, inherent fan motor overload protection and two power blocks (one per circuit) for connection to remote, contractor supplied disconnect switches. Hinged access doors shall be lockable. Barrier panels or separate enclosures are required to protect against accidental contact with line voltage when accessing the control system. 2. Shall include optional single-point connection to a non-fused disconnect switch with through-the-door handle and compressor circuit breakers.

G. Unit Controller 1. An advanced DDC microprocessor unit controller with a 5-line by 22-character liquid crystal display provides the operating and protection functions. The controller shall take preemptive limiting action in case of high discharge pressure or low evaporator pressure. The controller shall contain the following features as a minimum: 2. The unit shall be protected in two ways: (1) by alarms that shut the unit down and require manual reset to restore unit operation and (2) by limit alarms that reduce unit operation in response to some out-of-limit condition. Shut down alarms shall activate an alarm signal. 3. Shutdown Alarms a. No evaporator water flow (auto-restart) b. Sensor failures c. Low evaporator pressure d. Evaporator freeze protection e. High condenser pressure f. Outside ambient temperature (auto-restart) g. Motor protection system h. Phase voltage protection (Optional) 4. Limit Alarms a. Condenser pressure stage down, unloads unit at high discharge pressures. b. Low ambient lockout, shuts off unit at low ambient temperatures. c. Low evaporator pressure hold, holds stage #1 until pressure rises. d. Low evaporator pressure unload, shuts off one compressor. 5. Unit Enable Section a. Enables unit operation from either local keypad, digital input, or BAS 6. Unit Mode Selection a. Selects standard cooling, ice, glycol, or test operation mode 7. Analog Inputs: a. Reset of leaving water temperature, 4-20 mA\ b. Current Limit 8. Digital Inputs a. Unit off switch b. Remote start/stop

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. Flow switch d. Ice mode switch, converts operation and setpoints for ice production e. Motor protection 9. Digital Outputs a. Shutdown alarm; field wired, activates on an alarm condition, off when alarm is cleared b. Evaporator pump; field wired, starts pump when unit is set to start 10. Condenser fan control - The unit controller shall provide control of condenser fans based on compressor discharge pressure. 11. Building Automation System (BAS) Interface a. Factory mounted DDC controller(s) shall support operation on a BACnet® network via one of the data link / physical layers listed below as specified by the successful Building Automation System (BAS) supplier. b. BACnet MS/TP master (Clause 9) c. The information communicated between the BAS and the factory mounted unit controllers shall include the reading and writing of data to allow unit monitoring, control and alarm notification as specified in the unit sequence of operation and the unit points list. d. All communication from the chiller unit controller as specified in the points list shall be via standard BACnet objects. Proprietary BACnet objects shall not be allowed. BACnet communications shall conform to the BACnet protocol (ANSI/ASHRAE135-2001). A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be provided along with the unit submittal.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. The following options are to be included: 1. Low Ambient Control: Provide fan cycling control to allow unit operation down to 32°F 2. Phase loss with under/over voltage protection and with LED indication of the fault type to guard against compressor motor burnout. 3. BAS interface module to provide interface with the BACnet MSTP protocol. 4. Compressor Sound Reduction - Acoustic reduction blankets shall be factory installed on each compressor. 5. The following accessories are to be included: a. Factory-mounted thermal dispersion type flow switch b. Factory-mounted Wye strainer, to be installed at the evaporator inlet and sized for the design flow rate , with perforation diameter of 0.063" with blowdown valve and Victaulic couplings

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units on vibration isolation.

B. Install valves and piping accessories on evaporator chilled water piping connections in accordance with details as indicated on the contract drawings.

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Install auxiliary water piping for oil cooling units and purge condensers.

D. Install valves and piping accessories on condenser water piping connections in accordance with details as indicated on the contract drawings.

E. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.

F. Install refrigerant piping connections to air-cooled condensing units.

G. Install piping from chiller safety relief valve to outdoors. Size as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Install chiller accessories furnished loose for field mounting.

I. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

J. Install control wiring between chiller control panel and field mounted control devices.

K. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Startup and Shutdown: 1. Furnish cooling season startup and winter season shutdown service for first year of operation. 2. If initial startup and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative, repeat startup and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season. 3. Furnish initial charge of refrigerant and oil.

B. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of 8 hours on Site to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, startup, calibrate controls of, and instruct Owner in operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative.

D. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unit(s) and confirm proper operation. Chiller manufacturer shall maintain service capabilities no more than 50 miles from the job site. After start-up the manufacturer shall provided a copy of the factory start-up sheets to the owner for documentation on unit(s) operating valves.

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of two days to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance.

C. Furnish initial charge of refrigerant and oil.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel.

B. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance.

C. Demonstrate low-ambient operation during winter testing for air-cooled condensers.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of chillers for period of two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Examine unit components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.

C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of unit; checkout of controls; and adjustments.

D. Repair or replace parts according to manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, using parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.

E. Perform Work without removing units from service during building's normally occupied hours.

F. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for specified maintenance period.

G. Local Access: 1. Maintain locally, near place of Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. 2. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service without unreasonable loss of time.

H. Perform maintenance Work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision and in direct employ of manufacturer or original installer.

I. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide the services of a Commissioning Agent

B. The Air Cooled Chiller shall be commissioned in accordance with IECC 2018, Section 408.

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 8 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. The mechanical, controls, and start-up contractors are responsible for supporting all Cx activities and testing as outlined in the Cx Plan. These activities include but are not limited to the following.

1. Submit formal documentation to the CxA stating that the air cooled chiller is operational in accordance with the contract documents prior to the start of functional performance testing (FPT). 2. Provide copies of the completed start-up reports and pre-functional checklists to the CxA prior to the start of FPT. 3. Technicians from the start-up, controls, and mechanical contractors are required during the air cooled chiller FPT. The start-up technician shall be familiar with the operation of the air cooled chiller and control panel as applicable, and be capable of demonstrating and troubleshooting all required functions. 4. Promptly rectify all Issues, relating to the air cooled chiller that are recorded in the Cx Issues Log. Submit written notification to the Owner, CxA, and Engineer that this has been done. (Note: The CxA does not provide any directives so any deviation from the original scope must be approved by the Owner or Engineer prior to performing work).

D. The manufacturer is responsible for supporting Cx activities related to the supplied equipment and all packaged controls; coordination between the interface of packaged controls and building control systems. These activities include but are not limited to the following:

1. Provide factory support for any issues discovered during Cx activities and testing. 2. In the event that issues related to the manufacturer’s equipment cannot be corrected by the mechanical, controls, or start-up contractors, the manufacturer shall provide, at no additional charge, a factory trained service engineer familiar with the operation of the equipment, all related controls and programming, and be capable of demonstrating, troubleshooting, and providing direction to make corrections to restore all required functions. A factory trained service engineer will be required for all equipment with factory packaged controls.

END OF SECTION

PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS-RECIPROCATING, SCROLL, AND SCREW 23 64 11 - 9 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 73 00

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Product Data, Submit the following:

1. Published Literature: Indicate capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. 3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity. 5. Dampers: Include leakage, pressure drop, and sample calibration curves. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. 6. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Indicate factory installed and field installed wiring.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’ experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The following manufacturers are approved for use. 1. Daikin Applied 'Vision' Air Handler shall be the basis of design. 2. Miller-Picking 3. Temtrol

2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on drawings.

B. Performance: Conform to AHRI 430.

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet these levels if required.

2.3 UNIT CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.

B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13. 1. The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel. 2. The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel. 3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner. 4. Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.

C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5 inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the panel midpoint.

D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot of casing surface area at design static pressure up to a maximum of +5” w.c. in positive pressure sections and - 6” w.c. in negative pressure sections

E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.

F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.

G. A 4-inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer for structural rigidity and condensate trapping.. The base rail shall be constructed with 12-gauge nominal for unit sizes 003 - 035 and 10-gauge nominal for unit sizes 040 - 090. The following calculation shall determine the required height of the baserail to allow for adequate drainage. Use the largest pressure to determine base rail height. [(Negative)(Positive) static pressure (in)] (2) + 4” = required baserail height. Should the unit baserail not be factory supplied at this height, the contractor is required to supply a concrete housekeeping pad to make up the difference.

H. Construct drain pans from stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to drain connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall be a minimum of 3’’ above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping. Drain connections that protrude from the base rail are not acceptable. There must be a full 2’’ thickness of insulation under drain pan.

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.4 FAN ASSEMBLIES

A. (AHU-1) Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-drive type housed airfoil fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.

B. (AHU-1) Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class I, belt-drive type housed forward curved fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.

C. (AHU-2, 3) Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of the unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.

D. (AHU-2, 3) Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of the unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on rubber-in-shear vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.

2.5 BEARINGS, SHAFTS, AND DRIVES

A. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy duty pillow block, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.

B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.

C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calculated based on fan brake horsepower.

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.6 ELECTRICAL

A. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, premium efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 460V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.

B. The air handler(s) shall be ETL and ETL-Canada listed by Intertek Testing Services, Inc. Units shall conform to bi-national standard ANSI/UL Standard 1995/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236.

C. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

D. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.

E. Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National Electrical Code requirements.

F. Air handler manufacturer shall provide and mount conduit and wiring from each fan motor terminated at an external junction box.

2.7 COOLING AND HEATING COILS

A. Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and bear the AHRI label. Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of AHRI’s standard rating conditions will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the AHRI Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.

B. Water cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. 1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements. 2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. 4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up. 5. Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel.

C. Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. 1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements. 2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins. 3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. 4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up. 5. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel to allow for thermal movement and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.

2.8 FILTERS

A. (AHU-1, 2) Furnish flat panel filter section with 2-inch pleated MERV 8 filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters.

B. (AHU-3) Furnish angled filter section with 2-inch pleated MERV 8 filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters.

C. Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.

D. Filter Magnehelic gauge(s) shall be furnished and mounted by the manufacturer

E. Provide 1 extra set of filters

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

2.9 ADDITIONAL SECTIONS

A. Access section shall be provided for access between components. Hinged Door shall be provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with ARI 430.

B. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal bands of connectors parallel with minimum 3 inch (25 mm) flex between ductwork and fan while running. Refer to Division 23 Section: “HVAC Air Distribution”.

C. Install assembled units with vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Install restraining snubbers as required. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Vibration and Seismic controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

D. Install floor mounted units on 4” high concrete housekeeping pads and 6” wider than unit.

E. Provide adjustable sheaves required for final air balance.

F. Insulate coil headers located outside airflow as specified for piping. Refer to Division 23 Section: “HVAC Insulation”.

G. Connect humidifiers to water supply. Install shutoff valve on water supply piping. Install 3/4 inch hose bibb accessible from interior. Pipe drain and overflow to nearest floor drain. Provide backflow prevention on cold water make-up line that humidifiers are connected to in accordance with all applicable codes, standards and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

H. Unless otherwise indicated install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest floor drain. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

I. Water-level monitoring devices: On down flow units and all other coils that do not have a secondary drain or provisions to install a secondary or auxiliary drain pan, a water-level monitoring device shall be installed inside the primary drain pan. This device shall shut off the equipment served in the event that the primary drain becomes restricted. Devices installed in the drain line shall not be permitted.

J. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction.

K. All wiring within the AHU, where inside a control panel, shall be installed in UL approved conduit or raceway.

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3.2 INSTALLATION CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL

A. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges, per Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

B. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).

C. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.

D. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.

E. Install valves and piping specialties in accordance with details as indicated on the Contract Documents. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment” and to Division 23 Section: “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

F. Install manual air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment” and to Division 23 Section: “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

3.3 INSTALLATION HOT WATER HEATING COIL

A. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.

B. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).

C. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.

D. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.

E. Install valves and piping specialties as indicated on the Contract Documents. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment” and to Division 23 Section: “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

F. Install manual air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

END OF SECTION

INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 -7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 81 06

PACKAGED MAKEUP AIR UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate air handling unit dimensions, performance data, lifting points, piping connections, roof curb data, and attachments.

B. Product Data: Submit data indicating:

1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls: Provide the following items: a. A detailed description of the programmed sequence. b. Control interface (BACNet, ModBus, LonWorks, hardwired, etc). c. List of all available control points (points that can be changed by the central control system remotely). d. List of all available monitoring points (points that can be viewed by the central control system remotely). e. Provide a description for each point in non-coded language. f. Provide the address or name of the point or SNVT (Standard Network Variable Type). g. Indicate the read/write capability for each point. 8. Accessories.

C. Test Reports: Submit results of factory test at time of unit shipment.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Blank Pre-functional checklists and start-up forms: Submit these forms to the Commissioning Agent (CxA) prior to conducting any start-ups.

G. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report and completed pre-functional checklists for each unit.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’ experience.

PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 06 -1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Makeup Air Unit

A. Basis of design is Greenheck model as scheduled. Comparable products shall be submitted for review as a comparable product

B. MANUFACTURED UNITS 1. Unit with Integral Heating shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated metal cabinet, outdoor air intake weatherhood with combination mesh filter and louver, motorized intake damper, sensors, curb assembly, service receptacle, filter assembly for intake air, supply air blower assembly and an electrical control center. All specified components and internal accessories factory installed and tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection

C. CABINET 1. Materials: Formed, double wall insulated metal cabinet fabricated to permit access to internal components for maintenance. Underside of unit shall have formed metal panels covering base panel insulation. a. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components that do not receive a painted finish. Pre-painted components as supplied by the factory shall have polyester urethane paint on 18 gauge G60 galvaneal steel. Base rail is 12 gauge, galvazined (G90) steel. Components that receive a painted finish per A/E specification shall be of 18 gauge type A60 galvaneal steel and shall be painted with a baked industrial enamel finish. Components that receive a painted finish per A/E specification shall be painted with a polyester urethane powder coat. b. Internal assemblies: 24 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel except for motor supports which shall be minimum14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel.

D. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181. 1. Materials: Fiberglass insulation. If insulation other than fiberglass is used, it must also meet the Fire Hazard Classification shown below. a. Thickness: 1 inch b. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411. c. Location and application: Floor of each unit shall be insulated with fiberglass insulation. Full interior coverage of entire cabinet to include walls and roof of unit shall be semi-rigid type and installed between inner and outer shells of all cabinet exterior components when double walls are specified

E. Access panels: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, removable, hinged/lift off access panels to provide easy access to all major components. Access panels shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized G90 steel. Removable access panels shall incorporate a formed drip edge.

F. Supply Air blower assembly options: 1. Direct-drive fan(s) Blower assembly shall consist of an electric motor. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized steel rails and further mounted on

PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 06 -2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators. Blower motor(s) shall be capable of continuous speed modulation and controlled by a factory supplied VFD.

G. Control center / connections: unit shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage power supply connections

H. Motorized Inlet Air Damper: to be of low leakage type and shall be factory installed.

I. Sensors are considered to be part of various optional operational modes or device controllers and are to be factory supplied and installed as specified

J. Curb Assembly. A curb assembly shall be made of galvanized steel provided by the factory for field assembly and installation as part of this division. The curb shall include a duct adapter(s) for supply air . The installing contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with roofing contractor to ensure curb unit is properly flashed to provide protection against weather/moisture penetration. Contractor shall provide and install appropriate insulation for the curb assembly.

K. Service receptacle: 120 VAC GFCI service outlet shall be factory-provided and installed by this contractor

L. BLOWER-DD 1. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower and must have neoprene vibration isolation devices, minimum of 1 – 1/8 inches thick 2. Fan: Airfoil plenum fan statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency. Ratings are to be established in accordance with AMCA 210, “Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.” 4. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

M. MOTORS 1. General: Blower motors greater than ¾ horsepower shall be “NEMA Premium™”. Compliance with EPAct minimum energy-efficiency standards for single speed ODP and TE enclosures is not acceptable. Motors shall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower and pulleys shall be fully machined cast-type, keyed and fully secured to the fan wheel and motor shafts. Electric motors of ten horsepower or less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley. Comply with requirements in Division 23 05 13, matched with fan load

N. UNIT CONTROLS 1. The unit shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone heating system controlled by factory-supplied remote panel, thermostats and sensors or it can be operated as a heating and cooling system controlled by a Building Management System (BMS). This unit shall be controlled by a factory-installed Network interface controller that is connected to various optional sensors. 2. Unit shall incorporate a Network interface controller with integral LCD screen that provides text readouts of status, operating settings and alarm conditions. Network interface controller shall have a built-in keypad to permit operator

PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 06 -3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

to access read-out screens and change settings without the use of ancillary equipment, devices or software. DDC controllers that require the use of equipment or software that is not factory-installed in the unit are not acceptable. Alarm readouts consisting of flashing light codes are not acceptable. 3. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) unit shall have factory installed variable frequency drives for modulation of the blower motors The VFDs shall be factory-programmed for unit-specific requirements and shall not require additional field programming to operate.

O. FILTERS 1. Unit shall have 2” thick permanent metal filters following the outdoor air intake in a V-bank arrangement and shall be accessible from the exterior of the unit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb:

1. Assemble roof curb. 2. Install roof curb level. 3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing 4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, fill all voids between curbs and ductwork with heavy density rigid board insulation of thickness to match height of roof curb.

B. Install units on vibration isolators. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

C. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal bands of connectors parallel with minimum 3 inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. Refer to Division 23 Section: “HVAC Air Distribution”.

D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.

E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

F. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories.

G. Remove from roof and dispose off-site panels removed from units during installation of economizer and dampers.

H. Locate remote panels as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

I. Provide adjustable sheaves required for final air balance.

J. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction.

K. All wiring within the AHU, where inside a control panel, shall be installed in UL approved conduit or raceway.

PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 06 -4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

END OF SECTION

PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 06 -5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

SECTION 23 81 26

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit data indicating:

1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls. 8. Accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum, Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240, ARI 340/360, or ARI 365

B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240, ARI 340/360, or ARI 365

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’ experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Split System Heat Pump

A. Basis of Design shall be Daikin, comparable products as manufactured by Mitsubishi shall be submitted for review as a comparable product

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 1 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

B. Cooling Operating Range 1. The operating range in cooling will be 0°F DB ~ 115°F DB 2. Provide wind baffle.

C. Heating Operating Range 1. The operating range in heating will be 0°F DB – 77°F DB / 0°F WB – 60°F WB.

D. Refrigerant Piping 1. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 164 total feet with a 98 feet maximum vertical difference, without any oil traps or additional components.

E. OUTDOOR UNIT 1. General a. The outdoor condensing unit is designed specifically for use with matched capacity SkyAir series indoor evaporator units. b. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of a Daikin swing compressor, motors, fan, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4 way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, service ports and suction accumulator. c. Both liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units. d. The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from the left, right, front or rear. e. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit. f. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for re- programming. g. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by- side installation with minimum spacing. h. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure switch, control circuit fuses, fusible plug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. i. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation. j. The outdoor unit shall be capable of cooling & heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. 2. Unit Cabinet: a. The outdoor unit model RZQ shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish. 3. Fan: a. The condensing unit shall consist of one propeller type, direct-drive 70 W fan motor that has multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter. b. The fan shall be a horizontal discharge configuration with a nominal airflow maximum of 1,835 cfm.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 2 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

c. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted. d. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts. e. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at further reduced sound levels during night time. 4. Condenser Coil: a. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. b. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. c. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X seamless copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to an e-Pass Design. d. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type E1. e. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion prevention. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns. 5. Compressor: a. The Daikin swing compressor shall be variable speed (PAM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target value. b. The inverter driven compressor shall be of highly efficient reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed swing “F-type” type. c. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start. d. The compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch and internal thermal overload protector. e. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. 6. Electrical: a. The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 208-230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz +/- 10%. b. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be 16VDC non-shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable. c. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, thus simplifying the wiring operation.

F. Indoor Units 1. Wall Mounted a. General 1) The Daikin indoor unit FAQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections,

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 3 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto-swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. The front grille shall be easily removed for washing. The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The drain pipe can be fitted to from either left or right sides. 2) Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3) Both refrigerant lines shall be individually insulated from the outdoor unit. 4) Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5) The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan. 6) The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7) The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1- phase/60Hz. 8) The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. b. Unit Cabinet: 1) The cabinet shall be affixed to factory supplied wall hanging brackets and located in the conditioned space. 2) The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. c. Fan: 1) The fan shall be direct-drive cross flow fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2) The fan motor shall operate on 208-230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output of 43 watts. 3) The air flow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4) The fan motor shall be thermally protected. d. Filter: 1) The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin. e. Coil: 1) Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2) The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3) The coil shall be a 2 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with an 18 FPI design completely factory tested. 4) The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 11/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5) A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line to facilitate superheat control and PID temperature control logic. f. Electrical: 1) A separate power supply will be required of 208-230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2) Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 4 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3) Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. g. Control: 1) The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2) A full array of fault diagnostics shall be accessible via the wired remote controller. 3) The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with connection to BACnet networks or interfacing with connection to BMS system. Consult with Daikin prior to applying controls. 4) Navigation Remote Controller (BRC1E71)

2. Ceiling Cassette a. General 1) The Daikin indoor unit FCQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2) Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3) Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4) The round-flow supply air flow can be field modified to 23 different airflow patterns to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5) Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6) The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 31-1/2” of lift. 7) The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8) The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1- phase/60Hz. 9) The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. b. Unit Cabinet: 1) The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2) Three auto-swing settings shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3) The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with multiple patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces. 4) A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air. 5) The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. c. Fan: 1) The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2) The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range of 0.08 HP.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 5 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

3) The airflow rate shall be available in three settings. 4) The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings to allow operation with the Daikin MERV 8 and 13 filter options. 5) The fan motor shall be thermally protected. d. Filter: 1) The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin. e. Coil: 1) Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2) The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3) The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 21 FPI design completely factory tested. 4) The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC. 5) A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 6) A condensate pump with a 33-1/2 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7) A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. f. Electrical: 1) A separate power supply will be required of 208-230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2) Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3) Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. g. Control: 1) The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2) A full array of fault diagnostics shall be accessible via the wired remote controller. 3) The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with connection to BACnet networks or interfacing with connection to BMS system. Consult with Daikin prior to applying controls. 4) Navigation Remote Controller (BRC1E71)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Install air handling units on vibration isolators.

B. Install floor mounted units on 4” high concrete housekeeping pads. Pad to be 6” wider then the unit on all sides.

C. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal bands of connectors parallel with minimum 3 inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 6 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.

E. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26.

F. Unless otherwise indicated install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest floor drain Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.

G. Water-level monitoring devices: On down flow units and all other coils that do not have a secondary drain or provisions to install a secondary or auxiliary drain pan, a water-level monitoring device shall be installed inside the primary drain pan. This device shall shut off the equipment served in the event that the primary drain becomes restricted. Devices installed in the drain line shall not be permitted.

H. Installation – Hot Water Heating Coil

1. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges, per Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 2. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement). 3. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. 4. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points. 5. Install valves and piping specialties as indicated on details as shown on the Contract Drawings. 6. Install manual air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve. Refer to Division 23 Section: “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

I. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

J. All wiring within the unit, where inside a control panel, shall be installed in UL approved conduit or raceway.

K. Refrigerant circuit access ports located outdoors shall be fitted with locking-type-tamper- resistance caps.

3.2 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT

A. Install condensing units on vibration isolators.

B. Install units on 4” high concrete pads. Pad to be 6” wider then equipment on all sides.

C. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties specified in Division 23 Section: “Refrigerant Piping.”

D. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant.

E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

F. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 7 Samuel Tucker Elementary School October 28, 2020 HVAC Replacement Contract Documents

G. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26.

H. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and local authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout.

END OF SECTION

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 26 - 8